Yamaha ELS-01 de handleiding
- Categorie
- Digitale piano's
- Type
- de handleiding
Owner’s Manual
ELS-01/01C typeU
EN
v1.7
(1)B-13 1/2
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on
it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything
over it.
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have
the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke
should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the instrument, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from
the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in
the instrument overheating.
Power supply/Power cord
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/Power cord Location
(1)B-13 2/2
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key
cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not operate the instrument or headphones for a long period of time at a high
or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall
over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-
ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them
periodically using the included tool.
Saving and backing up your data
• Always save data to a USB flash memory or other external media, in order to
help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating
error.
Backing up the external media
•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two external media.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or
modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Using the bench
Saving data
The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom
of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space
provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record
of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No. ELS-01U/ELS-01CU
Serial No.
(bottom)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
4
Accessories
•Bench
• Owner’s Manual
•Playing the ELS-01/01C — Tutorial Guidebook
•Product ID card
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELS-01/01C typeU
(hereafter ELS-01/01C).
The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-
art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical
versatility.
In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to
read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described.
Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
5
Main Features
Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 19
The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 240 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the
Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The ELS-01C contains even more — an additional 60
Registrations that utilize the expressive VA Voices and Organ Flute Voices. The Registrations in Registration
Menu are divided into five basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the
Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs.
Richly textured, four-layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital
Effects
pages 22
and 50
The ELS-01 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices – 415 altogether – created with the
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The ELS-01C adds to that 94 VA (Virtual
Acoustic) Voices and a virtually limitless variety of Organ Flute Voices. The authentic touch response
keyboard lets you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument.
What’s more, there are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section —
letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices, without having to use the Voice
Edit features.
Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 51
The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your
performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) – such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break
– that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional.
Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic
backing as well as embellishments.
Large, 6.5-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 12
This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any
angle, it also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings
simply by touching the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary
with the Data Control dial.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
6
This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with
the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product,
nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered,
reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied.
This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or
with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without
limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized
use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
• Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except
for your personal use.
•Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• The panel illustrations and LCD screens shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the ELS-01C, Version
1.7.
• The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the ELS-01/01C, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of
Musical Instruments.
The ELS-01/01C is compatible with the following formats.
“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System
Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data
compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice
parameters, and integrated effect processing.
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha
specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over
Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.
GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major
enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations,
as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.
The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single
unified format.
[ELS-01C only] Products bearing the SONDIUS-XG logo are licensed under patents of
Stanford University and Yamaha as listed on the internet web site, <http://www.sondius-
xg.com>.
1
Voices
2
Quick Introductory Guide
Organ Flutes
(ELS-01C)
3
Voice Controls
and Effects
4
Rhythm/
Keyboard Percussion
5
Registration Memory
6
Music Data Recorder
(MDR)
7
Voice Edit
8
Rhythm Program
9
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
10
Transpose
and Pitch Controls
11
13
Internet Direct Connection
Connections
14
Appendix
12
Contents
Accessories ..............................................................4
Main Features ...........................................................5
Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Front Panel ................................................................8
LCD Display/Display Select ....................................10
Overview .................................................................10
1 Quick Introductory Guide . . . . . . . . . .11
Getting Started........................................................11
Using the LCD Display............................................12
LCD Display Settings ..............................................15
Voice Display ..........................................................17
Registration Menu ...................................................19
Confirming the Version of Your Electone ................21
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)......................21
2 Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Voices for each keyboard .......................................22
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................23
Selecting Voices from the User buttons..................28
Voice List.................................................................30
3 Organ Flutes (ELS-01C) . . . . . . . . . . .35
4 Voice Controls and Effects. . . . . . . . .38
Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............39
Selecting from the panel .........................................43
Effect List ................................................................50
5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion . . . . . .51
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons............51
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons................58
Rhythm List .............................................................59
Accompaniment......................................................61
Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord
(A.B.C.) ...................................................................62
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.).....................................64
Keyboard Percussion..............................................65
6 Registration Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Storing Registrations...............................................80
Selecting Registrations ...........................................82
Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory 84
Initializing Registration Memory ..............................85
Registration Shift .....................................................85
Unifying a specific parameter.................................90
Copying Registrations.............................................93
7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) . . . . . . . .95
Calling Up the M.D.R. Display ................................95
Using the LCD Display............................................96
Formatting External Media ....................................102
Selecting a Song...................................................103
Recording .............................................................105
Changing the Song Name ....................................108
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)...111
Recalling Recorded Registrations ........................115
Playing Back a Song.............................................117
Displaying the Score.............................................122
Other Functions (Tools).........................................124
8 Voice Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Voice Structure......................................................131
Editing a Voice ......................................................132
Saving the edited Voice ........................................141
Quitting Voice Edit.................................................142
Recalling an Edited Voice .....................................142
9 Rhythm Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation ....143
Rhythm Pattern Program .......................................144
Rhythm Sequence Program ..................................174
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence
Data to external media ..........................................184
10 Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals. . . . . . . . . . 185
Footswitches .........................................................185
Knee Lever ............................................................188
Expression Pedals.................................................190
11 Transpose and Pitch Controls. . . . 193
12 Internet Direct Connection. . . . . . . 194
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet.............194
Accessing the Website from the Electone ............195
About the Internet Settings Display.......................203
Exiting from the Internet Display ...........................206
Initializing Internet Settings ...................................206
Glossary of Internet Terms ....................................207
13 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................208
Connection Examples – External Devices ............211
Connection with Computer....................................217
MIDI.......................................................................218
MIDI Control ..........................................................221
14 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Bench Assembly ...................................................223
Installing Optional Hardware.................................224
MIDI Data Format ..................................................226
Troubleshooting ....................................................241
Specifications........................................................244
Index .....................................................................246
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
8
REVERB
SUSTAIN
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1
MAX
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MIN
VOLUME
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
REGISTRATION MENU
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
UPPER
(KNEE)
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING &
JAZZ
LOWER
(KNEE)
PEDAL
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
12
2
1
1
1
23
123
123 ABCD
45
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
TEMPO
INTRO
ENDING
MAIN / FILL IN
BAR / BEAT
RHYTHM
CONTROL
START
BREAK
SYNCHRO
START
TEMPO
13 14 15 16
1234
Panel Layout
Front Panel
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2
(page 23)
REVERB buttons
(page 43)
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2
(page 22)
Monitor speaker
SUSTAIN buttons
(page 47)
REGISTRATION MENU
(page 19)
RHYTHM/
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
(page 51)
[M.] (Memory) button
(page 80)
Registration memory
(page 80)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
9
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
VIOLIN
SYNTH
FLUTE TO
LOWER
TRUMPET
1
LEAD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
MASTER VOLUME
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
DATA CONTROL
POWER
5678 910 12
D.
11
LCD display/
DISPLAY SELECT
(page 10)
PEDAL VOICE 1, 2
(page 23)
LEAD VOICE 1, 2
(page 22)
Monitor speaker
MASTER VOLUME
dial (page 11)
POWER switch
(page 11)
[D.] (Disable) button
(page 82)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
10
LCD Display/Display Select
Overview
1 LCD display (touch-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
2 DATA CONTROL dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
3 [VOICE DISPLAY] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
4 [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button . . . . . . . . . . .pages 62, 64
5 [MDR] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 95
6 [FOOT SWITCH] button . . . . . . . . . .pages 86, 185
7 [UTILITY] button . . . . . . pages 15, 191, 193, 221
8 [INTERNET] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 195
9 [VOICE EDIT] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133
) [PATTERN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 144
! [SEQUENCE] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 174
@ [U. ORGAN FLUTES] button. . . . . . . . . . . page 35
# [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button . . . . . . . . . . . page 35
$ [ROTARY SP SPEED] button . . . . . . . . . . page 48
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
DATA CONTROL
1
2
3 4 5
6 7 8
9 ) !
@ # $
Key cover/Music rest
Front Panel (page 8)
Upper keyboard
Lower keyboard
USB/MIDI connectors (page 210)
Knee lever (page 188)
Speaker switch
Left footswitch (page 185)
Expression pedal (page 12)
Second expression pedal
(ELS-01C); (page 190)
Pedalboard
Speaker
I/O connectors
(page 208)
Right footswitch (page 85)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
11
Quick Introductory Guide
Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we
recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest
possible manner how to start playing your Electone.
Plug the power cord into an appropriate electrical outlet.
Make sure that the POWER switch of the speaker is set to on.
If you are using the ELS-01C, also set the REAR SPEAKER switch to on (not
available on the ELS-01).
Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch.
Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of
the entire instrument.
Contents
1 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2 Using the LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
• Changing the Display Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
• Pressing Buttons on the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders . . . . 14
3 LCD Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• Selecting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• Muting the Touch Panel Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
• Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4Voice Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5 Registration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu. . . . . . . . . 19
• Registration Menu List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6 Confirming the Version of Your Electone . . . . . . . . . . 21
7 Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1
Getting Started
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the Electone. Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to
be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any
doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified
technician.
1
2
NOTE
When using the rear speaker,
place the Electone against a
wall, allowing about 20 cm
from the wall for optimum
sound.
3
POWER
4
NOTE
You do not need to switch the
power of the speaker on/off
whenever you use the
instrument.
If you want, you can always
keep it on and turn off the
power by pressing the main
POWER switch of the
instrument.
MASTER VOLUME
Decreasing
the volume
Increasing
the volume
1
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
12
1
Quick Introductory Guide
Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.
This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters
by simply touching the ‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that two
or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously.)
You can also use the Data Control dial to make fine changes to the parameter value
shown in the display.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Display Page
There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display. Pressing
these buttons changes the “page” of the display. The selected page’s button turns
orange.
2
Using the LCD Display
5
Maximum volume
Minimum volume
NOTE
When cleaning the display,
use a soft, dry cloth.
Do not use any sharp or
hard tools to operate the
touch panel. Doing so may
damage the display.
Page 1
Page 2
Press this button to select Page 1
Press this button to select Page 2
Press this button to select Page 3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
13
1
Quick Introductory Guide
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Pressing Buttons on the Display
There are three types of buttons: those that select a function, those that switch a
function on/off, and those that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the desired
function, simply press the button in the display directly.
For switching on/off or opening a parameter list, see the instructions below.
To switch the function on or off:
You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display, each
accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit
display.
To open the parameter list:
When you press the button, a parameter list will appear in which you can select the
desired parameter. When you select items in the display, the list closes automatically.
You can also close the list by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the list.
To change the parameter value:
To make coarse changes to the value, press the [▲]/[▼] buttons. For fine adjustment,
use the Data Control dial.
On
Off, or mute (button is grayed out)
DATA CONTROL
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
14
1
Quick Introductory Guide
Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Sliders
You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb, Pan and so on, by using the
‘virtual’ sliders in the display. There are two ways to move the slider in the display:
touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We suggest that you touch the
display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine
adjustment.
Touching the display slider directly:
Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value. The slider
will move to the point you pressed. Also, by sliding your finger up or down while
holding down the display slider, you can change the parameter value.
Using the Data Control dial:
Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value,
then turn the Data Control dial.
To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders.
Slider will move to the point you touch
Slider will follow your finger
or
DATA CONTROL
Touch here to enable the parameter
Blue mark
DATA CONTROL
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
15
1
Quick Introductory Guide
Here you can change the display settings: displayed language (English or Japanese),
touch panel sound, and display brightness.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting the Display Language
The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default
setting is English.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Press the desired button, (Japanese) or [English].
3
LCD Display Settings
NOTE
The settings in the Utility
Display are automatically
saved when another display
is called up.
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
2
LANGUAGE
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
16
1
Quick Introductory Guide
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Muting the Touch Panel Sound
The Electone is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on, giving you audio
feedback when you press a button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel
sound, follow the procedure below.
Press [UTILITY] button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility
Display.
Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the
sound.
To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in Step 2.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Adjusting the Display Brightness
You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable, easy-to-read level.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or
using the Data Control dial.
Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker.
1
2
TOUCH PANEL SOUND
1
2
DATA CONTROL
LCD BRIGHTNESS
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
17
1
Quick Introductory Guide
You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard, currently
selected rhythm, Registration Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display.
How to call up the Voice Display:
The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on. To call up the Voice
Display from any other display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.
The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing the
[1], [2], or [3] button at the top right of the display.
4
Voice Display
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
1
2
564
Switching the Display Pages
Voice Display [Page 1]
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
18
1
Quick Introductory Guide
1 Voice Sections
Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section. You can also mute specific
Voice section by pressing its button (the button is grayed-out).
2 RHYTHM
Shows the currently selected rhythm.
3 A.B.C. MODE
Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord.
4 TEMPO
Shows the current rhythm tempo.
5 BAR/BEAT
Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing.
6 REGISTRATION
Shows the current position of the Registration Shift.
You can confirm the parameter values (for example, Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each
Registration Memory simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify a specific parameter
used in various Registration Memories at one time. See page 90 for the details.
The Registrations stored to the Registration number can be copied to another
Registration number for each individual section.
Reference Page
Selecting a Voice (page 23)
Reference Page
Selecting a rhythm (page 51)
Reference Page
Auto Bass Chord (page 62)
Reference Page
Adjusting the tempo
(page 56)
Reference Page
Registration Shift (page 85)
Voice Display [Page 2]
Voice Display [Page 3]
Reference Page
Registration Memory (page
80)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
19
1
Quick Introductory Guide
A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard
Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. Each Registration
Menu button (1 – 5) includes 48 Registrations (or 60 Registrations on the ELS-01C),
each specially suited for playing in a different music style.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu
Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons.
Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,
if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration
Menu, see page 20.
Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate
button on the display.
One display page contains 12 Registration buttons. Pressing the numbered
buttons in the display changes the display pages, letting you select up to 48
Registrations from one Registration Menu button (or 60 Registrations, on the
ELS-01C).
The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange, indicating that it
has been selected, and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the
display.
Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.
5
Registration Menu
NOTE
Additional basic
Registrations are preset on
the Registration Memory
locations from 1 to 16. See
page 80 for details.
Kids
Pops & Rock
Dance & Ballad
Jazz & Latin
Symphony & World
1
REGISTRATION MENU
12345
1
2
3
4
5
2
Change the display pages here.
Reference Page
Auto Bass Chord (page 62)
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
20
1
Quick Introductory Guide
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Registration Menu List
Page
REGISTRATION MENU 1
KIDS
REGISTRATION MENU 2
POPS & ROCK
REGISTRATION MENU 3
DANCE & BALLAD
REGISTRATION MENU 4
JAZZ & LATIN
REGISTRATION MENU 5
SYMPHONY & WORLD
1
Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare
Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra
Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin
Sunny Pop 8 Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque
Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute&Harp
Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade
Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March
Synth. Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West
Symphonic March 1 Rock&Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz
Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka
Bluegrass 60’s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club
Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ
2
Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco
Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco
Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance
Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi
Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance
Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step
Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano
Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette
Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country
Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian
Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne
Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound
3
Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A Orchestra March*A
Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B Orchestra March*B
Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C Orchestra March*C
Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D Orchestra March*D
Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A
Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B
Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C
Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D
Pops Orchestra*A Evergreen Waltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A
Pops Orchestra*B Evergreen Waltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B
Pops Orchestra*C Evergreen Waltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C
Pops Orchestra*D Evergreen Waltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D
4
Kids On Stage *A 16 Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A
Kids On Stage *B 16 Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B
Kids On Stage *C 16 Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C
Kids On Stage *D 16 Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D
Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A
Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B
Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Majestic Sound*C
Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D
SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A Orchestra Swing*A
SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B Orchestra Swing*B
SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C Orchestra Swing*C
SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D Orchestra Swing*D
5
(ELS-01C)
Bright 16 Beat *A Funk *A Hip Hop Pop *A Organ Bossa *A Orchestra 3001*A
Bright 16 Beat *B Funk *B Hip Hop Pop *B Organ Bossa *B Orchestra 3001*B
Bright 16 Beat *C Funk *C Hip Hop Pop *C Organ Bossa *C Orchestra 3001*C
Bright 16 Beat *D Funk *D Hip Hop Pop *D Organ Bossa *D Orchestra 3001*D
Movie Panther *A West Coast Rock*A Fusion Shuffle*A Afro Cuban *A Wedding Song *A
Movie Panther *B West Coast Rock*B Fusion Shuffle*B Afro Cuban *B Wedding Song *B
Movie Panther *C West Coast Rock*C Fusion Shuffle*C Afro Cuban *C Wedding Song *C
Movie Panther *D West Coast Rock*D Fusion Shuffle*D Afro Cuban *D Wedding Song *D
Powerful Swing*A 6/8 Enka *A Whole Ballad *A Midnight Jazz *A Fantasy *A
Powerful Swing*B 6/8 Enka *B Whole Ballad *B Midnight Jazz *B Fantasy *B
Powerful Swing*C 6/8 Enka *C Whole Ballad *C Midnight Jazz *C Fantasy *C
Powerful Swing*D 6/8 Enka *D Whole Ballad *D Midnight Jazz *D Fantasy *D
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
21
1
Quick Introductory Guide
You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure.
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
Press the [GLOBAL] button at the top right of the display, then
press the [Version] button in the display.
The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing [OK] closes the dialog.
All current settings including Registration Memory, User Voices, User Rhythms, and
LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful
when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your
important data to external media, such as a USB flash memory.
Factory Set does not reset the Internet Direct Connection settings. If you want to reset
the Internet Direct Connection settings, see page 206.
Turn off the power.
While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back
on.
Release the ENDING [1] button after Voice Display appears.
If you don’t want to reset the LCD Display settings, you can initialize only Registration
settings. See page 85 for more information.
6
Confirming the Version of Your Electone
7
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)
1
2
Reference Page
Saving Registrations
(page 111)
Reference Page
Initializing Internet Settings
(page 206)
1
2
123
ENDING
POWER
3
Reference Page
Initializing Registration
Memory (page 85)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
22
2
Voices
Voices
This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on
the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are
available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard
and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing
together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead
Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.
Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more
keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo
instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone. Lead Voice 2 includes additional,
exclusive VA Voices which are not available in other Voice sections.
Contents
1Voices for each keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons. . . . . . . . . . . 23
• Selecting a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
• Changing the Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 Selecting Voices from the User buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Voices for the
Lower Keyboard
Voices for Pedalboard
1
Voices for each keyboard
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
VIOLIN
SYNTH
FLUTE TO
LOWER
TRUMPET
1
LEAD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2
Lead Voice 1 Lead Voice 2
Reference Page
AWM Voices and VA Voices
(page 34)
2
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
23
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing
together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section
can be selected from the panel.
Voices for Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together:
Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.
Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played, by
default.
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections,
instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 are given here.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a Voice
Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1
section.
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Reference Page
POLY (page 40)
2
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 2
Pedal Voice 1 Pedal Voice 2
1
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
Voice buttons
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
24
For example, if you have pressed the [PIANO] button, the following display
(Voice Menu) will appear.
Select the desired Voice name from the Voice menu.
The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more than can fit on one display
page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the
display.
The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange, indicating that it has
been selected.
2
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
25
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Voice volume
There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel
and using the volume slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse
adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control.
Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)
Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
level for each Voice.
The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a
maximum of full volume.
Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or pressing the Voice name of the
selected Voice in the display) calls up the Voice Condition Display.
To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control
Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
DATA CONTROL
Volume slider
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set by the slider), two
adjacent VOLUME button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
24
20
16
12
8
4
0
24
23
1
0
12
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
26
Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected
button. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive
presses alternate between the two displays.
When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing [VOICE MENU] button on
the display also calls up the Voice Menu.
From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as
Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition
display, see page 39.
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
Turning the Electone off
erases all panel settings
you have made.
If you wish to keep the
panel settings you have
made, save them to a USB
flash memory or other
external media before
turning the Electone off
(page 84).
About the To Lower function
Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can
also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each
section is on. When [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be
played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.
The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section.
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
VIOLIN
SYNTH
FLUTE TO
LOWER
TRUMPET
1
LEAD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 1
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
27
About the Solo function
The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function. Solo lets you
instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting
all other Upper Keyboard Voices.
Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice
2 section.
In this condition, all the Voices for Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard
Voice 1 and 2, and Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played.
Press the [SOLO (KNEE)] button in the Lead Voice 2 section.
This sets Solo to standby status.
To use Solo, unfold the knee lever. (Bring it down into position.)
In this condition (Solo on), only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the
Upper Keyboard. (All other Voices are muted.)
To temporarily turn Solo off as you play, press the Knee
Lever to the right with your knee.
In this condition, all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except for Lead
Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard. (Only Lead Voice 2 is muted.)
Each time you press the Knee Lever (Solo off) you can play all Voices except
Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it (Solo on) you can play only Lead
Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard.
Notes on using Solo
• The knee lever can be used to control other functions, such as switching Sustain.
When other functions are assigned to the knee lever, pressing knee lever turns
these functions on at the same time.
•Pressing the knee lever while holding down a key will not turn Solo off for that
key. Solo remains active until the next key is played after pressing the knee
lever.
• Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are played.
However, in the Solo mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played.
Reference Page
Knee Lever (page 188)
Reference Page
Voice Condition Display
(page 39)
1
2
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
3
Unfold
4
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
28
This Electone has a wide variety of Voices from which you can choose – far greater than
what is immediately apparent from the Voice buttons on the panel. Each Voice section
has one or two User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) which can be found at the right side of
each Voice section. You can use the User buttons to select Voices that cannot be selected
normally from the Voice buttons – such as Contrabass for the Upper Keyboard Voice.
Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections.
Select the desired instrument category with the category buttons
in the display. You can also choose the “USER” category to select
a User Voice you have created.
For example, to call up Marimba 1, select the percussion category.
The name of the selected category (Percussion) is displayed on the upper left.
The Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned
Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below.
3
Selecting Voices from the User buttons
1
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
User buttons
2
Reference Page
Voice Edit (page 131)
Instrument
categories
Reference Page
Voice List (page 30)
Percussion
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
29
Select a Voice (Marimba 1, for example) from the displayed Voice
Menu.
Pressing number buttons in the display calls up the other Voices in the category,
The Voice name of the selected Voice (Marimba 1) appears under the category
name, indicating that the Voice has been selected.
To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and
simultaneously press the desired Voice button.
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
1. While holding down the User button…
2. Press the Voice button.
3
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
30
This list shows all available Voices on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu.
4
Voice List
STRINGS/VIOLIN
1
Strings 1
Strings 2
Strings 3
Strings 4
Strings 5
Strings 6
Strings 7
Strings 8
Strings 9
Chamber Strs 1
Chamber Strs 2
Chamber Strs 3
Chamber Strs 4
2
Pizzicato Strs 1
Pizzicato Strs 2
Pizzicato Strs 3
Pizzicato Strs 4
Tremolo Strings
3
Strings1&7
Strings2&Viola
Strings3&4
Strings7&Violin5
Violin5&Cello
Octave Strings 1
Octave Strings 2
4
Violin 1
Violin 2
Violin 3
Violin 4
Violin 5
Violin 6
Viola
Cello 1
Cello 2
Pizzicato Violin
CONTRABASS
1
Contrabass 1
Contrabass 2
Contrabass 3
Contrabass 4
Contrabass 5
Acoustic Bass 1
Acoustic Bass 2
Pizzicato Bass 1
Pizzicato Bass 2
BRASS/TRUMPET
1
Brass Section 1
Brass Section 2
Brass Section 3
Brass Section 4
Brass Section 5
Brass Section 6
1
Trombone Sec 1
Trombone Sec 2
Trombone Sec 3
Trombone Sec 4
Trombone Sec 5
2
Brass1&Trp6
Brass2&Trp6
Horn 1&4
Octave Brass 1
Octave Brass 2
Octave Brass 3
Octave Brass 4
Octave Brass 5
Octave Brass 6
Octave Brass 7
3
Trumpet 1
Trumpet 2
Trumpet 3
Trumpet 4
Trumpet 5
Trumpet 6
Trumpet 7
Muted Trumpet 1
Muted Trumpet 2
Muted Trumpet 3
Flugel Horn 1
Flugel Horn 2
4
Trombone 1
Trombone 2
Trombone 3
Trombone 4
Muted Trombone 1
Muted Trombone 2
5
Horn 1
Horn 2
Horn 3
Horn 4
Horn 5
Horn 6
Muted Horn
6
Tuba 1
Tuba 2
Euphonium
Brass Bass 1
Brass Bass 2
Brass Bass 3
WOODWIND/FLUTE
1
Flute 1
Flute 2
Flute 3
Flute 4
Piccolo
Recorder 1
1
Recorder 2
Ocarina
Whistle
2
Clarinet 1
Clarinet 2
Clarinet 3
Clarinet 4
Bass Clarinet
3
Oboe 1
Oboe 2
Oboe 3
Oboe 4
Oboe 5
English Horn 1
English Horn 2
Bassoon 1
Bassoon 2
Bassoon 3
4
Alto Sax 1
Alto Sax 2
Tenor Sax 1
Tenor Sax 2
Tenor Sax 3
Soprano Sax 1
Soprano Sax 2
Baritone Sax
5
Sax Ens 1
Sax Ens 2
Sax Ens 3
Woodwind Ens 1
Woodwind Ens 2
Woodwind Ens 3
Woodwind Ens 4
TUTTI
1
Strings&Winds
Strings&Brass 1
Strings&Brass 2
Strings&Horn
Brass&Sax 1
Brass&Sax 2
Brass&Sax 3
Brass&Winds
2Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
1
Choir 1
Choir 2
Choir 3
Choir 4
Choir 5
Choir 6
Choir 7
Choir 8
Choir 9
2Vocal
PAD
1
Smooth Pad 1
Smooth Pad 2
Smooth Pad 3
Smooth Pad 4
Smooth Pad 5
Smooth Pad 6
Smooth Pad 7
Smooth Pad 8
2
Resonance Pad 1
Resonance Pad 2
Resonance Pad 3
Resonance Pad 4
Resonance Pad 5
Resonance Pad 6
Resonance Pad 7
Resonance Pad 8
Resonance Pad 9
Resonance Pad 10
Resonance Pad 11
3
Bell Pad 1
Bell Pad 2
Bell Pad 3
Bell Pad 4
Bell Pad 5
Bell Pad 6
Bell Pad 7
Bell Pad 8
Bell Pad 9
4
Space Pad 1
Space Pad 2
Space Pad 3
Space Pad 4
Space Pad 5
Space Pad 6
5
Noisy Pad 1
Noisy Pad 2
Noisy Pad 3
Noisy Pad 4
Noisy Pad 5
SYNTH
1
Synth Lead 1
Synth Lead 2
Synth Lead 3
Synth Lead 4
Synth Lead 5
Synth Lead 6
Synth Lead 7
Synth Lead 8
2
Pop Lead 1
Pop Lead 2
Pop Lead 3
ELS-01/01C
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
31
2
Pop Lead 4
Pop Lead 5
Pop Lead 6
Pop Lead 7
3
Synth Cla 1
Synth Cla 2
Synth Cla 3
Synth Cla 4
Synth Cla 5
Synth Cla 6
Synth Sax
Synth Trumpet
Synth Violin
4
Synth Brass 1
Synth Brass 2
Synth Brass 3
Synth Brass 4
Synth Brass 5
Synth Brass 6
Synth Brass 7
Synth Brass 8
Synth Brass 9
Synth Brass 10
Synth Brass 11
Synth Brass 12
Synth Brass 13
5
Synth Strs 1
Synth Strs 2
Synth Strs 3
Synth Strs 4
Synth Strs 5
Synth Strs 6
Synth Strs 7
6
Synth Bell 1
Synth Bell 2
Synth Bell 3
Synth Bell 4
Synth Bell 5
Synth Bell 6
Synth Bell 7
Synth Decay 1
Synth Decay 2
Synth Decay 3
Synth Decay 4
ORGAN
1
Pipe Organ 1
Pipe Organ 2
Pipe Organ 3
Pipe Organ 4
Pipe Organ 5
Harmonica 1
Harmonica 2
Harmonica 3
2
Theatre Organ 1
Theatre Organ 2
Theatre Organ 3
Theatre Organ 4
Theatre Organ 5
Theatre Organ 6
Theatre Organ 7
2
Theatre Organ 8
Accordion 1
Accordion 2
Accordion 3
Accordion 4
Bandoneon
Reed Organ
3
Jazz Organ 1
Jazz Organ 2
Jazz Organ 3
Jazz Organ 4
Jazz Organ 5
Jazz Organ 6
Jazz Organ 7
Jazz Organ 8
Jazz Organ 9
4
Pop Organ 1
Pop Organ 2
Pop Organ 3
Pop Organ 4
Pop Organ 5
Rock Organ 1
Rock Organ 2
Rock Organ 3
5
Organ Bass 1
Organ Bass 2
Organ Bass 3
Organ Bass 4
PIANO
1
Piano 1
Piano 2
Piano 3
Honkytonk Piano
Harpsichord 1
Harpsichord 2
Clavichord
2
DX E.Piano 1
DX E.Piano 2
DX E.Piano 3
DX E.Piano 4
Stage E.Piano 1
Stage E.Piano 2
Stage E.Piano 3
Stage E.Piano 4
Stage E.Piano 5
Stage E.Piano 6
3
Stack E.Piano 1
Stack E.Piano 2
Clavi 1
Clavi 2
GUITAR
1
Nylon Guitar 1
Nylon Guitar 2
Steel Guitar 1
Steel Guitar 2
12Str Guitar
Jazz Guitar 1
Jazz Guitar 2
Harp 1
Harp 2
1 Harp 3
2
Elec Guitar 1
Elec Guitar 2
Elec Guitar 3
Elec Guitar 4
Elec Guitar 5
Muted Guitar
Distortion Gtr 1
Distortion Gtr 2
Distortion Gtr 3
3
Banjo
Mandolin
Pedal Steel Gtr
PERCUSSION
1
Vibraphone 1
Vibraphone 2
Marimba 1
Marimba 2
Xylophone
Glockenspiel 1
Glockenspiel 2
2
Celesta 1
Celesta 2
Music Box 1
Music Box 2
Chime 1
Chime 2
Chime 3
TIMPANI
1
Timpani 1
Timpani 2
Timpani Roll 1
Timpani Roll 2
Timpani Roll 3
ELECTRIC BASS
1
Fingered Bass 1
Fingered Bass 2
Fingered Bass 3
Fingered Bass 4
Fingered Bass 5
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Slap Bass 3
Slap Bass 4
2
Picked Bass 1
Picked Bass 2
Picked Bass 3
Picked Bass 4
Fretless Bass 1
Fretless Bass 2
SYNTH BASS
1
Funk Bass 1
Funk Bass 2
Funk Bass 3
Funk Bass 4
Funk Bass 5
Funk Bass 6
Funk Bass 7
Funk Bass 8
Funk Bass 9
1 Funk Bass 10
2
Dance Bass 1
Dance Bass 2
Dance Bass 3
Dance Bass 4
Dance Bass 5
Dance Bass 6
Dance Bass 7
Dance Bass 8
3
Smooth Bass 1
Smooth Bass 2
Smooth Bass 3
Smooth Bass 4
Smooth Bass 5
Smooth Bass 6
Smooth Bass 7
WORLD
1
Pan Flute 1
Pan Flute 2
Bagpipe
Dulcimer
Shakuhachi
Yokobue
Shamisen
Koto
Taishokoto
2
Erhu 1
Erhu 2
Sheng
Zheng
Pipa
Nay
Surnay
Oud
Sitar
Kamanche
3
Steel Drum
Log Drum
Kalimba
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
32
ELS-01C (VA)
Voice Name Range Description
VA ACOUSTIC
1
V-Flute 1 G2 – A6
Flute with breath and other noises, which may squeak in higher registers. Setting the Touch Tone
(After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can recreate flutter tonguing.
V-Flute 2 C2 – C6
Flute suited for legato playing. Setting the User Vibrato depth to higher values has a nice effect.
V-Ocarina C3 – C6
Soft ocarina.
V-Oboe C3 – F5
Wider dynamic range with the Touch Tone effect.
V-Clarinet D2 – F5
Playing pianissimo creates breath noises, while playing fortissimo creates a brighter sound with
slightly lower pitch.
V-Soprano Sax A#2 – D5
Rounder and softer soprano saxophone.
V-Alto Sax 1 D#2 – G4
A bright alto saxophone for contemporary music. You can make the sound ‘break up’ as if
overblowing the instrument by setting After Touch to maximum and applying pressure to the key.
V-Alto Sax 2 C2 – E4
Alto saxophone suited for fusion music. Playing legato creates squeaky attack sounds and high
After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect.
V-Tenor Sax 1 A#2 – C4
Multi-purpose tenor saxophone. Soft in pianissimo and brighter in fortissimo.
V-Tenor Sax 2 C1 – G4
Soft tenor saxophone suited for jazz. Playing Legato creates squeaky attack sounds.
V-Breath Sax 1 A#2 – C4
Soft, breathy tenor saxophone suited for slow tempo music.
V-Breath Sax 2 C2 – E4
Brighter, breathy tenor saxophone suited for jazz.
2
V-Trumpet 1 A#2 – A#4
Soft trumpet. Slides and glissandos can be created with Horizontal Touch.
V-Trumpet 2 C2 – C5
Trumpet with characteristic attack sound. Lip slurs can be created by changing the pitch.
V-Trumpet 3 G2 – C5
Soft trumpet. Applying slight keyboard pressure produces breath noise.
V-Muted Trumpet A#2 – A#4
Cup-muted trumpet.
V-Trombone E1 – G3
Slides and glissandos can be created with Horizontal Touch. Also, high After Touch settings
produce an overblowing effect.
V-High Trombone C2 – C5
Brighter trombone suited for high notes.
V-Shakuhachi ---
Higher Touch Tone (After) setting increases breath noise and also squeaks the sound.
V-Erhu ---
Playing with softer touch produces hoarse sounds.
V-Sitar ---
Playing with harder touch squeaks the sounds.
VA VIRTUAL
1
V-Pan Pipe 1 E2 – G5
Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can result in flutter tonguing.
V-Pan Pipe 2 C1 – C6
Panpipe flute sound. After and Initial Touch affect the pitch and timbre.
V-Bamboo C1 – C6
Bamboo panpipe sound with breath noise. After Touch changes the pitch dynamically.
V-Bottle C1 – C6
Sound of blowing a bottle. Playing trills over a wide interval range creates a squeaky attack sound.
V-Floboe F2 – C7
A hybrid sound combining oboe and saxophone.
V-Alt Kwek C3 – C7
A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a piccolo, with a distinctive pitch change in the low
registers.
V-Tin Whistle C2 – C7
Sound of a small flute. Playing with softer touch produces breath noise.
V-India ---
Percussive sitar sound.
V-East G1 – C5
Sitar with resonance and reverberation.
V-Zag ---
Simulation of a bowed ethnic instrument. Playing legato brings out higher octave sounds.
2
V-Asian Pluck C1 – G6
Plucked ethnic instrument. Using Initial Touch brings out higher octave sounds.
V-Air Reed 1 A2 – C5
A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a saxophone. High After Touch settings produce an
overblowing effect.
V-Air Reed 2 E2 – C5
A hybrid sound combining a conventional flute with panpipes.
V-Airphone A2 – C5
A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a soprano saxophone.
V-Thin Reed E2 – G5
A hybrid sound grafting a clarinet mouthpiece onto a flute. High After Touch settings produce an
overblowing effect.
V-Harmophone G1 – G5
A hybrid sound combining a harmonica and saxophone. Depending on use of Touch Tone, both
breath noise and a bright clear sound can be produced.
V-Saxonica G2 – G5
Harmonica sound resembling an alto saxophone. Playing with soft touch results in a high-pitched
sound.
V-Grass Reed E2 – G5
A hybrid sound grafting a bassoon reed onto a brass wind instrument. After Touch changes the
pitch.
V-Soft Reed 1 A2 – G5
A hybrid sound grafting a clarinet mouthpiece to a brass wind instrument.
V-Soft Reed 2 C1 – C6
A hybrid sound grafting a bassoon reed onto a soprano saxophone; includes breath noise.
V-Troppo E1 – C6
Thick bassoon sound. After Touch changes the pitch dynamically, and applying keyboard
pressure more produces wind noise.
3
V-Buzz String A2 – F5
Simulation of a hybrid bowed-wind instrument.
V-Bow String E1 – E6
Artificial synthesized strings sound.
V-String Bow C1 – C6
Simulation of a slow-attacked violin bowed with something other than a violin bow. Playing trills
over a wide interval range creates a squeaky attack sound.
V-Cosmosis C1 – G5
Bowed strings. Initial Touch affects the attack sound.
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
33
Each acoustic instrument has its own ideal note range. Keep in mind that playing outside of the range may create unexpected and unrealistic
sounds.
Voices that do not have a specified ideal note range (“---” is shown in the chart above) can be played in any range and result in optimum sound
with stable pitch.
* When the Feet parameter is set to 8', the resulting sound is actually 16'.
3
V-E.Violin C1 – C6
Synth violin.
V-Bowe C1 – C5
Simulation of a hybrid bowed-saxophone sound.
V-Claviolin G2 – G5
A hybrid sound combining a violin and wind instrument.
V-Air Bow C2 – G5
A bowed instrument sound with noise.
V-Waspy Horn C1 – G4
A hybrid sound grafting a brass wind instrument mouthpiece to a wind instrument. After Touch
affects the muted condition. Lip-slide can be created with Horizontal Touch.
V-Mizu Horn C1 – C6
A hybrid sound combining a harmonica and trumpet.
V-Cosmo Mute C1 – C5
Simulation of a distorted brass wind instrument. After and Initial Touch affect the muted condition.
V-Fago F1 – C7
Simulated deep bassoon sound. Playing with soft touch produces breath noise with a high tone range.
VA ELECTRONIC
1
V-Jazz Guitar E1 – E5
Soft and warm jazz guitar sound.
V-Picked Guitar E1 – E5
Hard-attack guitar played with a pick.
V-Simple Bass ---
Voice suited for bass phrases. After and Initial touch affect the resonance effect.*
V-Bass Attack ---
Voice suited for bass phrases. Initial touch affects the muted condition.*
V-Thumb Bass C1 – E4
Bass sounds played with the thumb.*
V-Fretless C1 – C5
Fretless bass.*
V-Saw Lead C1 – C5
Multi-purpose lead sounds. After Touch affects the filter changes.
V-Edge Lead C1 – C4
Synth bass sound with a sharp attack portion. After Touch affects the filter changes.
V-Dist Lead G1 – C5
Distorted lead sounds. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure
raises the pitch.
V-Woody Lead C2 – G5
Lead sound with woody quality.
V-Muted Lead C2 – C5
Lead sound with wah-wah effect. After Touch heightens the wah-wah effect.
V-Talken Lead C1 – C5
Human voice-like lead sound. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard
pressure allows creation of hum noise.
2
V-Mad Tube ---
Distorted synth lead with long release sound. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing
effect.*
V-Mob ---
Distorted lead sound played with pick. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying
keyboard pressure raises the pitch by an octave.*
V-Transylva C1 – C6
Softly distorted lead sounds.*
V-Destiny ---
Wah guitar with a sharp attack.
V-Igneous C1 – C4
Lead sound with full feedback effects. After Touch affects the degree of feedback.
V-Wurli Lead C1 – C5
Simple synth lead with a sharp attack. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect.
V-Fifty Fifty ---
Analog synthesizer with simple square wave sound.
V-Ana Wave ---
Analog synthesizer. Initial touch and the length of holding down a key changes the filter effect.
V-Lyric Off C1 – C6
Wind synth sound with square wave sound.
V-Ossyncro C1 – C6
Lead sound with dynamic pitch change.*
V-Wahman C1 – A3
Wah-wah lead voice with pitch change in the attack.
V-Q. Klav C1 – G5
Funky electric clav sound. Initial touch affects the timbre.*
3
V-SFX 1 ---
Simulated hand-tapping of the open end of a pipe.
V-SFX 2 ---
Simulated scraping of a metallic plate. After Touch affects the degree of scraping.
V-SFX 3 ---
Simulated hitting of a metallic plate with a wood block. Initial Touch changes the apparent
hardness of the wood block.
V-SFX 4 ---
Soft playing results in wind sounds. Applying keyboard pressure (After Touch) produces a
distorted guitar sound.
V-SFX 5 ---
Jet noise. Applying keyboard pressure produces lead sound.
V-SFX 6 ---
Simulation of metallic plates colliding.
V-SFX 7 ---
Initial touch affects the resonance effect.
V-SFX 8 ---
Cry of a strange animal.
V-SFX 9 ---
Simulation of a thick and long hose.
V-SFX 10 ---
Trumpet with loop feedback sound.
V-SFX 11 ---
Initial touch produces the sound of hitting metal, and After Touch increase the noise.
V-SFX 12 ---
Initial touch produces the sounds of footsteps, and After Touch creates a windy sound.
V-SFX 13 ---
The sound of a soprano saxophone played in the distance. Playing with softer touch produces only
breath noise.
V-SFX 14 ---
Lead sound with After Touch-produced pitch change.
V-SFX 15 ---
Initial touch produces the sound of metal being scraped, and After Touch creates noise.
V-SFX 16 ---
Cry/roar of an animal.
Voice Name Range Description
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
34
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
AWM Voices and VA Voices
The ELS-01C features two different types of Voices: AWM (Advanced Wave Memory)
and VA (Virtual Acoustic).
VA Voices are available only on the Lead Voice 2 section while AWM Voices are
available on all sections except Lead Voice 2.
AWM is a synthesis system based on sampled waves, or audio recordings of actual
instruments. AWM Voices uses multiple samples, so that they sound like a real
instrument.
On the other hand, VA synthesis applies sophisticated computer-based “physical
modeling” technology to musical sound synthesis. VA Voices in this Electone offer
many advantages in terms of musical performance, not just in terms of sound, but also
in terms of the behavior that makes acoustic instruments so musical.
VA synthesis simulates the very complex vibrations, resonances, reflections and other
acoustic phenomena that occur in an actual wind or string instrument.
Notes on VA Voices
Since the VA Voices have unique sonic characteristics and are closer in behavior to
acoustic instruments than the AWM Voices, you should observe the following
precautions when playing VA Voices.
•Some Voices may produce unexpected or unnatural sounds when played outside
(higher or lower than) the recommended note range (pages 32 and 33).
•Pitch change may not be smooth on some Voices when Horizontal Touch is applied.
•Portamento (Lead Slide) effects may not be smooth on some Voices.
•Keep in mind that playing legato or trills may not produce any sound.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Pipe/strings – simulates resonationDriver – generates physical energy
Calculates the
speed of the
resonated air
Mouthpiece
Single-ended pipe
(saxophone)
Double-ended pipe
(flute)
Embouchure
Bow Strings
Reference Page
Voice Edit (page 131)
3
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
35
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C)
The ELS-01C has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices,
giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can
recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the
percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There are nine flute footage settings,
with three additional footage settings for the attack sound.
Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER).
The lamp above the button lights and the Flute Footage Levers appear on the
display.
On the ELS-01, [U. ORGAN FLUTES] and [L. ORGAN FLUTES] buttons
are not active (Organ Flutes does not function).
Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice.
Selecting [SINE] button produces a clean, clear sound and selecting
[VINTAGE] produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound.
Adjust flute footage settings (over a range of 0 – 8).
The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display.
The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the keyboard and listen to the
changes in the sound as you adjust the footage levels.
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
FOOTAGE Page
2
3
3
3
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
36
Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in the upper right on the
display to adjust the volume.
1 ATTACK
Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice. Footage
settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'. The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the
attack sound.
2 RESP. (Response)
Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response. Moving the lever downward
makes the keyboard response slower, creating a pipe organ effect.
3 MODE
Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound.
This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices.
FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All other notes played while
the first is held have no attack.
EACH: All notes played have an attack sound.
4 REVERB
Reference Page
Reverb (page 43)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. When the panel
REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
5 VOLUME
Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice. The volume balance of the
individual footages is maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute
sound.
4
13245
ATTACK/VOLUME Page
3
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
37
Press the [EFFECT] button at the top right of the display for the
Rotary Speaker settings.
6 EFFECT TYPE
Selects the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Press the EFFECT TYPE button to
calls up a list of the effect types. Select the desired type from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
2 Effect Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.
Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER) to
cancel the Organ Flute function (the lamp above the button turns
off).
5
1
2
EFFECT Page
Reference Pages
Effect List (page 50)
Rotary Speaker (page 48)
Select the desired effect type
6
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
38
4
Voice Controls and Effects
Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the
sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.
However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the
controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice
sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied
differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section,
independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system.
* Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2.
Controls and Effects Reference
page
for
changing
the settings
Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard
Upper
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Organ Flute
Voice
Lead Voice 1, 2
Lower
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Organ Flute
Voice
Pedalboard
Voice 1, 2
Selecting from the Voice Condition display
Pan page 39 O—O O—O
Touch Tone page 39 O—O O—O
Pitch page 40 O—OO—O
Feet page 40 O—O O—O
Reverb (send level) page 40 OOOOOO
Volume page 40 OOOOOO
Priority* page 40 ——O*———
Poly (Pedal
polyphonic mode)
page 40
—————O
Vibrato page 41 O—O O—O
Touch Vibrato page 41 O—OO—O
Lead Slide page 42 O—O———
Transpose page 42 O—O O—O
Tune page 42 O—O O—O
Effect (1/2) page 42
O
O
(Rotary
Speaker only)
OO
O
(Rotary
Speaker only)
O
Selecting from
the panel
Reverb page 43 O
Sustain page 47 O—OO
Brilliance page 47 O—O O—O
Rotary Speaker page 48 O
Contents
1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2 Selecting from the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3 Effect List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
39
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again (or press
the name of the selected Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display appears.
Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing
[1] – [4] buttons at the top right of the display.
In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch tone
and volume. The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their
functions.
1 PAN
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are
available.
2 TOUCH TONE
The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a
Voice. All Voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to
perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments.
Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch.
2 -1 INITIAL touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the
keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the
timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
2 -2 AFTER touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys
after playing them.
The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter
the timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
1
Selecting from the Voice Condition display
2 -1 2 -2 3 -1 3 -2
32
1
32
1
45
6 7 2 -1 2 -2 3 -2 456 8
Voice Condition [Page 1]
NOTE
Initial Touch may not be
effective on some organ
Voices.
NOTE
After Touch has no effect on
percussive Voices (such as
piano or vibraphone),
percussion sounds, or some
organ Voices.
NOTE
On the ELS-01, After Touch is
not applied to the Pedal
Voices.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
40
3 PITCH
Controls pitch according to the play style of Horizontal Touch or After Touch.
On some Voices in the Lead Voice 2 section, not only pitch but also timbre may be
affected.
3 -1 HORIZONTAL touch (ELS-01C)
Controls the pitch by holding down the key and moving it laterally (wiggling
your finger from side to side). The faster you move the key laterally, the faster
and greater the pitch change becomes, within a range of +/- one octave. You can
use this function in combination with Touch Tone described above to add
expressiveness to your performance.
Higher settings result in a wider pitch change. The minimum setting produces
no effect. This function is not available on the Pedalboard.
Range: 0 – 14
3 -2 AFTER touch
Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing
them.
The minimum setting produces no effect at all. Higher (positive) settings make
the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower (negative) settings make the
pitch lower. The setting of +14 or -14 results in the widest pitch change.
Range: -14 – +14
4 FEET
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide
register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'
setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is the original (factory) setting.
5 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the panel
REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
See page 43 for details.
6 VOLUME
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 25 for more information.
7 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2)
Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.
LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously.
TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously. When the Solo mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to
Last mode, regardless of the setting made here.
8 POLY (only for Pedal Voices)
Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off. Setting POLY to on
switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes it
possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways, such as playing legato or
playing intervals and chords.
Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony: 14 notes for all
sections, Upper, Lower and Pedal.
NOTE
Parameters that are available
only on the ELS-01C are
indicated by a dark frame
and background in their
display controls.
Reference Page
Solo function (page 27)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
41
The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other
sections. SLIDE (
3) only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2.
1 VIBRATO
The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and
more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some
Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.
1 - 1 PRESET/USER
Selecting PRESET calls up the original
(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.
When PRESET is selected, DELAY,
DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot
be edited.
Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato
settings for yourself.
1 - 2 DELAY
Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and
the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato
onset.
Range: 0 – 14
1 - 3 DEPTH
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more
pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Range: 0 – 14
1 - 4 SPEED
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of
the vibrato.
Range: 0 – 14
2 TOUCH VIBRATO
Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply
vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down
the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth
cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys.
1 -2 1 -3 1 -4 3 -1 3 -2
3
1
1 -1
2
4 5
Voice Condition [Page 2]
Delay
Speed
Depth
Vibrato Control
NOTE
Touch Vibrato is not applied
to the Pedal Voices of the
ELS-01.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
42
3 SLIDE (only for Lead Voices)
Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective
within a one-octave range for Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes
beyond a one-octave range.
3 - 1 ON/KNEE/OFF
On/Off switch and knee lever selector for the Slide effect.
3 - 2 TIME
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. Higher settings makes
the slide speed slower.
Range: 0 – 14
4 TRANSPOSE
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range is from -6 to +6.
5 TUNE
Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice section, producing a richer
sound. Each step represents a 1-cent change in pitch.
Range: -64 – +63
You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays. Both displays have the same
contents. You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays (Voice
Condition Pages 3 and 4).
1 EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4)
Selects the effect category. Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect
category list. Select the desired effect category from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
Reference Page
Controlling Lead Slide (with
Knee Lever); (page 190)
Reference Page
Transpose (for entire
instrument); (page 193)
Reference Page
Pitch (for entire instrument);
(page 193)
3
2
1
Voice Condition [Page 3, 4]
Reference Page
Effect List (page 50)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
43
By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory) effect category for the selected
Voice is automatically set. Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added to
the selected Voice).
2 TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4)
Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the
effect type list, corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the desired effect
type from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect type cannot be edited.
After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below is automatically changed
corresponding to the selected effect type.
3 Effect Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.
The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the
respective buttons on the panel.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Reverb
Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in
a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections,
or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately.
To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb
pages:
Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the panel,
to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display appears.
The Reverb display consists of four pages.
2
Selecting from the panel
REVERB
MAX
MIN
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
44
DEPTH:
Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds.
Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB
buttons let you make coarse adjustment in seven settings to the reverb depth while the
slider gives you fine control.
When this parameter or the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the settings
in the pages that follow have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.
Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on.
Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list.
REVERB [Page 1]
NOTE
Depending on the reverb
depth value (set by the
slider), two adjacent REVERB
button lamps may be lit at the
same time, indicating an
intermediate position.
321
REVERB [Page 2]
Reference Page
Effect List (page 50)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
45
The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on one display page. To change
the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display. Select
the desired reverb type from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter below is automatically changed
corresponding to the selected reverb type.
2 TIME
Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.
Higher settings increase the reverberance.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
3 ORGAN (only for the ELS-01C)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. This parameter
corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the
Organ Flute display.
On the ELS-01, this slider is not displayed.
Range: 0 – 24
Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section.
Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the
respective Voices.
Range: 0 – 24
Press the number buttons to change the display pages.
Reference Page
Organ Flutes (page 35)
REVERB [Page 3]
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
46
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and
microphone signal.
2 TIME
Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard
percussion, and microphone signal.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
3 RHYTHM
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm (with PERCUSSION slider)
and accompaniment (with ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the
REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display.
Range: 0 – 24
4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
Range: 0 – 24
32 41
REVERB [Page 4]
Reference Page
Connecting a Microphone or
Guitar (page 214)
Reference Pages
Changing the rhythm reverb
(page 57)
Keyboard Percussion
(page 65)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
47
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Sustain
The sustain effect, selectable for each Voice section, causes Voices to gradually fade out
when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are
independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control.
The Knee Lever can also be used to switch the sustain on/off. Sustain cannot be applied
to the Lead Voices.
To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain
Length page:
Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel,
to set the sustain. The Sustain Length display appears.
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press
the button again to turn sustain off and the lamp turns off. When
the lamp is off, sustain does not affect the corresponding keyboard.
Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are on or off
before you start to play.
To adjust the sustain length value, use the display slider. If you set the highest value
(HOLD), some Voices such as organ or synth will sound continuously even when the
keys are released.
Range: 0 – 12, HOLD
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Brilliance
Adjustment of the Voice tone, brighter or mellower.
Press the BRILLIANCE buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
brilliance for each Voice.
The buttons have seven brilliance settings.
Reference Page
Knee Lever (page 188)
SUSTAIN
UPPER
(KNEE)
LOWER
(KNEE)
PEDAL
SUSTAIN LENGTH Display
NOTE
If you change the Voice when
the sustain length is set to
HOLD and the keys are
released, the Voice only
changes after you play
another key.
NOTE
When the sustain length is
set to HOLD, previously
played note(s) may be cut off
by subsequently played
notes.
NOTE
The minimum setting results
in no sustain.
Turning sustain off
automatically resets the
sustain length to be the
default setting.
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
48
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Rotary Speaker
Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front
panel button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). The
Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP
SPEED] button. The following procedure is needed to use the Rotary Speaker effect.
Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice.
When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section, you can select the
effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4.
See page 42 for details.
When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice, select the effect
type in the EFFECT Page. See page 37 for details.
Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker.
Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel.
The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The settings in this display are
common to all Voice sections.
1
Select “Rotary Speaker” here.
Select an effect type other than [OFF].
2
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
49
1 SPEED
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz
2 MODE
Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW]
is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel.
If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button
on the panel.
Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect
in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch.
Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left
Footswitch.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel but also the Left
Footswitch, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned. See page 188 for
details.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
21
ROTARY SPEAKER Display
3
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
50
3
Effect List
REVERB
1
HALL 1
HALL 2
HALL 3
HALL M
HALL L
ROOM 1
ROOM 2
ROOM 3
ROOM 4
ROOM S
ROOM M
ROOM L
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
PLATE 1
PLATE 2
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT
2
XG HALL 1
XG HALL 2
XG ROOM 1
XG ROOM 2
XG ROOM 3
XG STAGE 1
XG STAGE 2
XG PLATE
GM PLATE
DELAY
DELAY LCR
XG DLY LCR
DELAY LR
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
TEMPO DELAY
TEMPO ECHO
TEMPO CROSS
ER/KARAOKE
ER 1
ER 2
GATE REVERB
REVERS GATE
KARAOKE 1
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
CHORUS
CHORUS 1
CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 1
XG CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 3
XG CHORUS 4
GM CHORUS 1
GM CHORUS 2
GM CHORUS 3
GM CHORUS 4
FB CHORUS
CELESTE 1
CELESTE 2
CELESTE 3
CELESTE 4
SYMPHONIC
XG SYMPHONIC
ENS DETUNE
FLANGER
FLANGER 1
FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 1
XG FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 3
GM FLANGER
V_FLANGER
TEMP FLANGER
DYNA FLANGER
PHASER
PHASER 1
PHASER 2
EP PHASER 1
EP PHASER 2
EP PHASER 3
TEMPO PHASER
DYNA PHASER
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
TREMOLO 1
TREMOLO 2
XG TREMOLO
EP TREMOLO
GT TREMOLO 1
GT TREMOLO 2
ORGAN TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
XG AT PAN 1
XG AT PAN 2
EP AUTO PAN
ROTARY SPEAKER
XG ROTARY SP
ROTARY SP 1
ROTARY SP 2
ROTARY SP 3
ROTARY SP 4
ROTARY SP 5
2WAY ROT SP
DUAL ROTSP 1
DUAL ROTSP 2
DIST+ROT SP
ODRV+ROT SP
AMP+ROT SP
DIST+2ROT SP
ODRV+2ROT SP
AMP+2ROT SP
DISTORTION
DIST HARD 1
DIST HARD 2
DIST SOFT 1
DIST SOFT 2
ST DIST HARD
ST DIST SOFT
OVERDRIVE
ST OVERDRIVE
XG DIST
XG ST DIST
V_DIST HARD
V_DIST SOFT
COMP+DIST
XG CMP+DIST
AMP SIM
XG AMP SIM
ST AMP SIM 1
ST AMP SIM 2
XG ST AMP
DISTORTION+
DIST+DELAY
ODRV+DELAY
XG DIST+DLY
XG ODRV+DLY
CMP+DIST+DLY
CMP+ODRV+DLY
XG CMP+DT+DL
XG CMP+OD+DL
V_DIST H+DLY
V_DIST S+DLY
DIST+T DLY
ODRV+T DLY
CMP+DST+TDLY
CMP+OD+TDLY
V_DST H+TDLY
V_DST S+TDLY
WAH
AUTO WAH
XG AUTO WAH
TOUCH WAH 1
TOUCH WAH 2
AT WAH+DIST
XG AT WH+DST
AT WAH+ODRV
XG AT WAH+OD
TC WAH+DIST
XG TC WH+DST
TC WAH+ODRV
XG TC WAH+OD
CLAVI TC WAH
EP TOUCH WAH
WAH+DST+TDLY
WAH+OD+T DLY
WAH+DIST+DLY
XG WH+DST+DL
WAH+ODRV+DLY
XG WH+OD+DLY
DYNAMIC
M BAND COMP
COMPRESSOR
NOISE GATE
EQ/ENHANCER
ST 2BAND EQ
ST 3BAND EQ
XG 3BAND EQ
EQ DISCO
EQ TEL
HM ENHANCER
XG HM ENHNCE
PITCH CHANGE
PITCH CHANGE
XG PCH CHG 1
XG PCH CHG 2
MISCELLANEOUS
AMBIENCE
IMPULSE EXP
RESONATOR
VOICE CANCEL
TALKING MOD
LO-FI
DYNA FILTER
DYNA RINGMOD
RING MOD
ISOLATOR
THRU
THRU
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
51
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This Electone features 274 different real rhythms featuring actual
drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment
functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and
completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the
selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard
Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion
sounds from the Upper, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard.
A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the
front panel.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a rhythm
In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example.
Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the
front panel (for example, the [POPS] button).
The relevant Rhythm Menu is displayed.
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
1
2
123
123 ABCD
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
TEMPO
INTRO
ENDING
MAIN / FILL IN
BAR / BEAT
RHYTHM
CONTROL
START
BREAK
SYNCHRO
START
TEMPO
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Contents
1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons . . . . . . . . 51
• Selecting a rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
• Operating the rhythm from the panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
• Changing the rhythm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
• Adjusting the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
• Changing the rhythm reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons . . . . . . . . . . 58
3 Rhythm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4 Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) 62
6 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7 Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• Preset Keyboard Percussion List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
• Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . 70
• Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument. . . . . . . . . . . 74
• Kit Assign List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons
1
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
Rhythm buttons
5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
52
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu.
The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms, more than can fit on the
display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons
in the display.
The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange, indicating that it has
been selected.
Rhythm Structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of
the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up
the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm
is played back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be
selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the
rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that
can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of
several measures repeats indefinitely.
2
123
INTRO
Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit
ABCD
MAIN / FILL IN
Selected Main section’s lamp is lit
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
53
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Operating the rhythm from the panel
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the
buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic
interest and “spice” to your performance.
To start/stop the rhythm:
START
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed.
To stop the rhythm, press the button again.
SYNCHRO START
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.”
The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or
Pedalboard.
When the A.B.C. mode is set to OFF, pressing the [SYNCHRO
START] button again stops the rhythm.
When the A.B.C. mode is set to something other than OFF, releasing the key from the
Lower keyboard or Pedalboard stops the rhythm.
FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating
rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit)
MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes
playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section.
BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is
selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes
playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. There are three Ending sections that can be selected
with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the rhythm
automatically stops.
ABCD
MAIN / FILL IN
Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes
BREAK
START
SYNCHRO
START
The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected
123
ENDING
Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit
START
SYNCHRO
START
START
SYNCHRO
START
Reference Page
Automatic Accompaniment –
Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
(page 62)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
54
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
INTRO
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a
short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm.
First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the
[START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the
rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display
shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern.
For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern
in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:
ENDING
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically
adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm.
When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing
back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending
phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down
(ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again,
while the ending is playing.
To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/
FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit.
To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/
FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the
selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes.
When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto
Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display.
Pressing the selected Rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name
of the selected rhythm in the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.
When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display, the Fill In pattern is
automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections.
123
INTRO
BAR / BEAT
TEMPO
NOTE
When an Intro or Ending
pattern is playing, the Lower
Keyboard cannot be played.
123
ENDING
NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1]
button during playback of
the Main section will first call
up the fill in pattern, then the
Ending 1 pattern.
ABCD
MAIN / FILL IN
NOTE
You can record the currently
selected section to
Registration Memory.
However, you cannot record
the on/off status of the Auto
Fill In function.
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
55
To use the Break patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]
button.
Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the
Footswitch. See page 186 for details.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the rhythm volume
There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the
panel and using the volume slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make
coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control.
Using VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse):
Press one of the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to set the desired level.
The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a
maximum of full volume.
Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine):
Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of
the selected rhythm in the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.
To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the
Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
BREAK
START
SYNCHRO
START
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
DATA CONTROL
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set by the slider), two
adjacent VOLUME button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
56
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Adjusting the tempo
Turn the TEMPO dial clockwise to increase the tempo, and counter-clockwise to
decrease it.
TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per
minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/
BEAT indicator.
On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left indicates the current bar or
measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar.
You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in the Voice Display. In the Voice
Display, both Tempo and Bar/Beat can be seen in one display.
BAR / BEAT
TEMPO
TEMPO
Increasing
the tempo
Decreasing
the tempo
TEMPO Indicator
BAR / BEAT
TEMPO
Bar (measure)
Beat
BAR/BEAT Indicator
Reference Page
Voice Display (page 17)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
57
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press [PRESET TEMPO] button in the
display to restore the tempo to the original setting.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the rhythm reverb
You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds
used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display.
When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no
effect.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
Reverb (page 43)
DATA CONTROL
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
58
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or
2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that you
have created with the Rhythm Pattern Program function. This also allows you to assign
two or three rhythms from the same category to be selected from different buttons; one
from the original Rhythm button, and the others from the User buttons.
Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
The Rhythm Menu appears in the display.
Select the desired rhythm category with the category buttons in
the display.
You can also choose the “User” category to select a User rhythm you have
created.
The currently selected rhythm category appears at the top left of the display.
The rhythm name shown below the category name is that of the currently
assigned rhythm and is irrelevant to the rhythm category.
Select a rhythm from the displayed Rhythm Menu.
Pressing the number buttons in the display calls up the other rhythms in the
category.
2
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons
1
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
User buttons
Reference Page
Rhythm Pattern Program
(page 144)
2
Currently selected
rhythm category
Currently selected
rhythm name
3
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
59
3
Rhythm List
MARCH
1
Marching Band 1
Marching Band 2
Marching Band 3
Alpine March
6/8 March 1
6/8 March 2
6/8 Kids
6/8 Organ March
Broadway
SF March
Wild West
Baroque
WALTZ
1
Vienna Waltz
Orchestra Waltz
Simple Waltz
Gentle Waltz
Guitar Serenade
Snow Waltz
Classic Waltz
Mariachi
Alpine Waltz
Musette
2
Jazz Waltz 1
Jazz Waltz 2
Jazz Waltz 3
Jazz Waltz 4
Modern Waltz
Pop Waltz
Country Waltz
SWING&JAZZ
1
Big Band 1
Big Band 2
Big Band 3
Big Band 4
Big Band 5
Big Band 6
Big Band 7
Big Band Bop
Orch. Big Band
Orchestra Swing
Movie Panther
Jungle Drum
2
Jazz Club
Simple Swing
Acoustic Jazz
Medium Jazz
2
Fast Jazz
Combo Swing
Cool Combo
Light Swing
Afro Cuban 1
Afro Cuban 2
Bebop
Five-Four
3
Jazz Ballad 1
Jazz Ballad 2
Movie Swing
Piano Trio
Midnight Swing
Slow Jazz
Moonlight 1
Moonlight 2
Winter Song 1
Winter Song 2
4
Foxtrot
Slowfox
Quickstep
Dixieland 1
Dixieland 2
Dixieland Jazz
Ragtime
Charleston
Guitar Swing
POPS
1
8Beat Light 1
8Beat Light 2
8Beat Light 3
8Beat Light 4
Folk Rock 1
Folk Rock 2
60’s 8Beat
Asian Pops
Unplugged 1
Unplugged 2
Unplugged 3
8Beat Adria
2
Bubblegum Pop
70’s 8Beat
Tijuana
SingerSongWriter
Surfin’ 8Beat
Finger Pickin’
Heart Beat
Guitar Pop
2 British 16Beat
3
16Beat 1
16Beat 2
16Beat 3
16Beat 4
Fusion Shuffle 1
Fusion Shuffle 2
Jazz Pop
16Beat Shuffle 1
16Beat Shuffle 2
4
Pop Shuffle
Eurovision Pop
British Pop
Sing Along
Simple Shuffle 1
Simple Shuffle 2
Simple Shuffle 3
R&B
1
Blues Rock
Motor City
Soul 1
Soul 2
16Beat Soul
Frankly Soul
Gospel Funk
Jazz Funk
Funk Beat 1
Funk Beat 2
Detroit Pop 1
Detroit Pop 2
2
New R&B
Modern R&B
New Gospel
Cool Blues
Gospel Shuffle
Gospel Sisters
Amazing Gospel
6/8 Blues
Slow Blues
6/8 Soul
Blues Shuffle
LATIN
1
Samba
Big Band Samba
Light Samba 1
Light Samba 2
Pop Samba 1
Pop Samba 2
1
Bossa Nova 1
Bossa Nova 2
Bossa Nova 3
Pop Bossa
2
Mambo 1
Mambo 2
Salsa 1
Salsa 2
Montuno
Calypso
Cha Cha Cha
Big Band Cha Cha
Pop Cha Cha
3
Rumba
Pop Rumba
Fast Rumba
Guitar Rumba
Beguine 1
Beguine 2
Cuban Bolero
Tango 1
Tango 2
Tango Orchestra
Tango Milonga
WORLD MUSIC
1
Bolero
Flamenco
Pop Flamenco
Pasodoble
Polka 1
Polka 2
Banda Polka
Irish Dance
Tarantella
Sirtaki
Enka
2
Reggae
Happy Reggae
Sheriff Reggae
Shuffle Reggae
Bluegrass 1
Bluegrass 2
Hoedown
Country 2/4
Country Shuffle
Country Band
Hawaiian
Mexican Dance
This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
60
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
•
BALLAD
1
Power Ballad
Dramatic Ballad
Movie Ballad 1
Movie Ballad 2
Secret Service
Carpenters Pop
Romantic Ballad
Love Song
16Beat Ballad 1
16Beat Ballad 2
16Beat Ballad 3
Easy Ballad
2
Guitar Ballad 1
Guitar Ballad 2
Guitar Ballad 3
Organ Ballad
Chart Ballad
Analog Ballad
Pop Ballad
8Beat Modern
Chillout
Slow&Easy
3
6/8 Slow Rock 1
6/8 Slow Rock 2
6/8 Orchestra 1
6/8 Orchestra 2
6/8 Ballad
Acoustic Ballad
ROCK
1
Power Rock
Southern Rock
60’s Rock 1
60’s Rock 2
Hard Rock 1
Hard Rock 2
Rock Shuffle 1
Rock Shuffle 2
Tears Rock 1
Tears Rock 2
Soft Rock
British Rock
2
Country Rock 1
Country Rock 2
New Country
Cowboy Rock
Rock&Roll 1
Rock&Roll 2
Skiffle
Caribbean Rock
R&R Shuffle
Jive
Boogie Woogie
DANCE
1
Ibiza 1
Ibiza 2
Euro Trance
Disco Teens
Techno Party
Club Dance
Dream Dance
Club House
UK Pop
US Disco
Swing House
2
US Pop
US Hip Hop
Classic Hip Hop
Trip Hop
Chart Pop
Ground Beat
Hip Hop Groove
Hip Hop Pop
Hip Hop Light
Euro Hip Hop
3
Latin DJ’s
Club Latin
Latin Disco 1
Latin Disco 2
Garage
6/8 Trance
80’s Dance
Pop Beat 1
Pop Beat 2
Funky Dance
4
Disco Philly 1
Disco Philly 2
70’s Disco 1
70’s Disco 2
Disco Funk
Disco Chocolate
Dance Pop
Table 1:
Certain rhythms created for use with slow, soft
Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the
beginning, may not have drum sections. To use
these rhythms, refer to the following information.
Some sections of the following nine rhythms are
configured with accompaniment only; they do not
contain any drum or percussion.
Some sections of the following five rhythms do not
contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even
though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass
part will not sound.
•Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category
•Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category
•Unplugged 1 in the POPS category
•Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category
•New Country in the ROCK category
Category Rhythm Section
MARCH
6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B
Baroque All sections except Intro 1
WALTZ
Simple Waltz Ending 1
Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1
WORLD
MUSIC
Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A
Hoedown Ending 1
Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A
BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A
ROCK R&R Shuffle Ending 1
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
61
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental
embellishments when rhythms are used.
Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition
display.
Press any one of the RHYTHM buttons once.
At the bottom of the display, there are seven part buttons, such as Chord 1,
Chord 2, Pad, and so on. These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and
Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts.
Turn the desired parts on.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,
and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding
button in the display.
If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound.
CHORD 1/CHORD 2:
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.
PAD:
This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as
strings and organ.
PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2:
These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song,
such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending
on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.
4
Accompaniment
Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do
not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add
drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.
1
Accompaniment parts
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
62
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the
Accompaniment.
Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm
Condition display.
The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompaniment
volume and reverb. Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial
to adjust the volume/reverb.
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the
Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely
new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your
disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment
patterns.
Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass
pattern of the A.B.C. will not sound.
To set the A.B.C. function:
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The A.B.C. section is at the left half of this display.
5
Automatic Accompaniment
– Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
3
DATA CONTROL
Reference Page
POLY (page 40)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
12
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
63
1 A.B.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
SINGLE FINGER:
The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different
chord/bass combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by
simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The chord
produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower
keyboard.
Key of C
Major chords:
Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s
name).
Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it.
7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it.
Minor 7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white
key to the left of it.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
FINGERED CHORD:
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords
played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in
the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play
only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the
basis of the previously played chord.
Key of C
Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
CUSTOM A.B.C.:
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows
you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note
on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7
CaugCm maj7 Cdim Cdim7 Csus4
Cm7-5C7sus4 C6 Cm6 Cadd9
NOTE
When playing certain chords
(aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and
m6), make sure to play the
root of the chord as the
lowest note in that chord.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
64
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
2 MEMORY
LOWER:
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep
playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm
plays.
PEDAL:
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing
even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass
accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your
fingers from the Lower keyboard.
When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal
Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops
the rhythm.
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the
melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords
you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use
Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each
providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played. Melody On
Chord can also be controlled with the Knee Lever.
To set the M.O.C. function:
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The M.O.C. section is at the right half of this
display.
1 M.O.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
Mode 1:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.
6
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
12
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
65
Mode 2:
Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played.
Mode 3:
Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody
played.
2
KNEE
On/off switch for Knee Lever control over Melody On Chord operation. To use the
Melody On Chord function with Knee Lever control, first switch the Knee setting to
ON, then select one of the three modes (described above). When the control is on,
pressing the Knee Lever to the right activates the Melody On Chord function.
Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume
is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices.
The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of drum and percussion
sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard.
Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard
Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned
beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the
drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion
Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] or [2] button.
The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) Display appears.
Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on
the Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on
the Pedalboard.
Reference Page
Controlling Melody On Chord
(with Knee Lever); (page
189)
7
Keyboard Percussion
1
2
NOTE
In the Voice Display, each
Voice section can be muted
(page 18).
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
12
NOTE
Two Keyboard Percussion
sets, [1] and [2], can be
played at the same time by
setting both buttons to on.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
66
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Select the desired percussion kit.
As a default, EL Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit from
a total of 16 different kits. Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up the
Percussion Kit List. Choose the desired Kit from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard
Percussion List on page 67.
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard
Percussion.
Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the reverb and volume settings.
The settings here determine the reverb/volume for the entire Keyboard
Percussion setup, not for each percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust
each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume (page 74).
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
3
NOTE
Percussion Kit selection is
common for the Keyboard
Percussion function. For example,
if you select “Standard Kit 1” for
Preset 1 of the Keyboard
Percussion, the kit for Preset 2 and
User 1-8 will also be changed to
“Standard Kit 1.”
The message “Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data?” may
appear when you change the kit. Select [CLEAR] to clear all assignments (made in
the ASSIGN Page) and detailed settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the
selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected kit without
erasing the assignments and detailed settings.
4
DATA CONTROL
5
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
67
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
: Indicates the keys of the ELS-01/01C keyboard.
*The 10 kits, Standard Kit 2 – Symphony Kit, have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1.
EL Kit Standard Kit 1*
Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)
Bass Drum Heavy - Kick -
SD Brush Roll - Side Stick Surdo Mute
Snare Drum Heavy - Snare Surdo Open
SD Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap Hi Q
SD Reverb 1 - Snare Tight Whip Slap
Snare Drum Light - Floor Tom L Scratch H
Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L
Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap
Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise
Hi-Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click
Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L
Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - Mid Tom H Seq Click H -
Synth Tom 3 SD Brush Roll - Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap -
Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - High Tom Brush Swirl -
Synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 - Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap -
Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 - Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl -
- Snare Drum Light - Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll -
Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 - Ta mbourine Castanet -
- Snare Drum Rim 1 - Splash Cymbal Snare Soft -
Tom 2 - Sticks -
Hi-Hat Close - Kick Soft -
Tom 1 - Open Rim Shot -
Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight -
Ride Cymbal 1 - Kick Bongo H
Orch Snare Drum - Side Stick Bongo L
Crash Cymbal 1 - Snare Conga H Mute
Snare Drum Roll - Hand Clap Conga H Open
Orchestra Cymbal - Snare Tight Conga L
Orch Cymbal Roll - Floor Tom L Timbale H
Tr iangle Mute - Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L
Tambourine - Floor Tom H Agogo H
Tr iangle Open - Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L
Castanet - Low Tom Cabasa
Cowbell 1 - Hi-Hat Open Maracas
Timbale 1 Low - Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H
Timbale 1 High - Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L
Wood Block Low - Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short
Conga Low - High Tom Guiro Long
Wood Block High - Ride Cymbal 1 Claves
Conga High - Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H
Bongo Low - Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L
Agogo Low - Ta mbourine Cuica Mute
Bongo High - Splash Cymbal Cuica Open
Agogo High - Cowbell Tr iangle Mute
Cuica Low - Crash Cymbal 2 Tr iangle Open
Hand Claps - Vibraslap Shaker
Cuica High - Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells
Shaker - - Bell Tree
- -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
68
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)
Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call -
Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak -
- - Door Slam -
String Slap - Scratch Cut -
- - Scratch H 3 -
- - Wind Chime -
- - Telephone Ring -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Flute Key Click - - CarEngnIgnition - -
- - - Car Tires Squeal - -
- - - Car Passing - -
- - - Car Crash - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call Burst
Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak Roller Coaster
- - Door Slam Submarine
String Slap - Scratch Cut -
- - Scratch H 3 -
- - Wind Chime -
- - Telephone Ring -
- - - -
- Shower - Laugh
- Thunder - Scream
- Wind - Punch
- Stream - Heart Beat
- Bubble - Foot Steps
- Feed - -
- - - -
- - - -
Flute Key Click - CarEngnIgnition -
- - Car Tires Squeal -
- - Car Passing -
- - Car Crash -
- - Siren -
- - Tr ain -
- - Jet Plane -
- - Starship -
- Dog - Machine Gun
Horse Laser Gun
Bird Tweet Explosion
- Firework
- -
- -
Ghost -
Maou -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
69
Arabic Kit Pop Latin Kit
Preset 2(PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)
Kick Soft - Bongo H Open 1 f -
Side Stick - Bongo H Open 3 f -
Snare Soft - Bongo H Rim -
Arabic Hand Clap - Bongo H Tip -
Snare Drum - Bongo H Heel -
Floor Tom L - Bongo H Slap -
Hi-Hat Closed - Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap
Floor Tom H - Bongo L Open 3 f -
Hi-Hat Pedal - Bongo L Rim -
Low Tom - Bongo L Tip -
Hi-Hat Open - Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip
Mid Tom L - Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel
Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom - Timbale L Open Conga H Open -
Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa - - Conga H Mute -
High Tom Nakarazan Edge - - Conga H SlapOpen -
Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom - - Conga H Slap -
Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge - - Conga H SlapMute -
Duhulla Dom Bongo H - Paila L Conga L Tip -
Tambourine Bongo L - Timbale H Open Conga L Heel -
Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute - - Conga L Open -
Conga H Open - Conga L Mute -
Conga L - Conga L SlapOpen -
Zagrouda H - Conga L Slap -
Zagrouda L - Conga L Slide -
Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top
Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f -
Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim -
Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip -
Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short
Floor Tom L Ta bla Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long
Hi-Hat Closed Ta bla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f -
Floor Tom H Ta bla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f -
Hi-Hat Pedal Ta bla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine
Low Tom Ta bla Sak Bongo L Tip -
Hi-Hat Open Tabla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel -
Mid Tom L Ta bla Flam Bongo L Slap -
Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas
Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom - Shaker
High Tom Sagat 3 - Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak - Cuica Mute
Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 - Cuica Open
Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L -
Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open -
Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 - -
Cowbell Rik Tak 1 - -
Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 - Tr iangle Mute
Claves Rik BrassTremolo - Tr iangle Open
Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H -
- Rik Tik - Wind Chime
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
70
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your
original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The
User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] or [2] buttons.
In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.
The K.B.P. display appears.
Press [USER 1] on the display.
This procedure assigns User 1 to the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.
You can call up the User 1 setting the next time you press the [1] button.
Select the desired percussion kit.
See page 66 for selecting the kit.
Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top right of the display to call
up the ASSIGN Page.
In the ASSIGN Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys.
Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to
a key.
Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the
display. The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears.
1
2
3
4
5
Reference Page
Kit Assign List (page 76)
Drum Instrument Category
Drum Instrument Menu
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
71
Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by
simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the
display and pressing the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is
to be assigned.
When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is
displayed at the top of the display. The assignments are saved to the User
memory selected in Step 2 (in this example, User 1).
Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your
own User Keyboard Percussion set.
To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page) and
press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
6
NOTE
Though eight User Keyboard
Percussion setups can be
created, they cannot be
memorized to Registration
Memory. Only on/off data and
the Keyboard Percussion
Menu are memorized to
Registration Memory.
The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved
when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, the square at
the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the
power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved.
The key to which the instrument is to be assigned
Instrument Name
Press the key.
Hold down the Instrument name…
7
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
72
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
To erase all instruments:
You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page).
Press, then release the [CLEAR] button. The following display
appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all data. When [CLEAR] is
selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the
display.
Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the operation.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings
You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations, or copy from
one User location to another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to User 1.
Press the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button to copy Preset 1.
To copy Preset 1, select the [1] button; to copy Preset 2, select the [2] button.
To copy either User location, select button [1] or [2].
Within the Menu buttons, select the User location as the
destination — for example, User 1.
1
2
1
2
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
73
Press the COPY [FROM] button in the display. A list appears,
letting you select the copy source location.
Select the copy source (Preset 1 here) from the list.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy Preset 1. When
[COPY] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily
appears in the display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.
3
4
5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
74
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each
instrument. The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to
Registration memory.
Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard (the keyboard to
which the instrument to be changed is assigned).
Press the [SETUP] button at the top right of the K.B.P. display to
call up the SETUP Page.
Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be
changed is assigned).
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its
settings.
1 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Seven
pan positions are available.
2 PITCH COARSE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by 100 cents.
Range: -64 – +63
3 PITCH FINE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent, allowing more
detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE (
2).
Range: -64 – +63
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
5 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
1
2
3
1
2345 6
The name of the
selected instrument
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
75
6 RESET
Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their default values.
Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following display, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore (initialize) the default settings.
When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message momentarily appears on the
display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
76
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
EL Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cym Mute
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Orch Cymbal Mute
Cymbal March
Cym Brush Shot
Tam- Tam
HI-HAT
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Close
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Analog HH Open
Analog HH Close
SNARE DRUM
Snare Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth Snare Drum
Orch Snare Drum
Snare Drum Roll
Analog SD
SNARE BRUSH
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Brush Shot 2
SD Brush Roll
TOM
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Brush Shot 2
Tom Brush Shot 3
Tom Brush Shot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3
BASS DRUM
Bass Drum Light
Bass Drum Heavy
Bass Drum Attack
Synth Bass Drum
Bass Drum March
Concert BD
Analog BD Short
Analog BD Long
CONGA/BONGO
Conga High
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Bongo Slap
Bongo Mute
CUICA/SURDO
Cuica High
Cuica Middle
Cuica Low
Tamborim Open
Tamborim Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff
TIMBALES/COWBELL
Timbale 1 High
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 2 High
Timbale 2 Low
Timbale 3 High
Timbale 3 Low
Timbale 4 High
Timbale 4 Low
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4
PERCUSSION 1
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas High
Maracas Low
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Woodblock High
Woodblock Mid
Woodblock Low
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Agogo High
Agogo Low
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Windbell Down
Windbell Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Taiko 1
Taiko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3
Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Soft 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Short
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Hit Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight 2
Snare Electro
Snare Roll
Stick Ambient
Snare Pitched
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Hybrid Tom 1
Hybrid Tom 2
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Kit Assign List
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
77
Hybrid Tom 3
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Hybrid Tom 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Tight H
Kick Wet
Kick Tight L
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Light
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snap
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Rock Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate
Kick 2
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Electro Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Gate
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Analog Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hat Open Analog
Hat Close Analog
Hat Close Anlg 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Analog
Snare Analog 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Roll
Side Stick Anlg
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Analog
Kick Anlg Short
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
78
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Conga Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Analog
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Dance Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hat Close Anlg 3
SNARE DRUM
Snare Clap
Snare Dry
Snare Techno
Reverse Dance 2
Side Stick Anlg
Rim Gate
Snare Analog 3
Snare Analog 4
Vinyl Noise
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Dance 1
Tom Dance 2
Tom Dance 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Tom Dance 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Techno
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno Q
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Dance
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap Analog
PERCUSSION 2
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Anlg
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Snare Dance 1
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
Jazz Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
Snare Jazz H
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Brush Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Symphony Kit
CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Hand Cymbal S
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Mute
Gran Cassa
Kick Soft 2
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
79
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
SFX Kit 1
SFX
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
SFX Kit 2
SFX 1
Phone Call
Telephone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
SFX 2
CarEngnIgnition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Arabic Kit
ARABIC 1
Nakarazan Dom
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Hand Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak
ARABIC 2
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Tik
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Tabel Dom
Tabel Tak
ARABIC 3
Sagat 1
Sagat 2
Sagat 3
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick
TOM/BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine
Pop Latin Kit
CONGA
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
BONGO
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
PERCUSSION 1
Timbale H Open
Timbale L Open
Paila H
Paila L
Cowbell Top
Tambourine
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Cuica Open
Cuica Mute
Cabasa
Shaker
PERCUSSION 2
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime
Hand Clap
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
80
6
Registration Memory
Registration Memory
Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and
LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while
you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel.
The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy
access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch.
All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other
external media.
Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration
Memory buttons, 1 – 16. When you record your own Registration settings to a numbered
button, the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result.
When you initialize the Registration Memory (page 85), the preset settings will be recalled
and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults.
Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel
buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash
memory or other external media for future recall.
Create your original Registration.
While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish
to save your Registration.
When the Registration is stored, the numbered button flashes momentarily.
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D
Contents
1 Storing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2 Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory . . . 84
4 Initializing Registration Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5 Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display . . . . 86
• Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display . . . . 88
6 Unifying a specific parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7 Copying Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1
Storing Registrations
1
Reference Pages
Selecting a Voice (page 23)
Selecting a Rhythm
(page 51)
Voice Controls and Effects
(page 38)
2
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
2. Press desired numbered button.
1. While holding down [M.] button...
When recording Registration settings, the square at the top left of the
display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Registration is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is
being saved.
6
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
81
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:
The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number.
• Pitch (page 193)
• MIDI Control settings (fpage 221)
• Mic. Volume (page 215)
• Mic. Reverb (page 215)
• LCD related settings (page 15)
• Internet Direct Connection settings (page 203)
• Score related settings except Next Page (page 123)
The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and
cannot be stored individually for each number.
• Transpose (page 193)
• Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 36)
• Registration Shift (page 85)
• Auto Fill setting (page 54)
• Reverb type (page 44)
• User Voices (page 141)
• User rhythms (page 167)
• User Keyboard Percussion (page 70)
• Rhythm Sequences (page 174)
• Disable setting (page 82)
• Disable mode (page 83)
• Next Page setting of score setting (page 123)
Reference Page
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File);
(page 111)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
82
6
Registration Memory
Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to
select.
•You can also recall Registrations by using the right footswitch. This function is called
“Registration Shift” (page 85).
•You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at specific points
within the Rhythm Sequence. This function is called “Registration Sequence” (page
179).
2
Selecting Registrations
Using the [D.] (Disable) button:
Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select
different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows
you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on
throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if
you want to.
The particular settings that do not change when the [D.] (disable) button is on
depend on the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting
Disable Mode” on page 83.
7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
Disable Button
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
83
Selecting Disable Mode:
The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [D.]
(Disable) button is on. There are two Disable modes: NORMAL (rhythm menu,
tempo, etc. are disabled) and TEMPO (only tempo is disabled).
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Press the DISABLE MODE [NORMAL] or [TEMPO] button.
NORMAL
When the Electone is set to the NORMAL mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is
on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration
Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
•Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode, Knee lever control for M.O.C.
•Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo
TEMPO
When the Electone is set to the TEMPO mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is on,
the rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory
number.
1
2
Disable Mode
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
84
6
Registration Memory
You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as
USB flash memory, with sixteen Registrations comprising a single file.
The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash
memory. For details about using other external storage devices, see chapter 7, Music
Data Recorder (M.D.R.).
Insert a USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display.
Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data
(page 103).
Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the
Registration Edit display.
Press the [SAVE] button in the display.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message closes.
3
Saving the Registration data to USB flash
memory
Reference Page
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File);
(page 111)
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
4
5
Reference Page
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 115)
Reference Page
Changing the Song Name
(page 108)
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
85
Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration
Memory. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data.
In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to an external storage
device.
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL
Page in the Utility display.
Press the INITIALIZE [EXECUTE] button on the right side in the
display.
The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears.
Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data. When the operation is
complete, the Electone will be restarted.
Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.
The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your
hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you
can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in
sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify.
Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist
Shift display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice
Display.
4
Initializing Registration Memory
Reference Page
Factory Set (Initializing the
Electone); (page 21)
5
Registration Shift
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
86
6
Registration Memory
Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
display
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel.
Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right of the display to call up
the RIGHT Page (Regist Shift display).
1 OFF
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you select OFF, you cannot change
Registrations by using the Right Footswitch.
2 SHIFT
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory
presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function
‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The numbered buttons light up as they
are selected.
3 JUMP
Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration.
You can set the Jump “destination” with buttons in the display or the Data
Control dial.
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
1
2
3
4
REGIST SHIFT Display
Registration number of the destination
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
87
4 USER
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to
the order you’ve specified.
To set the User Registration order:
1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
2 Press the [SET] button in the display.
The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is
entered.
3 Repeat the above procedure 1 through 2 to set the Registration
order.
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls used to move the cursor (colored orange) along the Registration
row in the display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in
the row above indicate the position in the sequence (in other words, the number of
successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be
memorized.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
2
DATA
These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration
row.
SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row,
or for replacing a number at the current cursor position.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will
light), then press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the
Registration row. After using SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among
the numbers.
INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position.
To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a numbered position. Then, press the
desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), and press [INSERT]
in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other
numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of
80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the
operation cannot be executed.
3
1
2
Registration row
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
88
6
Registration Memory
DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the
unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press [DELETE] in the
display.
CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings.
After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all data” momentarily appears in the
display and returns to the previous display.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
3
SHIFT END
Determines how to end the Registration shift function.
STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.
TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the sequence
over again from the beginning.
NEXT REGIST: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is
called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved
in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen
Registrations.
The Shift End mark ( ) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you
entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End.
Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Display
You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display, Page 1.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice
Display.
The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display.
Reference Page
Saving Two or More
Registration Banks to One
Song (page 111)
NOTE
When you play the song
using Next Regist. function,
always press the [F] (Play)
button in the M.D.R. display
to start the song and activate
these functions.
The [CUSTOM] (Custom
Play) button will not activate
the Next Regist. function.
NOTE
If the next Registration data
contains User voices and/or
VA custom voices, the
Electone may produce no
sound for a few seconds
while loading the
Registration.
NOTE
When you use the Next
Regist function during
Rhythm playback, Rhythm
Sequence and User Rhythm
cannot be loaded.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
89
Registration Shift, OFF:
The current Registration number is displayed.
Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode:
The current Registration number (left) and the next number (right) are
displayed.
Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode:
The current Registration number (left) and the destination number (right) will
be displayed. You can change the destination number even in the middle of the
performance by using the buttons in the display or the Data Control
dial.
Registration Shift, in “USER” mode:
Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift. You can change the
Registration by moving the cursor (in orange) right/left, using the displayed
buttons or the Data Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently advanced
the shift setting in the middle of your performance. The user Registration
settings cannot be edited here.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration.
Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration.
Moves the cursor five step to the right and selects the Registration.
Current Registration
Next Registration
Destination number
can be changed.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
90
6
Registration Memory
In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently “unify” a specific parameter used in
different Voice groups at one time. This is useful when you are changing, for example,
the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be
applied to the entire instrument.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel.
Press the [2] button at the top right of the display to select
Page 2.
Press the PARAMETER button (indicates the currently selected
parameter) in the display to select the desired parameter for
changing.
The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting you select the desired
parameter.
6
Unifying a specific parameter
Available parameters
• Reverb • Rhythm Reverb • Volume
• Panning • Brilliance • Sustain
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
Parameter
Part
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
91
Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop-up
menu. After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up menu
automatically closes.
The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the
display.
Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on.
Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the
SETTINGS buttons: ALL ON, ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT.
ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers.
ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory numbers.
ON: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “ON.”
OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “OFF.”
SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same
Voice as the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position.
The targeted Registration numbers are underlined.
Parameter value
for each
Registration
Selected
parameter
4
Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
92
6
Registration Memory
Unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values.
You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or
offset them. Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you
change the parameter’s value.
Unifying the currently turned-on parameter’s value:
Pressing [SET] unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values to the one in
the currently selected Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears
prompting you to confirm the operation.
To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Offsetting the currently turned-on parameter’s value.
Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets
the currently turned-on parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter,
[
E]/[F] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-].
If you change the value, and if parameter values for some Registration memory
number reach the maximum or minimum, the following message appears.
In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation, ignoring those parameters at
maximum or minimum value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.
5
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
93
In the Voice Display, Page 3, you can copy a Registration stored to a specific
Registration Memory number to another number on a specific section basis (Voices,
rhythm, keyboard percussion). (The function is called Regist Section Copy.) This is
useful, for example, when you want the upper keyboard Voice in Registration number
4 to be the same as in Registration number 1.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the
Voice Display.
Press the [3] button at the top right of the display to call up Page
3.
Press the COPY FROM [REGIST] number button and select the
Registration number that you wish to copy.
To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.
7
Copying Registrations
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
Registration number
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
94
6
Registration Memory
Press the COPY FROM [SECTION] button and select the Regist
Section that you wish to copy.
To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.
In the same way, select the COPY TO Registration number and
Regist Section.
The COPY TO Regist Section depends on the Regist Section selected for COPY
FROM.
Press the [COPY EXECUTE] button at the bottom right in the
display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy the Registration
and a message momentarily appears in the display indicating
that the Registration has been copied.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
4
Section
5
NOTE
If you change the source
Regist Section after
changing the destination
Regist Section the
destination may
automatically change to the
section selected as the
source Regist Section.
6
7
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
95
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone
that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory or
other external media. If you install the optional floppy disk drive such as the UD-FD01 to the
Electone, you can record your performances/settings to floppy disks.
Before using an external media such as USB flash memory, carefully read “Precautions
when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 100.
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations
related to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done
in the M.D.R. display.
Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open
exits from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press
the [MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display.
All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M.D.R. display. To call up the
M.D.R. functions and the M.D.R. display, press the [MDR] button.
Contents
1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
• Song Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
• Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal . . . . . . . . . . 100
• Handling the floppy disk drive (FDD) and floppy disks . . . . . . . . . . 101
3 Formatting External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4 Selecting a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
• Recording your performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
• Re-recording (Retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
• Recording each part separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
• Punch-in Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6 Changing the Song Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
7 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) . . . 111
• Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song. . . . . . . . . . . 111
• Replacing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
• Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order of the
Registration data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8 Recalling Recorded Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9 Playing Back a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
• Playing Back the Selected Part(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
• Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
• Changing the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
• Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10 Displaying the Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
• Changing the score contents and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
11 Other Functions (Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
• Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
• Song Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
• Converting to XG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
• Converting ELS format to EL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
• Converting EL format to ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
• Checking the Remaining Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
1
Calling Up the M.D.R. Display
NOTE
The items shown in the
display and their order differ
depending on the
connected external media.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
7
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
96
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The M.D.R. display consists of two display pages: the SONG Page and the TOOLS
Page. In the SONG Page, you can select a song, then play it back or record it. The
TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations, such as copy, delete, rename, etc.
Pressing the [SONG] or [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display switches
between the SONG Page and the TOOLS Page.
1 Current Media/Folder
Displays the currently selected media and folder(s). The left side of the indication
(before “:/”) shows the particular media and the right side shows the path with
currently selected folder name at the end. For example, “USB 01:/Folder1/” indicates
that the folder named “Folder1” contained in the USB flash memory is selected.
2 Media/Folder/Song List
Displays the media, folders or songs. Up to 120 folders can be displayed (5 folders at
once).
3 Scroll Buttons
If the Media/folder/Song List contains more than 5 media/folders/songs, you can scroll
through the display with these buttons.
4 SETTINGS
Displays/changes the settings for the currently selected song.
5 UP
Selects the higher layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/”
(Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects “USB
01:/” (USB flash memory).
2
Using the LCD Display
1
789)@ #$%^&!
23 554 6
SONG Page TOOLS Page
Reference Page
Setting a song (page 104)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
97
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
6 IN
Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/
Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [IN] button
selects “USB 01:/Folder1/SONG/” (the SONG folder contained in Folder1 of the
USB flash memory).
7 Elapsed Time
Displays the elapsed time when recording/playing back a song (up to 59 min. 59 sec.).
8 Song Control
Controls song recording, playback, etc.
9 CUSTOM PLAY
Records/plays back only the performance data of the selected songs. Using this button
does not recall the Registration data.
) SCORE
Displays the selected song’s score.
! REGIST EDIT
Displays the Regist (Registration) Edit Display for the selected song’s Registration data.
@ CREATE FOLDER
Creates a new folder in the Media/Folder/Song List. Up to 120 folders can exist in one
media or within a single upper folder. Pressing this button calls up the New Folder
display in which you can enter the desired name. Enter the name and press the [OK]
button to create a new folder. The method for entering a folder name is the same as
that of the song name. See page 108.
# CHANGE NAME
Changes the folder/song name.
$ COPY
Copies the selected song.
% DELETE
Deletes the selected folder/song.
^ CONVERT
Converts the selected song for use on another Electone or other instruments, or
converts songs recorded on another Electone for use on the ELS-01/01C. Songs can be
converted to XG format, EL format or ELS format.
& INFORMATION
Displays available memory when media is selected and displays information such as the
title and composer when a song is selected. The information to be displayed depends
on the songs.
Reference Page
Displaying the Score (page
122)
Reference Pages
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File)
(page 111)
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 115)
Reference Page
Changing the Song Name
(page 108)
Reference Page
Song Copy (page 124)
Reference Page
Song Delete (page 126)
Reference Pages
Converting to XG (page
128)
Converting ELS format to EL
(page 129)
Converting EL format to ELS
(page 129)
Reference Pages
Checking the Remaining
Memory (page 130)
About Protected Songs
(page 116)
Reference Pages
Recording Your
Performance (page 105)
Playing Back a Song (page
117)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
98
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
If media cannot be found:
Press the button until the button is grayed out.
The Media List will be displayed. If there are more than five media selections,
scroll through the display with the Scroll buttons (page 96) to display the desired
media.
If songs cannot be found:
Check the current media/folder (page 96).
If the desired song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use
the Scroll buttons (page 96) to display the song.
If the desired song is stored in a different folder, use the
and buttons to select the folder in which the desired
song is stored.
If you are not sure of the folder in which the desired song is stored, press
button a few times to display the Media List and check the folders in
which the song is likely to be stored.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Song Icons
These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song.
1
1
2
NOTE
If the message “Registration
data will be initialized” is
displayed when you select a
folder, press [INITIALIZE]
button (media is not
initialized). The message will
appear when recalling the
protected song.
Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or floppy disk. This icon is
displayed in the Media/Folder List.
Indicates a folder.
Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is effective for the media.
Indicates that performance data is contained in the song.
Indicates an XG-compatible song.
Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 116 for details.
Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 116 for details.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
99
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in
groups. If you’ve saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory, it may be difficult
to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar
songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier
to find the songs you want.
Songs:
A song is the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single
song can contain a variety of data, including the recorded performance,
Registrations, and so on.
Files:
A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various
files, such as Registration files and performance files. The following files are created
with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will,
however, be displayed on a computer.)
In addition, one file (extension: .name) is automatically created in each folder for
organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone
display.
Song
1
Song
2
Song
3
Song
4
Song
5
Song
6
3
Song 2
Song 1
Song Song Song
Folder A
Song 4
Folder B
5
6
Creating folders
USB flash memory
USB flash memory
Files in the song
File Explanation Extension
Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the
keyboards and pedals of the Electone.
.mid
Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices,
User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.
.b00
XG-converted data This file contains XG song data, for which Electone
performance data is converted to XG-compatible
format.
.mid
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
100
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal
This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal.
When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle
the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions
below.
NOTE
For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the
owner’s manual of the USB device.
■ Compatible USB devices
• USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive, hard
disk drive, etc.)
• USB hub
• USB-LAN adaptor
The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially
available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of
USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB
device for use with this instrument, please visit the following
web page:
http://www.yamahamusicsoft.com/
NOTE
Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse
cannot be used.
■ Connecting USB device
• When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE
terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is
appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.
NOTE
During your performance, make sure to slide the USB unit under
the keyboard. If you leave it in the forward position, there is a
danger of hitting it with your hand and breaking the USB device.
•If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time
to a terminal, you should use a self-powered USB hub device.
Make sure to connect the USB hub to the USB TO DEVICE
terminal directly, not to the USB unit. Up to two USB hubs
can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB
hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the
power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub.
• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you
can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the
instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of
USB 1.1.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Using USB Storage Devices
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device (external
media), you can save data you’ve created to the connected device,
as well as read data from the connected device.
NOTE
Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the
instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.
■ The number of USB storage device to
be used
Up to four USB storage devices can be connected to the USB
TO DEVICE terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The
number of USB storage devices that can be used
simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB
hub is used is a maximum of four.) This instrument can
recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device.
■ Formatting USB storage media
When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a
message may appear prompting you to format the device/
media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 102).
The format operation overwrites any previously
existing data. Make sure that the media you are
formatting does not contain important data. Proceed
with caution, especially when connecting multiple
USB storage media.
■ To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,
apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or
media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make
sure to disable write-protect.
■ Connecting/removing USB storage
device
Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the
instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and
Delete operations).
While the instrument is accessing data (such as
during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format
operations) or is mounting the USB storage device
(shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB
connector, do NOT remove the media from the device,
and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing
so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
If you are using a USB flash memory which has a
lamp, the lamp will flash when the instrument is
accessing the USB flash memory.
Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB
storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the
device too often. Doing so may result in the operation
of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up.
■ Data Backup
For maximum data security, Yamaha recommends that you
keep two copies of important data on separate USB storage
devices. This gives you a backup if one device is lost or
damaged.
While holding this button,
pull the unit toward you.
Keeping the unit in position
toward you, connect/
disconnect the device.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
101
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Handling the floppy disk drive (FDD) and floppy disks
If you want to use floppy disks, install the optional UD-FD01
floppy disk drive to the Electone. For information on how to
install the UD-FD01, see page 224.
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care.
Follow the important precautions below.
■ Floppy disk compatibility
• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
■ Formatting a floppy disk
•If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or old
disks that have been used with other devices, you may need to
format them. For details on how to format a disk, see page 102.
Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after
formatting. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the
disk contains important data.
NOTE
Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be
useable as is on other devices.
■ Inserting/removing Floppy Disks
● Inserting a floppy disk into the disk drive
•Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and
the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot.
Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the
way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.
Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk
drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk
drive or floppy disks.
● Removing a floppy disk
• After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy
disk, firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk
slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out
of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is
stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject
button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it
again.
*Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as
recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is
inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically
accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has
data.
Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the
instrument itself while the disk is being accessed.
Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the
disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive.
•Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before
turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for
extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause
data-read and -write errors.
■ Cleaning the disk drive read/write head
• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a
precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended
period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from
the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors.
•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha
recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type
head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask
your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper
headcleaning disks.
■ About floppy disks
● Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these
precautions:
•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure
to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their
protective cases when they are not in use.
•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or
low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids.
•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface
of the floppy disk inside.
•Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those
produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic
fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk,
rendering it unreadable.
•Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.
•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a
floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the
proper location.
● To protect your data (write-protect tab):
•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s
write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When
saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-protect tab is set to
the “overwrite” position (tab closed).
● Data backup
•For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you
keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks.
This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
102
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
If you find that you are unable to use new, blank external media (such as floppy disks or
USB flash memory) or old one that have been used with other devices, you may need
to format them.
Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data
erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media
contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation. Proceed
with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage media.
Connect the media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the button repeatedly if necessary until the button
is grayed out.
Select the desired media you want to format.
To format a USB flash memory, select [USB XX] (USB 01, USB 02, etc.).
To format a floppy disk, select [USB-FD01].
Press the [FORMAT] button in the display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[FORMAT] to format the media, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
3
Formatting External Media
NOTE
Before purchasing a USB
flash memory device, please
consult your Yamaha dealer,
or an authorized Yamaha
distributor for advice, or see
the Yamaha website (http://
www.yamahamusicsoft.com/).
1
2
3
4
NOTE
“USB-FD01” appears in the
display only when a floppy
disk drive has been installed
to the Electone.
NOTE
The indications USB 1, USB
2, etc. will be displayed
depending on the number of
the connected media.
5
Do not remove the media
while formatting.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
103
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
In the M.D.R. display, you can select a blank song to which you want to record your
performance or save the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for
playback.
In the M.D.R. display, songs in the currently selected media are displayed.
First call up the desired media (and folder, if necessary) in the display, then select the
desired song.
Check the currently selected media at the top of the display.
For example, if you want to select a song in the USB flash memory, confirm that
“USB 01:/” is displayed at the top of the display.
For information on selecting the desired media, see page 98.
Press desired song button in the display.
Referring to the song name and icons, select the desired song. The selected song
button is highlighted in orange.
4
Selecting a Song
1
Do not remove the media
while the instrument is
accessing the media.
(If you are using a USB
flash memory which has a
lamp, the lamp will flash
when the instrument is
accessing the USB flash
memory.)
Currently selected media/folder
2
Reference Pages
Changing the Song Name
(page 108)
Song Icons (page 98)
Song containing data
Blank song (containing no data)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
104
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
About the [SETTINGS] button
Pressing the button calls up a display of the currently selected song,
letting you confirm the tempo and parts that are played when playing the song.
When playing back the song (by pressing the [F] (Play) button), only those parts
that are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo (over a
range of 50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the song contains
no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.” Pressing the [PART SAVE] button
saves each part playback setting (the tempo is not saved).
Reference Pages
Playing Back the Selected
Part(s) (page 118)
Changing the Tempo (page
119)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
105
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recording your performance
Set the desired Registrations on the Electone. Make all the Electone settings necessary
for the song you will record. This means entering the all Registrations you will need for
the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the
Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song.
Insert a media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Select a blank song for recording your performance.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data,
you will need to delete it beforehand.
Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SONG Page, then select the [I] (Record) button.
The following display appears, indicating that you can record your performance.
Press the [F] (Play) button.
An hourglass icon appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating that
Registration data is currently being read.
After the hourglass disappears, begin playing.
When you finish playing, press the [J] (Stop) button in the
display.
The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the M.D.R. display. The song
to which your performance is recorded is automatically named “SONG_XXX”
(XXX indicates song number). You can change the song name as desired. (For
details, see page 108.)
5
Recording
Never attempt to eject the
media or turn the power
off during recording,
reading and playing back.
1
2
3
NOTE
If a message appears
indicating there is not
enough free space in media,
press the [CANCEL] button,
then press the [J] (Stop)
button to go back to the
M.D.R. display. Delete any
unnecessary songs if
possible or insert new
media. To continue
recording your performance
on media that does not have
enough space, press the
[CONTINUE] button.
4
5
6
Do not remove the media
from the Electone while
data is being recorded
(while the hourglass icon
or other message is
shown).
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
106
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Re-recording (Retry)
If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the
beginning.
Press the [I] (Record) button while the song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the
song.
Press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY] button to begin re-
recording the song.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously
recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recording each part separately
You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets
you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration
changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song.
Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately, though,
the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper
Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to
the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper
Keyboard.
Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 105 to call up the Rec Standby display.
Select the parts for recording.
Each pressing of a part button switches the status: PLAY, OFF, and REC.
PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded.
OFF: Recording or playback is not active.
REC: Records the part.
If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard
(including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however,
records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to
“REC” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts
be recorded at the same time.
1
2
NOTE
Pressing the [J] (Stop)
button cancels the re-
recording and records the
previous performance.
1
2
NOTE
When you record the
Keyboard Percussion, make
sure that the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] and/or [2]
button is set to on.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
107
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard
parts.
Press the [F] (Play) button, and start playing after the
hourglass icon disappears.
Press the [J] (Stop) button when you are finished with your
performance to stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.
Press the [I] (Record) button to set up recording of the next
part—Upper part in this case.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Select
[OVERWRITE] to overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears.
Select the parts for recording.
Set the next parts you want to record (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.”
Also set the part already recorded (in this case Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,”
so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones.
Change the playback tempo for the selected part.
The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original.
The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower
tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to start recording of the new
part or parts (Upper part).
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately.
The [CUSTOM PLAY] button is used here to record only the parts that have
been selected for recording, and plays back only those parts that have been
selected for playback. While you listen to the parts being played back, start
playing the melody on the Upper Keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically
stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of
the previously recorded parts.
NOTE
You should also set the
Control button to “REC,” in
order to record Registration
changes and expression
pedal operation.
3
4
5
6
7
NOTE
Use the TEMPO [RESET]
button in the display to reset
the tempo to its original
value (100%).
8
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
108
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Punch-in Recording
This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which you don’t want to use, either
that of a specific part(s) or all parts.
Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [F] (Play) button to start playback of the song.
Press the [K] (Pause) button at the point you want to execute
punch-in recording.
Press the [I] (Record) button.
The recording display appears, indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready
to record.
Set the parts which you want to change to “REC” status and
other parts to “PLAY.”
Press the [F] (Play) button to start punch-in recording. Play the
new phrase, as you want it to be changed.
Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the punch-in recording as
soon as you reach the end of the phrase.
You can name the song, such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was
recorded. However, song names of the EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, cannot
be changed.
Select the song whose name you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
1
NOTE
This function is best used
when the phrase to be re-
recorded has definite
beginning and end points,
with slight pauses before
and after.
6
Changing the Song Name
2
3
4
5
6
7
NOTE
When you change the name
of an XG song, the
extension (.mid) cannot be
changed.
1
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
109
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [CHANGE NAME] button.
The following display appears.
Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [E][F]
buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.
Select the desired character type: alphabet, upper or lowercase,
or symbol.
Select the desired character for entry.
A song name can contain up to 50 characters.
After finished, select [OK] to actually enter the name.
The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display.
3
4
DATA CONTROL
Cursor
or
5
NOTE
If you select Japanese as
the Language in the Utility
display, you can also select
Japanese language
characters (hiragana and
kanji, normal size katakana,
half size katakana, full size
alphabet, and full size
symbols).
6
NOTE
An XG song name can
contain up to 46 characters.
7
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
110
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
To delete the entered character:
Move the cursor to the character you want to delete.
Press the [DELETE] button at the bottom right in the display.
The character is deleted.
To convert into kanji (Japanese language):
This applies only if you are using the (Kana-Kan) button in Japanese.
When the input “Hiragana” characters are shown in the reverse
display (highlighted), press the (kanji-conversion) button
once or several times to convert to the characters into the
appropriate kanji.
• The reversed area can be changed by the [E][F] buttons in the display or
the Data Control dial.
• The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the (cancel)
button.
To actually enter the change, press the [OK] button or enter the
next character. To enter the hiragana character itself (without
converting it), press the (delete) button.
1
DATA CONTROL
Cursor
or
A “name is not available” message may appear when you press the [OK] button to
finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you
should enter another name.
The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates numbers.)
MDR_xx.EVT ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.TMP TMP
MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.TMP TMP.E02
MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.B00 ELS_SONG.TMP
MDR_xx.Vxx SONG_xxx SONG_xxx.C02
SONG.NAM
2
1
2
NOTE
Songs are ordered in the
following sequence: symbol,
number, alphabet, hiragana,
kanji, other symbols. Names
with an asterisk (*) at the top
are exceptions to this rule.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
111
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
You can also record Registrations by themselves, without recording a performance.
Bulk data, including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm
Patterns (User rhythms) Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices, are also saved in the
operation.
First create your original settings you want to save then select
the destination (blank song).
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the
Regist (Registration) Edit Display.
Press the [SAVE] button in the display.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
After the message disappears, exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit Display by
pressing the [CLOSE] button and return to the SONG SELECT Page. The
song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG
XXX” (XXX indicates song number).
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song
When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers, you can save additional
Registration banks to a single song, with the following procedure.
First create the original settings you want to save, then select the
destination song.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the
Regist (Registration) Edit Display.
The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown.
Press the lowest blank (empty) Registration button.
7
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)
1
2
3
Reference Page
Next Regist (page 88)
Programming a Registration
Sequence (page 179)
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
112
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [SAVE] button.
The Registration data will be added.
When you play back this song, the top Registration bank in this display will be
loaded to the Electone. You can also change the order of the Registration bank.
See page 113.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Replacing Registrations
The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without
changing the performance data. In advance, you need to create the original Registration
that will replace the old one.
Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the
Regist (Registration) Edit Display.
The Registration bank which has been saved to the song is shown.
Select the Registration bank you wish to replace.
Press the [SAVE] button.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of overwriting the Registration
bank. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite (replace), or select [CANCEL] to
abort the operation.
4
1
2
3
4
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
113
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
of the Registration data)
When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can use
two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as
you play the song. This function is called Next Regist (Registration).
If you want to use the Next Regist (Registration) function, you’ll have to make one of
the following settings in advance:
•Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next Regist (Registration) as the
Shift End, in advance.
•Enter the Next Regist (Registration) data in the Registration Sequence.
Save the desired Registrations to a song.
For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song, see page
111.
Select the song containing the Registrations for which you want
to change the order.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG Page to call up the
Regist (Registration) Edit Display.
Change the Registration order, in the order you want to recall.
First select the specific Registration bank you want to edit, then move, copy or
delete the selected data as needed to change the order.
M1
REG_001
M16 M1 M16
REG_002
NOTE
If the next Registration data
contains User voices and/or
VA custom voices, the
Electone may produce no
sound for a few seconds
while the Registration is
being loaded.
1
NOTE
If the Next Regist
(Registration) function is
used while the rhythm is
being played back, the
sequence data and User
rhythm will not change.
2
3
4
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
114
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
1 Registration Data List
From this list, select the Registration you want to move, copy or delete. The selected
Registration is highlighted in orange. When more than five Registration banks are
saved in the song, a scroll button is available for scrolling through the
Registration Data List.
2 MOVE
Moves the selected Registration bank up or down.
3 DATA TO BE LOADED
When loading the Registration bank to the panel, select the desired data you want to
load. For more information, see page 115.
4 LOAD
Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel/keyboards. After loading, press one of
the Registration Memory button and play the keyboard to check the Registration.
5 SAVE
Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song. The currently
selected Registration in the Registration Data List (1) will become the destination
location.
6 COPY
Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the
Registration Data List.
7 DELETE
Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List.
Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit Display by pressing the
[CLOSE] button at the top right of the display.
2
1
4
3
7
6
5
5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
115
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to
the Electone by the following procedure. The M.D.R. independently recalls the
following five types of data:
• REGIST
• USER VOICE
• K.B.P.
• USER RHYTHM
• SEQUENCE
You can select and recall the desired data independently.
Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to
load back to the Electone.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist
(Registration) Edit Display.
Select the Registration you want to load to the Electone.
Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED” buttons, select the desired
data you want to load.
8
Recalling Recorded Registrations
1
2
3
4
NOTE
When you load the
Registration data by using
the Next Regist function, all
data will be loaded no
matter which buttons you
select here.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
116
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [LOAD] button.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Press the [LOAD]
button to load the Registration data.
Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.
Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit Display by pressing the
[CLOSE] button at the top right of the display.
5
NOTE
If you load a Registration
while a rhythm is playing,
sequence data and User
rhythms in the Registration
data cannot be loaded.
When you select the protected song, the buttons (DATA TO BE LOADED) may
be unavailable (grayed out). For example, combining a part of one protected song
with another protected song is not allowed.
About Protected Songs
If you buy or download the song data, it may be protected so that you cannot delete
or copy, in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright. This is
“Protected Song.” Protected songs can be saved to a USB flash memory confirmed
by Yamaha.
The protected song can be played back as well as the song you created, but it cannot
be converted to XG format, or EL format. It is not possible to edit the Registration
data in the protected song, nor to overwrite the performance data.
If you want to edit the protected song, first copy it within one media/folder, then
edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copy song (called
“protected edit song”) is available only when the original song (called “protected
original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the protected
original song.
To move the protected song in a USB flash memory with a computer, you’ll
need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application. If you move the song
without Musicsoft Downloader, the song cannot be played back. Musicsoft
Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http://
music.yamaha.com/download/
6
You cannot edit this song
You can edit this song, only when this is
in the folder that contains protected
original song.
Folder
Protected
Original
Song
Protected
Edit Song
Copy
When you want to edit a
protected song, first
initialize the Registration
Memory (page 85), then
select the desired song. If
you have not initialized the
Registration first, the
edited song may not be
saved.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
117
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The M.D.R. enables you to play back commercially available XG-compatible song data
and MIDI data created with a computer as well as songs recorded on the Electone itself.
Select the song to be played back.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to load the
Registration data.
An hourglass icon appears, indicating the Registration data is loading.
If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be
loaded. You can check the Registration order in the Regist (Registration) Edit
Display.
If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the
LCD returns to the SONG Page.
Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data
(the elapsed time is shown).
In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute
specific parts and playback only selected parts. For more information, see page
118.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically
stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the
[J] (Stop) button in the display.
9
Playing Back a Song
1
2
Reference Page
Next Regist Settings
(Changing the order of the
Registration data) (page
113)
3
Reference Page
About the [SETTINGS]
button (page 104)
Custom Play
If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the
[CUSTOM PLAY] button instead of the [F] (Play) button. This displays the
song time and starts playback immediately.
When you play the song using the Next Regist function, always press the [F]
(Play) button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
118
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Playing Back the Selected Part(s)
You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts
are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part,
such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.
To play back the selected part(s):
During playback or in the Settings Display, press each part button to turn the part you
want to playback to “PLAY” and the part you want to mute to “OFF.” Each pressing of
a part button switches the status between PLAY and OFF. Pressing the [PART SAVE]
button saves each part’s playback status.
To play back the selected part(s) of XG-compatible song data:
Press the Part [XG] button while XG-compatible song data is being played back.
The following XG Part Setup Display appears.
Press the appropriate channel buttons (e.g., the [CH1] button) to set each channel to
playback or mute. Each pressing of a button switches the status: PLAY and OFF. Set a
part to [PLAY] if you want to play it back and [OFF] if you do not.
The [ALL] button enables you to switch all channels to PLAY/OFF at once.
To set each channel’s volume use the sliders. Each channel’s volume can be adjusted
between 0 and 100.
The [ALL] slider adjusts the overall volume.
Reference Page
Setting a song (page 104)
Reference Page
Converting to XG (page
128)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
119
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause
Fast Forward and Rewind:
During playback, press the [H] (Fast forward) button or [G] (Rewind) button and
hold it down until the time reaches the desired position.
Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the
point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM
PLAY] button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [K] (Pause)
button.
To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [F]
(Play) button or [CUSTOM PLAY] button.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Tempo
You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display,
either while the song is stopped or while it is playing.
To Change the Tempo:
Use the TEMPO buttons in the display or Data Control dial to change the
tempo. (The TEMPO dial on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the
Music Data Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100%
and values less than 100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100% indicate
faster tempo.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
120
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
To reset the changed tempo:
Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value
(100%).
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Repeat Playback
This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one
specific song.
Select the song you wish to play back.
If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be
played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SONG Page.
Press the button on the panel to call up the Settings
Display.
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
121
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the REPEAT button to select the repeat mode.
Each press of the button switches the mode.
SINGLE
Repeats the currently selected song again and again.
ALL
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order.
RANDOM
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly.
OFF
Cancels repeat playback.
Exit from the Settings Display by pressing the button at
the top right of the display.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the SONG Page to begin
playback.
4
REPEAT button
5
6
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
122
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The M.D.R. display can display a music notation (score) of the performance data
recorded to media. You can change the size and the number of staffs to be displayed.
While a song is being played back, the cursor moves according to the performance and
the pages are automatically turned.
Select the song containing performance data.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [SCORE] button in the display.
The currently selected song score will be displayed.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to start playing back
the song.
As the song plays back, the cursor moves accordingly and the page is
automatically turned at the appropriate point.
In this condition, pressing the [I] (Record) button in the display lets you
record a song and have the score displayed for you.
The score size can be adjusted by pressing the [SIZE CHANGE] button in the
display. Each press of the [SIZE CHANGE] button alternates the score size in
the following sequence: normal, large, extra large, small, normal, and so on.
Please note that the size cannot be changed while a song is being recorded.
You can manually turn the page, by stopping playing back a song
using the [J] (Stop) or [K] (Pause) button, and then pressing
the PAGE [E] or [F] buttons in the display.
Pressing these buttons moves to the previous or next page. The PAGE [F]
button can be assigned to the left foot switch (page 123).
To exit the score, press the [SCORE OFF] button in the display.
10
Displaying the Score
1
2
3
NOTE
The score size setting
cannot be stored to a
Registration Memory.
NOTE
Scores for protected songs
cannot be displayed,
excepting those songs that
specifically allow score
display.
4
5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
123
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the score contents and settings
The Score Settings Display lets you choose the contents to be displayed. In this display,
you can also assign the Next Page function to the left foot switch:
Display the score.
Press the [SET UP] button in the display to call up the Score
Settings Display.
Change the score settings.
To set whether a specific part is displayed or not in the score, press the
appropriate [ON] or [OFF] buttons of each part. Please note that at least one of
the upper keyboard, lower keyboard or pedalboard will be set to [ON].
Available settings for notes and how they will be displayed (NOTE) include [A,
B, C] (conventional C-D-E indications), [FIXED DO] (solfeggio), [MOVABLE
DO] (relative solfeggio) and [OFF].
For the CH SETTINGS, the upper keyboard, lower keyboard and pedalboard
can be assigned to the channels with the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the
Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button.
Selecting [AUTO] automatically assigns parts to the channels according to the
song data.
To set the QUANTIZE value use the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the
Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button. The
shorter the note value is selected, the more precisely the score is displayed.
Setting the NEXT PAGE L. Foot SW [ON] lets you turn the score to the next
page with the left foot switch. You can also turn the score to the next page with
the PAGE [F] button in the display. If rhythm, glide and/or rotary speaker
are assigned to the left foot switch and set on, both the assigned functions and
the Next Page function work.
Exit from the Score Settings Display by pressing the [CLOSE]
button at the top right of the display.
1
2
NOTE
Please note that the score
settings cannot be changed
while the song is being
recorded. The [SET UP]
button is disabled during
recording.
3
NOTE
The score display settings
cannot be stored to a
Registration Memory.
Only the left foot switch
setting can be stored to USB
flash memory as
Registration data common
to all Registration Memory
numbers.
NOTE
Setting the NOTE to
[MOVABLE DO] displays
each key note as “Do.”
Reference Page
About Quantize (page 156)
4
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
124
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The TOOLS Page in the M.D.R. display has many functions, such as song copy, song
delete, etc.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Song Copy
This function lets you copy data recorded in one song to another song. You can copy
and exchange the data even between two different media. (Only songs created with the
ELS-01/01C can be copied. Songs created with the EL-series, such as the EL-900,
cannot be copied.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media
in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 songs,
Song Copy is not available.
To copy a song:
Insert the media that contains a song to be copied and the destination media.
•To copy within one media
Insert the media that contains a song to be copied.
•To copy a song from USB flash memory to another
Insert both the USB flash memory that contains a song to be copied and the
destination USB flash memory. When there are not enough terminals available, use a
self powered USB hub. If you don’t have a USB hub, you can copy a song by
following the procedure on page 125.
Select the song to be copied.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
11
Other Functions (Tools)
Moving a Protected Song
A protected song can be copied within a folder, but it cannot be copied to another
folder or media. If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination, a
message appears prompting moving of the song—not copying. When the [MOVE]
button is pressed, the protected original song and all protected edit songs which
come from the same protected original song will be moved together. This effectively
“moves” a protected song, but does not “copy” it.
1
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
125
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [COPY] button in the display to call up the Copy To
Display.
(If necessary) Change the destination.
For details on changing the destination, see page 103.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy.
The song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source song. If
you copy a song to a folder that contains a song whose name is the same as the
source song, the copied song name will be “source song name_XXX” (XXX
indicates song number). If you want to change the song name, see page 108.
If you copy an XG-compatible song to another folder or media that contains a
song with the same name as the source song, a message appears prompting
confirmation of overwriting the song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the
XG-compatible song in the destination.
To copy a song from USB flash memory to another:
It is recommended that you use connect both media (source and destination) to the
USB TO DEVICE terminal. However, if there are not enough terminals available, you
can copy a song by following the procedure below.
Follow the step 1 – 3 on page 124.
Press the button several times until the Media List is
displayed.
Select “MEMORY” as the destination.
3
4
5
Never attempt to eject the
media or turn the power
off during copying (or
moving a protected song).
Data may be lost.
NOTE
If you copy a protected song
to the same folder as the
source song, the copied
song will be the protected
edit song.
1
2
3
Removing the media
during operation may
result in loss of the data.
Never attempt to remove
the media unless the
“Eject the source media”
message appears.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
126
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the Song Copy.
The song to be copied is copied to the internal memory of the Electone. The
message “Eject the source media” will appear on the display.
Eject the source media.
After ejecting the source media, the message “Insert the destination media” will
appear on the display.
Insert the destination media to which you want to copy.
Select the destination.
For details on specifying the destination, see page 103.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute Song Copy. Select
[OVERWRITE] to execute or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
The song is copied with the same name as the source song. If you copy a song to
a folder that contains a song whose name is the same as the source song, the
copied song name will be “source song name_XXX” (XXX indicates song
number).
If you copy an XG-compatible song to another folder or media that contains a
song with the same name as the source song, a message appears prompting
confirmation of overwriting the song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the
XG-compatible song in the destination.
If you want to change the song name, see page 108.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Song Delete
You can delete the data of one song. You can specify for deletion only Registration data,
only the performance data, or both of them (entire song). Also, only the songs created
on the ELS-01/01C and XG-compatible songs can be deleted. Songs created on the EL
series instruments such as the EL-900 cannot be deleted.
Select the song to be deleted.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [DELETE] button in the display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Confirm that the song to be deleted is shown in the display. If you want to
change the song, press the [CANCEL] button and select the desired song.
4
NOTE
If you want to abort the
operation, press the
[CANCEL] button.
Never attempt to turn the
power off during copying a
protected song. Data may
be lost.
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
127
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the button of the specific data you want to delete
(“DELETE ALL,” “DELETE REGIST” or “DELETE
PERFORMANCE”). The selected data will be deleted.
• DELETE ALL: Deletes the entire song.
• DELETE REGIST: Deletes only Registration data in the song.
• DELETE PERFORMANCE: Deletes only performance data in the song.
Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.
When deleting folders, songs with only registration, songs with
only performance data, protected songs or XG-compatible
songs:
Select [DELETE] to actually delete the data, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
4
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
128
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Converting to XG
This function allows you to convert the ELS-01/01C song data to XG format data. You
can playback the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may sound
differently from the original data.
Confirm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before
the conversion. The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format.
Select a song to be converted to XG.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [CONVERT] button.
A message “Which do you want to select?” appears.
Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button.
The following display appears.
(If necessary) Changes the destination to save the converted
song.
For details on changing the destination, see page 103.
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
A message appears indicating that the converted data is being checked and the
M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song. When playback is finished, the
display returns to the previous display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE
Playing the keyboard or
pressing the panel controls
during the confirmation of
the conversion will be
recorded to the converted
XG-compatible song.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
129
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Converting ELS format to EL
You can convert songs created on the ELS-01/01C to EL-series format, and save them
to a floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the
EL-900. This function is not available for protected songs.
You’ll need to install the optional floppy disk drive such as UD-FD01.
Select the song to be converted to EL-series format.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button.
A “Which do you want to select?” message appears.
Press the [CONVERT ELS ➞ EL] button.
If the source song contains two or more Registration banks, you’ll need to make
ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data.
Insert the floppy disk, then press the [EXECUTE] button in the
display.
If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient, conversion cannot be
executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Converting EL format to ELS
You can convert the songs in the floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as
the EL-900, to the ELS-01/01C format, and save it to a USB flash memory confirmed
by Yamaha. You’ll need to install the optional floppy disk drive such as UD-FD01.
Depending on the original song, the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ
from the original song, or the Next Song function of the original song may not be
effective.
Insert the floppy disk that contains the song you want to convert
to ELS format, then select the source song.
For details on selecting a song, see page 103.
Reference Page
About Protected Songs
(page 116)
NOTE
User rhythms cannot be
converted to EL format.
1
2
3
NOTE
If the source song’s name
contains full size characters
or Japanese characters,
these characters will be
shown as question marks
(such as “????”).
4
NOTE
When you convert the
protected EL data to ELS
format, set the write-protect
tab of the EL disk to the
“overwrite” position (tab
closed).
Reference Page
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 224)
1
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
130
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button.
A message appears confirming if you want to convert from the EL format to the
ELS format.
Press the [CONVERT EL ➞ ELS] button in the display, then
specify the destination for the converted song.
To use the converted song on the ELS-01/01C, the destination must be USB
flash memory.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion.
If the remaining memory of the USB flash memory is insufficient, conversion
cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Checking the Remaining Memory
In the TOOLS Page, press the [INFORMATION] button. If media is selected, the
remaining memory in the media is shown and if a song is selected, the song data
capacity, title, composer, etc. are shown.
2
3
4
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
131
Voice Edit
This Electone has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices.
We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firmer
understanding of the Voices. Then go through the editing steps, reading Editing a Voice on
page 134 for editing of an AWM Voice, or page 139 for editing of a VA Voice.
The internal structure of the Voices of this Electone is explained below. Refer also to
“AWM Voices and VA Voices” (page 34).
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
AWM Voice structure
AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument.
Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be edited, by changing the level
(volume), filter settings, and so on. A single Voice contains four boxes (AWM1 –
AWM4) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists of less than three Elements,
some boxes are empty. For example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown).
You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for example – if a box (AWM3 and/or
AWM4) is empty. This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds. In the
Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each Element, but also assemble some
Elements from other Voices.
Contents
1 Voice Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
• AWM Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
• VA Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2 Editing a Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
• Selecting a Voice for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
• Editing an AWM Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
• Editing a VA Voice (only for ELS-01C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3 Saving the edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4 Quitting Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5 Recalling an Edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
1
Voice Structure
Element 1 Element 2
Strings 1
AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4
8
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
132
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
VA Voice structure
VA Voices are made by simulating the characteristic behavior of acoustic instruments.
You can edit the Voice’s volume and timbre. Moreover, you can also add AWM
Elements to a VA Voice to create your own original Voice.
VA Voices are available only on the Lead Voice 2 section of the ELS-01C. All Voices in
the other Voice sections are AWM Voices.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a Voice for editing
Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu.
For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select [Accordion 1] in the Voice
Menu of the [ORGAN] button in any Voice section.
Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section.
2
Editing a Voice
1
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
133
While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the Voice
button corresponding to the Voice you wish to edit.
If you press [VOICE EDIT] without selecting a Voice, the following display will
prompt you to complete the step. While this display appears, press the desired
Voice button.
After you have selected the Voice button, the AWM Page (first page of the Voice
Edit display) will appear if the selected Voice is an AWM Voice. If you have
selected a VA Voice, the VA Page will appear.
If you release the [VOICE EDIT] button before pressing a Voice button, the
Voice Edit function will not be called up, and the normal Voice Display will
appear.
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
UPPER KEYB
STRINGS BRASS T
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN G
PERCUS-
SION
While holding down…
Press the Voice button.
The message “Voice data is too large to edit” may appear when you press the Voice
button while holding down the [VOICE EDIT]. If this message appears, select
another Voice.
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
134
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing an AWM Voice
You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in the Voice Edit
display. In the AWM Page, the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by
some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make detailed edits to each
Element.
1 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator (the VA button is grayed
out when you are editing an AWM Voice). You can mute any of the Elements by simply
pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute.
2 VOICE/ELEMENT
Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. For example, the screen above
shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM1, the Element 2 of
Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM2 and no Voice is assigned to AWM3 and AWM4.
You can also call up another Element from another Voice and replace the currently
selected Element with it. Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display
calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can select the desired Voice/
Element (usually Element 1). If you change Voice, the Element will automatically
change to the first Element of the Voice (usually Element 1).
3 EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency band. The EQ LOW FREQ.
slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ LOW
GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ LOW FREQ.
slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.
4 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency band. The EQ HIGH FREQ.
slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The EQ
HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ HIGH
FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.
2341
AWM Page
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
135
1 Element select buttons
Select the Element you wish to edit.
2 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator (the [VA] button is grayed
out when you are editing an AWM Voice). You can mute any of the Elements by simply
pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. Muting
all other Elements except for the one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single
Element for ease in editing. Note that when some Elements are muted, playing the
keyboard in certain key areas or with certain velocities may result in no sound.
3 Display switch buttons
The LAYER Page contains three pages. The buttons are used to switch among
them.
EQ (Equalizer)
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to
match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency
bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made.
This Electone has a two-band (high and low) digital equalizer that lets you adjust
the overall sound according to the type of music you play — classical music being
more refined and soft, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic.
3
2
1
LAYER Page
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
136
1 LEVEL
Determines the output level of the Element.
Range: 0 – 127
2 NOTE LIMIT
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds.
The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider. Some
Elements are not affected by this parameter.
Range: C-2 – G8
3 PAN
Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image.
Range: L64 – R63
1 NOTE SHIFT
Determines the pitch settings in semitones.
Range: -64 – +63
2 TUNE FINE
Determines the fine tuning.
Range: -64 – +63
LAYER Page 1
1 2 3
These buttons
switch the
display.
LAYER Page 2
3 4 5 61 2
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
137
3 ATTACK RATE
Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is
played. Higher values produce a faster attack.
Range: 0 – 127
4 RELEASE RATE
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released.
Higher values make the time shorter.
Range: 1 – 127
5 CUTOFF FREQ.
Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Range: 9600 – 24000 cent
6 RESONANCE
Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the
cutoff frequency. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter.
Range: 16 – 140
Reference Page
Envelope Parameters
(page 140)
Filter — Cutoff frequency and Resonance
Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the
sound. This Electone is equipped with a low pass filter, which passes only those
signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency.
You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency.
Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff
frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive
“peaky” tone.
Level
Level
Cutoff Frequency
Cutoff Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Resonance
These frequencies are passed by the filter.
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
138
1 LFO WAVE
Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. For details, see page 139.
2 LFO SPEED
Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher values make the speed faster.
Range: 2 – 93
3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound.
Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change. For the minimum setting, the
pitch does not change.
Range: 0 – 400
4 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the filter cutoff frequency.
Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change. For the minimum
setting, the frequency does not change.
Range: 0 – 4800 cent
5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the
sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change. For the
minimum setting, the amplitude does not change.
Range: 0 – 128
When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters (above), set the
Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato is set
to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or speed) are set fairly high, you may
not be able to hear the effect of the LFO.
LAYER Page 3
3 4 51 2
Reference Page
Vibrato (page 41)
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
139
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing a VA Voice (only for ELS-01C)
You can edit a VA Voice in the VA Page of the Voice Edit display. If you are using the
ELS-01, the VA Page cannot be selected.
1 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator. You can mute any of the
Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again
cancels the mute. AWM buttons are grayed out when you are editing a VA Voice since
VA Voices do not contain Elements. However, you can add AWM Elements to a VA
sound in the AWM and LAYER Pages if you want. See page 134.
2 LEVEL
Determines the level of the VA sound.
Range: 0 – 127
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency.
These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude to create effects
such as vibrato, wah and tremolo.
The following five waveforms are available.
tri
squ
rnd sine
saw
VA Page
3 4 5 6 721
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
140
3 ATTACK RATE
Determines how quickly the sound will reach its maximum level after the key is played.
Lower values produce a slower attack.
Range: -64 – +63
4 DECAY RATE
Determines how much time it takes to reach its second level from the first (maximum)
level.
Range: -64 – +63
5 RELEASE RATE
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released.
Positive value makes the time shorter and negative value makes it longer.
Range: -64 – +63
6 EQ LOW
Determines the level (volume) of the low range frequencies. Positive values boost or
increase the level, while negative values decrease or cut it.
Range: -64 – +63
7 EQ HIGH
Determines the level (volume) of the high range frequencies. Positive values boost or
increase the level, while negative values decrease or cut it.
Range: -64 – +63
Reference Page
EQ (Equalizer); (page 135)
Envelope Parameters
The level envelope lets you control the transition in volume from the moment a
note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. The parameters
2 – 5 above are envelope-related parameters.
2
Level
4
Decay
Rate
Level
(volume)
5
Release
Rate
Time
Pressing the key
Releasing the key
3
Attack
Rate
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
141
Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to sixteen), and edited VA Voices
can be saved as VA Custom Voices (up to six).
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SAVE Page.
Select the User Voice number or VA Custom Voice number you
wish to save to.
The message appears to prompt confirmation of the operation. (Saving a new
Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User
number.)
(If necessary) Press the [RENAME] button to give a name to your
original Voice.
The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the
M.D.R. section. (See page 108 for more information.) Up to sixteen characters
can be entered.
Press the [SAVE] button to save the Voice, or press [CANCEL] to
abort the operation.
After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit function (page 142) before
turning the power off. Turning off the Electone without quitting Voice Edit erases the
User Voice you have edited.
3
Saving the edited Voice
1
When saving User Voices (AWM) When saving VA Custom Voices (VA)
This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously
saved to the selected User Voice number or VA Custom Voice number. Be
careful not to erase any important data. Always save your important data in
advance to a USB flash memory or other external media using the M.D.R.
function.
2
3
4
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
142
You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages.
Press the [VOICE EDIT] button on the panel.
If your original Voice has already been saved, the Voice Edit function quits
automatically. If the edited Voice has not been saved, a message appears
prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [CANCEL] to
about the operation and return to the previous display.
Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the User button
in each Voice section. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices from the User buttons”
(page 28).
Once your original VA Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the
[VA CUSTOM] button in LEAD VOICE 2. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices with
the Voice buttons” (page 23).
4
Quitting Voice Edit
When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the display turns light
blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice you have created is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being
saved.
5
Recalling an Edited Voice
1
2
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
9
Rhythm Program
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
143
Rhythm Program
The Electone includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program
and Rhythm Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own
original rhythms and save them as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you
connect the existing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks,
which you can automatically play back during your performance. Moreover, Rhythm
Sequence Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration
Sequence.
Contents
1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation . . . . . . . 143
2 Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
• Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
• Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
• Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write . . 150
• Editing Entered Percussion Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
•
Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write
157
• Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function). . . . . . . . . 158
• Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
• Adjusting Volume and Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
• Effect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
• Saving Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
• Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
• Recalling User Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
• Selecting Rhythm from an External Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
• Percussion Kit List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3 Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
• Selecting a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
• Programming a Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
• Auditioning a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
• Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
• Programming a Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
• Editing an Existing Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
• Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
• Playing Rhythm Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
• Playing All Sequences in Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
• Copying a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to
external media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
1
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation
Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them
Creating the backing (Rhythmic Chord) patterns and/or editing them
Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice (Panning, Tuning, and so on)
Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms
Selecting the destination of the sequence
Entering a rhythm pattern one by one
Programming the Registration Sequence
Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 144 – 169)
You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset
rhythm patterns.
Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 174 – 181)
You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover,
you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the
Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back.
9
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
144
9
Rhythm Program
Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different instrument sounds (drum
and percussion) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating
your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program
There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm that is similar
to the rhythm you want to create, and creating your own rhythm from scratch.
To copy a preset rhythm:
Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, saving you time
if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern.
Select the rhythm you want to copy from the Rhythm Menu.
While holding down the [PATTERN] button in the panel (the
display prompts you to select a rhythm), select the Rhythm
button that contains the preset rhythm to be copied to the
Rhythm Pattern Program.
2
Rhythm Pattern Program
1
2
NOTE
Pressing the [PATTERN]
button while the rhythm is
running automatically stops
the rhythm.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
145
9
Rhythm Program
To create your own rhythm from scratch:
Press the [PATTERN] button and release it without selecting a Rhythm button.
A blank pattern is loaded to the Rhythm Pattern Program.
A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break.
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part from
other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm.
Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm
Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different
rhythms
Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from scratch
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1'
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Preset Rhythm User Rhythm
Changing Intro 1
to Intro 1'
Save as
a User Rhythm
All Rhythm sections, including any which have not
been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm.
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1
2
3'
Main A
B
C'
D'
Fill In A
B
C'
D'
Ending 1
2
3
Break'
Preset Rhythm
Intro 1'
2'
3'
Main A'
B'
C'
D'
Fill In A'
B'
C'
D'
Ending 1'
2'
3'
Break'
Preset Rhythm
Save as
a User Rhythm
User Rhythm
Assemble some
sections or parts
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Blank Rhythm User Rhythm
Entering percussion
sounds into
each section
Save as
a User Rhythm
These are blank sections (no percussion sounds);
if you press ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
146
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern
In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of the rhythm, such as time
signature, measure length, and so on. You can also customize the part settings in this
SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the
currently selected rhythm.
Press the [SETTING] button in the display to call up the SETTING
Page.
Determines the time signature used for the rhythm.
You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons.
If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT
button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the
following message.
Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm and changes the time
signature.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
1
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
147
9
Rhythm Program
Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm
pattern.
Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop-up
menu. After selecting the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically closes.
You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm [START] button on
the panel. You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing. For
details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to page 162.
Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern.
Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select pop-
up menu. Select the desired measure in the pop-up menu. If you select Break or
Fill In as the section, the measure cannot be changed.
(If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part Assemble, and Part Clear
parameters.
1 METRONOME
Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome sounds on each
beat of the measure (for example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a
rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On here with Real Time Write.
3
4
5
1
2
3
Reference Pages
Step Write and Real Time
Write (page 149)
Entering Percussion Sounds
to a Rhythm Pattern — Real
Time Write (page 157)
NOTE
Pressing the VOLUME
buttons for Rhythm also
changes the volume of the
metronome.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
148
9
Rhythm Program
2 ASSEMBLE
Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. You can
assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm.
Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following display.
Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then select the destination. You can
copy only one part, or all parts of a rhythm.
After setting the source and destination, press [EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and
returning to the previous display.
You can also select a rhythm pattern currently being created as the COPY FROM
RHYTHM.
To create a MAIN B section based on MAIN A, you can conveniently create that
you create the MAIN A rhythm first and copy it to MAIN B, then edit the MAIN B
rhythm.
To select the rhythm currently being created, select “Current Rhythm” on the 5th
page of the “USER” category.
Select copy source
(Rhythm, Section,
and Part)
Select the part for
the copy destination
Press here to execute the copy
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
149
9
Rhythm Program
3 CLEAR PART
Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected rhythm. Pressing this button
calls up the following display.
Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts. You cannot select a part
that contains no data (the button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the
percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared.
When selecting the desired part, a display prompting confirmation of the operation
appears. Select [CLEAR] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Reference Page
Accompaniment (page 61)
NOTE
If you select BASS here, the
bass phrase in the A.B.C. will
be cleared.
Step Write and Real Time Write
There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write and Real
Time Write.
Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values. As a
method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each note
is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each individual note entered, you
cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for precision
and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been
determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure.
Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multi-track tape recorder; you
can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real
Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm, because it allows you to actually
play the pattern as you are creating it.
Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which method you use depends partly
on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your own personal preference.
You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use
of both methods. This would come handy, for example, in programming the basic beats
of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and
embellishments.
Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm. If
the rhythm is stopped, Step Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing,
Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions below for Step Write, and page 157 for
Real Time Write.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
150
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write
You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display. Before entering
percussion sounds, turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the
INPUT Page.
Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM, to which you want to
enter the percussion.
In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion instruments (such as Bass Drum,
Snare Drum, and so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others (such as
Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add Drum part.
Select the desired Drum Kit.
You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits. For details on each kit,
see page 171. Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up
the kit Select the pop-up menu, then select the desired kit from the pop-up
menu. The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards.
You can select only one kit for each part (Main Drum or Add Drum). When you
want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits, select one kit
for Main Drum and another for Add Drum.
NOTE
The volume of the percussion
and accompaniment sound
during use of Rhythm Pattern
Program can be controlled
with the VOLUME button of
the RHYTHM section. When
you quit Rhythm Pattern
Program, the VOLUME of the
RHYTHM section will return
to the previous selected
level.
1
2
3
Drum kit SFX kit
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
151
9
Rhythm Program
Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the
key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the
sound.
The selected instrument’s name appears on the display.
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on Quantize, refer to page 156.
Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and only necessary when
you want to enter a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.)
For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting, refer to the Percussion
Kit List on page 171. For details on Gate Time, refer to page 160.
Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected
point. Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the
percussion sounds.
You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by
pressing the QUANTIZE [E][F] buttons.
1 Rhythm Clock box
Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure, beat, and number of
clicks.
A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat is made up of 480 clicks.
The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops
back to the beginning of the rhythm (01:01:000).
4
Instrument name
Selected key
5
NOTE
The Quantize setting can be
changed in the middle of
Step Write.
6
7
1
32
Reference Page
Basic settings for the Rhythm
Pattern (page 146)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
152
9
Rhythm Program
2 ACCENT buttons
Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level. Press one of the
ACCENT buttons you wish to set (“
” is softer and “
” is louder; “REST” is no
sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected
position in the pattern. Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm
clock by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value.
3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls
Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of
a single step is determined by the Quantize value.
Repeat steps 4 through 7 above to layer each instrument and
complete your own rhythm.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing Entered Percussion Notes
You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of the entered sound, or delete
the entered sound.
To change the accent level of an entered note:
Select the desired note for changing the accent level.
1 NEXT INSTRUMENT
Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key to right.
2 NOTE [E][F] controls
Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently selected instrument. In the
above notes for example, you can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and
5) are ignored.
3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls
Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is
determined by the Quantize value.
8
1
213
123 4 5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
153
9
Rhythm Program
Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent
box.
The Accent box allows for finer changes.
1 Accent box
Touch on the box to enable the Accent box.
Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 – 127.
The minimum setting results in no sound.
2 ACCENT buttons
Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels (from “
” to “
”) are
available.
Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected
level.
To move an entered note:
Select the note you want to move (as in Step 1 on page 152).
Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box.
Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock.
2
1
2
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
154
9
Rhythm Program
To change the length of an entered note:
The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by
adjusting the Gate Time. See page 161 for more information.
To erase an entered note:
Select the note you want to erase (as in Step 1 on page 152).
Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT section of the display.
The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest.
You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all notes entered.
To erase one instrument:
Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is
assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected instrument.
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.
1
2
1
Instrument name
Selected key
2
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
155
9
Rhythm Program
The following method can also be used to erase one instrument.
While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the
keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.
To erase all instruments:
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all instruments.
All instruments are instantly erased.
When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another
instrument, it’s not necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace the sound
with the following procedure.
To replace the instrument:
Before the operation, stop the rhythm.
Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is
assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.
Simultaneously hold down the [CHANGE] button in the display
and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that
corresponds to the instrument you want to use.
The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one.
1
2
1
Instrument name
Selected key
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
156
9
Rhythm Program
About Quantize
The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing or duration values, so
that each note plays with precise timing. You can select nine types of Quantize
value.
With Step Write
It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of each note
you enter.
Steps Depending on the Quantize Values
With Real Time Write
It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play, according to
the specified Quantize resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE.
Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to
play.
1234 5
6789 5
With this button,
change the displayed
Quantize buttons
0 120 240 360 480
(1 beat)
Clock
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
40
80
160
120
60
240
320
Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the finest, least amount of quantization (1/480 beat).
Original data (you play)
After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data
Quarter note length
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
157
9
Rhythm Program
Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern —
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Real Time Write
While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click, play the Upper/Lower
keyboards to enter the desired percussion sounds.
Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are
entered, and the desired drum kit, by following Steps 1 – 3 on
page 150.
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the
predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation. For details,
refer to page 156.
Press the rhythm [START] button in the panel.
The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling the Real Time Write
operation.
While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from
the Upper and/or Lower keyboards.
If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm,
you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have started
from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in the SETTING Page and listen to the
metronome click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or “loop”) for a certain
number of measures as set in the SETTING Page.
Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to layer each instrument and
complete your own rhythm.
1
2
3
4
Reference Page
Metronome (page 147)
5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
158
9
Rhythm Program
You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played.
To erase an instrument/key assignment:
While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard
corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances of the selected
instrument will be erased from the pattern.
When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered percussion notes, you need to
stop the rhythm then edit. See page 152, “Editing Entered Percussion Notes.”
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function)
The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the Electone’s Accompaniment
patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save the Accompaniment
pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern
Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing
patterns to the rhythms you create.
To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly
created rhythm:
Press the [SETTING] button at the top of the display to call up the
SETTING Page.
Press the [ASSEMBLE] button.
A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy source and destination part.
Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and [SECTION] buttons, select
the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you
wish to use.
Using the COPY FROM [PART] button, select the accompaniment
part you want to copy.
Using the COPY TO [PART] button, select the desired
accompaniment part (CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for the
Rhythmic Chord pattern.
1
2
3
Reference Page
Basic settings for the Rhythm
Pattern (page 146)
4
5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
159
9
Rhythm Program
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy.
The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord pattern) has been copied.
To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord
function:
The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm: Step
Write and/or Real Time Write.
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the
INPUT Page.
Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2, which you want to create
for the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern, a message
appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear the existing data or
not. To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR].
Select the desired Voice.
Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu.
Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons, then select
the desired Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is called up for both
the Upper and Lower keyboards.
Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1 or Chord 2). When you
want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices, select
one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2.
6
1
2
3
NOTE
The Voice menu that appears
here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
160
9
Rhythm Program
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on the Quantize function, refer to page 156.
Set the Gate Time.
You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using the GATE TIME
buttons in the display, or the Data Control dial. Using the buttons in the display
makes coarse changes in the value. Using the Data Control dial makes fine
changes.
Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for
entering the rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord
(C, E, and G). For information on Step Write, see page 151; for information on
Real Time Write, see page 157.
You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in
“Editing Entered Percussion Notes” (page 152). To change the gate time of the notes of
the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions below.
Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds. For example, a
quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as
staccato (short length).
Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate
time between 450 – 470, and a staccato quarter note may be about 240.
4
5
DATA CONTROL
6
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
161
9
Rhythm Program
To change the Gate Time:
Select the note for which you want to change the gate time (see
Step 1 on page 152).
Press the Gate Time box to enable the box.
Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original drum patterns using Main
Drum and Add Drum, and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2.
Moreover, you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts, including Pad,
Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the top of the display to call
up the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Press the [VOICE] button in the display.
The following display will appear.
1
2
3
1
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
162
9
Rhythm Program
Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice.
The Voice menu appears.
Select the desired Voice, and the Voice menu automatically
closes.
After selecting the desired Voice, customize the accompaniment to your personal
preference by adjusting the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects below.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Adjusting Volume and Panning
Volume and Pan are set in VOICE/EFFECT Page.
1 ON/OFF
Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment part. When this is set to OFF, the
part is muted.
2 Volume sliders
Determines the volume of each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
3
4
NOTE
The Voice menu that appears
here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
1
2
VOLUME Display
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
163
9
Rhythm Program
Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image.
Range: L64 – R63
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Effect Settings
You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm.
Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of
actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a
wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements. Variation includes many
kinds of special effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically. These effects
are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
PAN Display
REVERB Display
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
164
9
Rhythm Program
1 CHORUS TYPE
Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up
the chorus type list.
Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically closes.
2 Chorus sliders
Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
1
2
CHORUS Display
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
165
9
Rhythm Program
1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category)
Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing the VARIATION button calls
up the effect category list.
Select the desired effect category, and the list automatically closes.
After changing the category, the variation type below automatically changes
corresponding to the selected category.
2 TYPE (Variation Type)
Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect
type list.
Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes.
3 Variation sliders
Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
1 2
3
VARIATION Display
Reference Page
Effect List (page 50)
LCD
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
166
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each
instrument.
Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the top of the display to call
up the DRUM SETUP Page.
Select the desired part, Main Drum or Add Drum.
Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be
changed is assigned).
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its
settings.
Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume, Reverb and Pitch.
1
2
3
4
2
3 4 5 6
1
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
167
9
Rhythm Program
1 Percussion Kit Name
Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list,
letting you select the desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments you have
already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit.
2 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image.
Range: L63 – R63
3 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
5 PITCH COARSE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in semitone
(100-cent) steps.
Range: -64 – +63
6 PITCH FINE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps,
allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE (
5) above.
Range: -64 – +63
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Saving Rhythm Patterns
You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm, up to a maximum
of 48 patterns.
If necessary, confirm the contents of the rhythm you want to
save.
Reference Page
Percussion Kit List
(page 171)
Confirming rhythm patterns before saving
The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into one
rhythm. Before saving, we recommend that you confirm the contents of each section.
Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created into
one user rhythm
First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on the SETTING Page, then press
the [START] button on the panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern you have created.
Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as Main A. Next, select “Main B”
by using the [SECTION] button, then play it back and confirm that this is what you want
to save as Main B.
If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data, create the desired
data by using the Assemble function (page 148).
After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B here), we recommend that you
confirm that all other sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is contained in some
sections which you don’t want to save, delete that unnecessary data. This can reduce the data
size of the user rhythm.
1
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
168
9
Rhythm Program
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SAVE Page.
If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.
Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press the [SAVE] button to save the pattern, or press [CANCEL]
to abort the operation.
After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program (page 169) before
turning the power off. Turning off the Electone without quitting Rhythm Pattern
Program erases the User Rhythm you have created.
2
3
LCD
Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for storing rhythms) is shown on
the display as a percentage.
If a “Data full” message appears when you press the [SAVE] button, the pattern
cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space. If this occurs, check
through all fifteen sections for any unnecessary data. After erasing some of the less
necessary data, try to save the pattern again.
To avoid this, you should periodically check the amount of remaining memory
while you are creating your rhythm.
4
Remaining Memory
Reference Page
Confirming rhythm pattens
before saving (page 167)
CLEAR PART (page 149)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
169
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program
You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages.
Press the [PATTERN] button.
If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.
If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns, this
simply quits the Rhythm Pattern Program.
If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern Program, or [CANCEL] to
abort the operation and return to the previous display.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recalling User Rhythm Patterns
The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected
and played from the User buttons in the panel Rhythm section. Refer to Chapter 5,
“Selecting rhythms from the User buttons” (page 58).
When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the square at the top left in the
display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that data is currently
being saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved.
1
2
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
User Buttons
Select “USER”
category here.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
170
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting Rhythm from an External Media
You can load rhythms from a USB flash memory or other external media and edit and
save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded includes not only that of the
Electone, but also all Style File Format files.
Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the USB
TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [PATTERN] button on the panel.
Press [FILE] at the top right in the display.
If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing, the rhythm will
automatically be stopped.
Press the [SELECT] button to select the desired pattern file.
The method for selecting a file is the same as that in the M.D.R. section.
See page 103 for more information.
Press the [LOAD] button to load the pattern.
To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page (page 152), then save your
created pattern(s) as a User Rhythm (page 167).
1
2
3
4
About file types that can be loaded to the Electone
This Electone is compatible with Style File Format data.
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style data
format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide
high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide
range of chord types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “style”) is made
up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3)
as rhythm pattern variations. Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight
different parts, made up of MIDI sequence data.
You can load any patterns (styles) which have been created by an SFF-compatible
instrument. Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the
panel.
5
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
171
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Percussion Kit List
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
Standard Kit 1
Live!Std Kit
Live!Std+P Kit
Standard Kit 2
Live!Funk Kit
Live!Funk+P Kit
Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit
Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute
Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open
Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q
Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap
Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H
Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise
Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L
Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H
Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap
Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl*
Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Reverse Cymbal*
Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll*
Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Hi Q 2
Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec
Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks
Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick 3
Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate
Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy
Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick
Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap
Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3
Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4
Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H
Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open
Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L
Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H
Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L
Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H
Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H*
Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L*
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short
Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long*
Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves
Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H
Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L
Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2
Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
172
9
Rhythm Program
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit
Live!Brush Kit
Live!Brush+P Kit
Symphony Kit EL Kit 1
Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Scratch
Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Concert BD
Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Noise Percussion
Whip Slap Whip Slap* Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Bass Drum March
Scratch H Scratch Dance 1* Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Analog BD Short
Scratch L Scratch Dance 2* Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Synth Tom 3
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Analog BD Long
Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Synth Tom 2
Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Synth Bass Drum
Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Synth Tom 1
Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Bass Drum Attack
Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Bass Drum Heavy
Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Tom 4
Brush Swirl* Vinyl Noise* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Bass Drum Light
Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap To m 3
Reverse Cymbal* Reverse Cymbal* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Orchestra Cymbal
Snare Roll* Reverse Dance 2* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Drum Roll*
Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet Castanet To m 2
Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft SD Brush Roll
Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks Tom 1
Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2 SD Brush Shot 2
Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot To m Brush Shot 4
Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa SD Brush Shot 1
Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Snare Drum Heavy
Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick To m Brush Shot 3
Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Drum Light
Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap To m Brush Shot 2
Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 SD Accent 2
Tom Analog 1 Tom Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L SD Accent 1
Hat Close Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H SD Reverb 2
Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Rim 2
Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3 Low Tom SD Reverb 1
Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Snare Drum Rim 1
Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L Synth Snare Drum
Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H Analog SD
Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal Triangle Mute
Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6 High Tom Ta mbourine
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S Triangle Open
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Castanet
Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Claves
Tambourine Tambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Cabasa
Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Finger Snap
Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 S Hand Claps
Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Crash Cymbal 2
Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Hi-Hat Close
Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Crash Cymbal 1
Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Hi-Hat Open
Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L Crash Cym Mute
Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Ride Cymbal 2
Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Ride Cymbal 1
Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Ride Cymbal Cup
Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas
Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Cym Brush Shot
Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Cymbal March
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Analog HH Close
Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Orch Cymbal Roll
Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves Analog HH Open
Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Orch Cymbal
Wood Block L Dance Perc 4* Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Orch Cymbal Mute
Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute
Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2* Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Ta m- Tam
Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
173
9
Rhythm Program
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
EL Kit 2 Live!Studio Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit
Maracas High Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute Surdo Open
Maracas Low Hi Q
Surdo Muff Whip Slap
Surdo Rim Scratch H
Cuica High Scratch L Hand Clap
Surdo Open Finger Snap
Cuica Middle Click Noise
Tamborim Mute Metronome Click
Cuica Low Metronome Bell Conga H Tip Conga H Tip
Tamborim Open Seq Click L Conga H Heel Conga H Heel
Pandeiro Seq Click H Nakarazan Dom Conga H Open Conga H Open
Bongo High Brush Tap Cabasa Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
Conga Slide Brush Swirl* Nakarazan Edge Conga H SlapOpen Conga H SlapOpen
Bongo Low Brush Slap Hager Dom Conga H Slap Conga H Slap
Conga Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Hager Edge Conga H SlapMute Conga H SlapMute
Conga Muff Snare Roll* Bongo H Conga L Tip Conga L Tip
Bongo Mute Castanet Bongo L Conga L Heel Conga L Heel
Conga High Snare Studio L Conga H Mute Conga L Open Conga L Open
Bongo Slap Sticks Conga H Open Conga L Mute Conga L Mute
Conga Low Kick Ambience H Conga L Conga L SlapOpen Conga L SlapOpen
Open Rim Shot Zagrouda H Conga L Slap Conga L Slap
Timbale 1 High Kick Ambience L Zagrouda L* Conga L Slide* Conga L Slide*
Timbale 1 Low Kick Studio Cutting Noise 1* Phone Call* Kick Soft Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 1 f
Side Stick Cutting Noise 2* Door Squeak* Side Stick Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Open 3 f
Timbale 2 High Snare Studio M Door Slam* Snare Soft Bongo H Rim Bongo H Rim
Hand Clap String Slap* Scratch Cut* Arabic Hand Clap Bongo H Tip Bongo H Tip
Timbale 2 Low Snare Studio L Scratch H 3* Snare Drum Bongo H Heel Bongo H Heel
Timbale 3 High Floor Tom L Wind Chime* Floor Tom L Bongo H Slap Bongo H Slap
Woodblock High Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring* Hi-Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 1 f
Timbale 3 Low Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Open 3 f
Woodblock Mid Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Bongo L Rim
Timbale 4 High Low Tom Low Tom Bongo L Tip Bongo L Tip
Woodblock Low Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Bongo L Heel Bongo L Heel
Timbale 4 Low Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Bongo L Slap
Vibraslap Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Timbale L Open Timbale L Open
Triangle Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
Tambourine High Tom High Tom
Triangle Open Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Castanet Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click* CarEngnIgnition* Crash Cymbal 2
Claves Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal* Duhulla Dom Paila L Paila L
Tambourine Car Passing* Tambourine Timbale H Open Timbale H Open
Cabasa Splash Cymbal Car Crash* Duhulla Tak
Cowbell Siren* Cowbell
Finger Snap Crash Cymbal 2 Train* Duhulla Sak
Vibraslap Jet Plane* Claves
Ride Cymbal 2 Starship* Doff Dom Paila H Paila H
Wind Bell Down Bongo H Burst* Katem Dom Cowbell Top Cowbell Top
Agogo High Bongo L Roller Coaster* Katem Tak
Wind Bell Up Conga H Mute Submarine* Katem Sak
Agogo Low Conga H Open Katem Tak
Bells Conga L Doff Tak Guiro Short Guiro Short
Cowbell 4 Timbale H Tabla Dom Guiro Long* Guiro Long*
Shaker Timbale L Tabla Tak 1
Cowbell 3 Agogo H Tabla Tik
Guiro Short Agogo L Shower* Laugh* Tabla Tak 2 Tambourine Tambourine
Cowbell 2 Cabasa Thunder* Scream* Tabla Sak
Guiro Long Maracas Wind* Punch* Tabla Roll Edge*
Cowbell 1 Samba Whistle H* Stream* Heart Beat* Tabla Flam
Taiko 2 Samba Whistle L* Bubble* Foot Steps* Sagat 1 Maracas Maracas
Ohdaiko 2 Guiro Short Feed* Tabel Dom Shaker Shaker
Taiko 1 Guiro Long* Sagat 3 Cabasa Cabasa
Ohdaiko 1 Claves Tabel Tak Cuica Mute
Ohtsuzumi 2 Wood Block H Sagat 2 Cuica Open
Ohtsuzumi 1 Wood Block L Rik Dom
Kakegoe 3 Cuica Mute Rik Tak 2
Kotsuzumi 4 Cuica Open Rik Finger 1
Kakegoe 2 Triangle Mute Rik Tak 1
Kotsuzumi 3 Triangle Open Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute
Kakegoe 1 Shaker Rik BrassTremolo* Triangle Open
Kotsuzumi 2 Jingle Bells Rik Sak
Kotsuzumi 1 Bell Tree Dog* Machine Gun* Rik Tik Wind Chime
Horse* Laser Gun*
Bird Tweet* Explosion*
Firework*
Ghost*
Maou*
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
174
9
Rhythm Program
With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can string together any of the
Electone’s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make
complete rhythm compositions.
You can save four rhythm compositions (each can contain up to 140 bars) to the
Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can
be played back in succession, letting you divide a song into parts and play back the
rhythm data as desired. Here are a couple of example applications:
• When you want to play more than two songs in a medley, save the rhythm
composition for each song to a separate sequence button. You can then recall each
desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the
song is saved.
• When you want to practice a song in separate sections (for example, separately
practicing the verse, chorus and bridge), divide the song into the relevant parts.
For example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the main chorus part to the
[SEQ. 2] button, the ending to the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the
desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button. You can also play
through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a Sequence
There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence: creating your own sequence from
scratch, or copying and editing an existing sequence that is similar to the sequence you
want to create.
Press the [SEQUENCE] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
The MENU Page of the Sequence display appears.
Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up
the Rhythm Sequence Program function.
3
Rhythm Sequence Program
Reference Page
Programming a Sequence
(page 175)
Copying a Sequence (page
183)
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
175
9
Rhythm Program
Press one of the Sequence buttons ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the
left half in the display to select the rhythm sequence number you
want to edit.
The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section
lights.
Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the display, you can
press one of the sequence buttons in the Rhythm section on the
panel to select the sequence number.
This selects the Sequence number, to which a rhythm composition can be saved.
If you want to edit existing a rhythm composition, refer to “Copying a
Sequence” on page 183. If you want to program a rhythm sequence from
scratch, refer to “Programming a Sequence” below.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Programming a Sequence
Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top right of the display to call
up the RHYTHM Page.
Press the rhythm button corresponding to the rhythm you want
to enter to the sequence. If you press User button [1] or [2], you
can select a rhythm of your own creation (User rhythm).
The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm button is displayed.
2
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD
WALTZ
SWING&
JAZZ
1
RHYTHM
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
1
2
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
176
9
Rhythm Program
Select the desired rhythm from the displayed rhythm menu.
Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill in A – D, Intro 1 – 3,
Ending 1 – 3, or Break) by pressing one of the rhythm control
buttons on the panel.
The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display.
Press the [SET] button in the display.
One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in
the rhythm row on the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor (colored
orange) will automatically move to one step right. A maximum of 140 bars can
be entered to a single sequence. When you select an ending pattern and press the
[SET] button, an entire ending pattern (more than one bar) is entered.
You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern.
Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to enter the rhythm and create
your own rhythm composition.
Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases
any sequences you have made. Before turning the power off, quit the Rhythm Sequence
Program (page 181).
3
4
NOTE
When entering an Intro
section, check the number of
bars at the top of the display.
NOTE
When you press the ENDING
[1] button while the Main
section is playing back, a fill-
in pattern will be called up
before the Ending 1 pattern.
In the Rhythm Sequence
program, however, a fill in
pattern is not called up when
Ending 1 is entered to the
Sequence.
5
6
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
177
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Auditioning a Sequence
You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes.
Move the cursor to the desired position for playback.
Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or the POSITION buttons on
the display.
Press the rhythm [START] button on the panel.
The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START] button again stops playback.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence
You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered, or delete
the entered rhythm from the sequence.
1
DATA CONTROL
2
START
BREAK
SYNCHRO
START
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
178
9
Rhythm Program
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored orange) along the rhythm row
in the display.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
2 DATA
These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the
rhythm row.
SET
For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row, or for
replacing a pattern at the cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the
rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position.
This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern.
INSERT
For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position. The new rhythm is
entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the
cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. This operation is not
available between measures of an ending pattern.
Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function’s
capacity of 140. If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over
the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be
executed.
DELETE
For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position. When the ending pattern is
selected, pressing the [DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern (more
than one bar).
CLEAR
For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence.
After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the
operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or select
[CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display.
NOTE
When you insert an ending
pattern into the editing
sequence, any existing
rhythm data that follows an
Ending pattern is
automatically deleted.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
179
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Programming a Registration Sequence
The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations
automatically called up in sequence, when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you
program the timing (bar/beat/clock) at which the Registration is changed. You can also
program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence.
A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence.
With this feature, you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired
automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback.
Press the [REGIST] button at the top right in the display to call up
the Registration Sequence display.
The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display. The entered
Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the
display.
Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial,
set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to change the
Registration (1 beat = 96 Clock).
When using the Data Control dial, first press the number you wish to change in
the display, then turn the dial.
NOTE
If you are loading a
Registration while a rhythm is
playing, the sequence data
and User rhythms in the
Registration data cannot be
loaded.
1
2
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
3
DATA CONTROL
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
180
9
Rhythm Program
Press the DATA [SET] button in the display.
The Registration number appears in the display (in the timing order), indicating
that the Registration is entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered.
If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar/Beat/Clock, the last
entered one takes priority.
Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set the Registration
Sequence.
Entering Next Regist:
When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence, the next
registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the
rhythm sequence.
Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control
dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to enter
the Next Regist (1 beat = 96 clock).
Press the NEXT REGIST [INSERT] button in the display.
The Next Regist mark appears at the timing point you set in step 1,
indicating that the Next Regist is entered.
Next Regist Loading Time
• Loading Next Regist may take a few seconds (the time may differ depending on
the size of the data to be loaded).
• When using a floppy disk instead of USB flash memory, the loading time will be
longer than when using USB flash memory.
•Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways: using right footswitch and
programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence. Loading time is the same
regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data.
4
5
1
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
181
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing an Existing Registration Sequence
You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence (Registration number or
Next Regist data) from the sequence.
To move an entry:
Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data
(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to move.
Change the position by pressing the Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in
the display.
To move the Registration number timing, press the DATA [SET]
button. To move the Next Regist timing, press the NEXT REGIST
[SET] button.
The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and
displayed in the proper order.
To erase an entry:
Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data
(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to delete.
Press the [DELETE] button to delete the data.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program
You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of its display pages. When you
quit, the sequence you have made will be automatically saved.
To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program:
Press the [SEQUENCE] button on the panel.
The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed.
When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the square at the top left of
the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the sequence is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being
saved.
1
2
3
1
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
182
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Playing Rhythm Sequences
To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created:
Press the appropriate Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on
the panel.
The SEQ button’s lamp lights.
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback.
When one of the four rhythm sequences is playing, each programmed rhythm
that plays is indicated by the lit LED of the Rhythm buttons.
The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback,
if the sequence includes a Registration Sequence.
Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end.
If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence, press the
[START] button again to resume playback.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Playing All Sequences in Order
You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order, one after
another.
Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their
LEDs are lit.
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order
automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence
buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be played back not in the
order you pressed them, but in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function
effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140-
pattern memory limit of a single sequence.
Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back
automatically cancels the pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot
cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the
sequence assigned to it is finished playing.
1
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
2
1
2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
183
9
Rhythm Program
To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch:
You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch.
Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their
LEDs are lit.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel to call up the
Footswitch display, LEFT Page.
Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP.
(See page 185 for information about the Footswitch settings.)
Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the
sequence on.
Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence playback
cancels the Rhythm Sequence.
When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences
(SEQ. buttons), pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing
Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again starts the next sequence.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Copying a Sequence
You can copy a rhythm sequence stored on a sequence button to another button. You
can also add a rhythm sequence to the end of another rhythm sequence.
Press the EDIT [COPY] or [ADD] button in the Sequence Menu
page.
The Copy From or Add From Display appears.
Select the number of the desired rhythm sequence program to
which you want to copy or to which you want to add.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
Press the [COPY] or [ADD] button to copy or add the rhythm
sequence.
Press [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
If necessary, edit the sequence.
Refer to the section “Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence” on page 177 and/or
“Editing an Existing Registration Sequence” on page 181.
1
2
3
4
1
2
NOTE
If you add a rhythm
sequence to another rhythm
sequence that has an
ending at the end, the
section will automatically
change to MAIN A and the
new sequence will be
added after the MAIN A
part.
3
4
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
184
9
Rhythm Program
You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the Rhythm Pattern Program) and
Rhythm Sequence (created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to external media, such
as USB flash memory. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations as Registration Data
(File)” on page 111 for instructions.
When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the Electone, be
sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is
running.
4
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm
Sequence Data to external media
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
185
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions
and switch the effect on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard.
The Electone has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal. The Right
Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can be set
to control one of the following functions: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary speaker.
See page 85 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch.
The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
Press the [LEFT] button at the top right of the display to call up
the LEFT Page.
Contents
1 Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
• Controlling the Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
• Controlling Glide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
• Controlling Rotary Speaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
2 Knee Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
• Controlling Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
• Controlling Melody On Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
• Controlling Lead Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
• Controlling the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
3 Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
• Controlling Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
• Controlling the Rhythm Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
1
Footswitches
Right Footswitch
Left Footswitch
Expression Pedal
1
2
10
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
186
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
In this display, you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch: Rhythm,
Glide, and Rotary Speaker.
If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not control any function.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Rhythm
You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left
Footswitch.
1 STOP
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Footswitch.
2 BREAK
When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns on. This function corresponds
to the [BREAK] button on the panel.
3 MAIN A – MAIN D
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel.
For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
NOTE
When the Next Page function
of the score display is
assigned to the left foot
switch, and if rhythm, glide
and/or rotary speaker are
assigned to the left foot
switch as well, pressing the
foot switch performs both the
assigned function and the
Next Page function.
For details on the Next Page
function, refer to page 123.
1 2
3
4 5
Reference Page
Rhythm Structure (page 52)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
187
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when the INTRO [1] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.
5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when the ENDING [1] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is
played, the rhythm stops.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Glide
You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch.
Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by
a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.
1 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/
LOWER2)
Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide function is to be applied.
2 TIME
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch
returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed slower.
Range: 1 – 5
1 2
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
188
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch.
When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds
to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to
make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute
Voice. For details, see page 48.
The Knee Lever, located on the underside of the keyboard panel, can be used to turn
one of the following on and off: Sustain effect, Melody On Chord function, Lead Slide
effect, or Solo function.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Sustain
You can control on/off status of sustain for the Upper and Lower keyboards by using
the Knee Lever. Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled.
Make sure that the Upper and/or Lower Sustain
buttons have been turned on.
Fold the Knee Lever down.
Sustain is off when the Knee Lever is folded down.
Reference Page
Rotary Speaker (page 48)
2
Knee Lever
Reference Page
Sustain (page 47)
SUSTAIN
UPPER
(KNEE)
LOWER
(KNEE)
PEDAL
1
2
Folding down
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
189
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
To apply sustain, press the Knee Lever to the right.
Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Knee Lever is pressed. Releasing the
Knee Lever turns sustain off.
1 When the Knee Lever is folded up:
Sustain is applied constantly, as long as the front panel Sustain buttons are on.
2 When the Knee Lever is vertical:
Sustain is cancelled.
3 When the Knee Lever is continuously pressed to the right:
Sustain is on.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Melody On Chord
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button on the front panel.
The Melody On Chord section appears in the right half of the display.
Set the KNEE control to “ON,” and select one of the modes.
Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee when you want
to apply the M.O.C. effect.
The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as the Knee Lever is pressed.
When you release the Knee Lever, the M.O.C. effect is cancelled.
3
1
23
Pressing to the right
On
Off
On
1
2
Reference Page
Melody On Chord (page 64)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
190
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Lead Slide
Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice
section to which you want to apply the Lead Slide effect.
Press the [KNEE] button of the Slide section on the display.
Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee when you want
to apply the Slide effect.
The Slide effect is applied as long as the Knee Lever is pressed. Releasing the
Knee Lever, cancels the Lead Slide effect.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Solo Function
You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Knee Lever. See page 27 for more
information.
The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play.
Moreover, the ELS-01C has another Expression Pedal, the 2nd Expression Pedal.
The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the
Rhythm. The explanation on the 2nd Expression Pedal is given here.
Reference Page
Voice Condition Display
(page 39)
3
Expression Pedals
1
2
3
Reference Page
Getting Started (page 11)
Expression Pedal
2nd Expression Pedal
(ELS-01C)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
191
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
Press the [UTILITY] button on the front panel.
The Utility display appears.
Press the [EXP.] button in the upper right of the display to call up
the EXP. (Expression) Page.
In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the
2nd Expression Pedal. If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to
ON, both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal.
Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Pitch Bend
1 MODE
Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each step changes the pitch range
by a semitone.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation (over +/- two
semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over
+/- one octave).
2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND)
Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied, and turns
the function ON. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper
Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2.
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
21
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
192
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Rhythm Tempo
1 MODE
Determines the range of tempo change.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo change (70% – 140%);
the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%).
2 TEMPO
When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.”
When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and
pressing it back with your heel slows it down.
21
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
193
11
Transpose and Pitch Controls
Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows
you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning.
Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. (The settings here cannot be
recorded to the Music Data Recorder.)
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
Press the [PITCH] button at the top right of the display to call up
the PITCH Page.
In this display, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings by using the
buttons on the display or the Data Control Dial.
1 TRANSPOSE
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half-steps
(semitones).
Range: -6 – +6
2 PITCH
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by
0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz
You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice
Condition display. For more information, see page 42.
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
21
NOTE
The Transpose/Pitch setting
here is not applied to an XG
Song.
11
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
194
Internet Direct Connection
12
Internet Direct Connection
This convenient, powerful feature lets you directly connect your Electone to the Internet. In
this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers
and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the Internet
Glossary (page 207).
You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber,
cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router.
To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or
provider.
Contents
1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet. . . . . . . . . 194
2 Accessing the Website from the Electone. . . . . . . . . 195
• Scrolling the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
• Following Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
• Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page. . . 198
• Return to the Previous Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
• Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
• Editing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
• Changing the Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3 About the Internet Settings Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
• Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
• LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
• Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
• Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4 Exiting from the Internet Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5 Initializing Internet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6 Glossary of Internet Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet
Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the
instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument
itself.
NOTE
Depending on the Internet
connection, you may not be
able to connect to two or
more devices (for example, a
computer and the
instrument), depending on
the contract with the
provider. This means you
cannot connect with the
Electone. If in doubt, check
your contract or contact your
provider.
Reference Page
Connecting USB storage
devices or USB-LAN adapter
(page 216)
Connection example 1:
Connecting by cable (using a modem without router)
Modem*
No router capability
Router
Cable type
LAN cable
LAN cable
USB-LAN adapter
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,
optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
12
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
195
To access the website, press the [INTERNET] button while the instrument is
connected to the Internet.
Connection example 2:
Connecting by cable (using a modem with router)
LAN cable
USB-LAN adapter
ADSL modem
Router capability
LAN cable
NOTE
Some types of modems
require an optional hub
network for simultaneously
connecting to several
devices (such as computer,
musical instrument, etc.).
2
Accessing the Website from the Electone
Connection example 3:
Wireless connection
Modem*
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,
optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
USB wireless LAN adapter
Router
Access
Point
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
Control Menu Browser
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
196
In the Control Menu located in the left part of the display, you can control the
displayed website and set various settings. The browser display, to the right of the
control menu, is the area in which the website is displayed.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Scrolling the Display
When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser
display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side or bottom of the display.
Touch and move the scroll bar to view those parts of the page that are not shown.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Following Links
When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To select
the link, press it (the button or text) directly on the display.
The touch panel will not sound when you press a link, even if the touch panel sound is
set to ON in the Utility Display (page 16).
The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet is
called the “home page.” If you want to return to the home page from another
website, press the [HOME] button in the Control Menu.
Reference Page
Changing the Home Page
(page 202)
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
197
Monitoring the Internet Connection Status
The four icons and a message indicate the current Internet connection status.
1 Offline indicator ( )
This is shown when the instrument is not connected to the Internet. When this
appears, you cannot view any web pages.
2 Communication Status indicator ( )
This flashes when the web page is being loaded, indicating that communication
with the site is in progress. The indicator lights continuously when loading is
finished (communication is established).
3 SSL indicator ( )
This is shown when the opened website uses SSL, and it indicates that data is
encrypted before transmission.
4 Wireless LAN indicator
When you connect the Electone to Internet using wireless LAN, an icon indicating
the condition of the connection is displayed. If the signal to the Electone becomes
weak or there is no signal from the access point, move the Electone nearer to the
access point.
:Strong
:Normal
:Weak (not connected to Internet)
:No signal (not connected to Internet)
5 Communication status indicator
The following three messages will be shown depending on the status of accessing
web site.
1
5
23
4
Now opening web page ...
Indicates loading of the web page.
Web page has been displayed.
Indicates the web page has been loaded and
the web page is completely displayed.
Disconnected.
Indicates the Electone is offline (not connected
to Internet).
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
198
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page
To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the
page, or to try reloading), press the [REFRESH] button.
To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press
the [STOP] button.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Return to the Previous Web Page
To return to a previously selected web page, press the [BACK] button.
To return to the page selected before pressing the [BACK] button, press
the [FORWARD] button.
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
199
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages
You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page can
be instantly called up in the future.
With the desired page currently selected, press the
[BOOKMARK] button in the control menu.
The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks.
The title of the web page registered to the selected bookmark is shown below the
list.
Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the
[ADD] button.
1
2
Page title
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
200
Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the desired
position directly, or using the [UP]/[DOWN] button or the Data
Control Dial.
To save the bookmark, press the [EXECUTE] button, or press the
[CANCEL] button to cancel.
To return to the browser, press the [EXIT] button.
Opening a Bookmarked Page:
Press the [BOOKMARK] button in the control menu to call up the
Bookmark display, then select the desired bookmark.
Press the [JUMP] button to open the page of the selected
bookmark.
3
DATA CONTROL
4
5
1
2
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
201
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing Bookmarks
From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the order of your
bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list.
1 UP/DOWN
Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list.
2 JUMP
Opens the web page of the selected bookmark.
3 ADD
Used when saving a bookmark (page 199).
4 CHANGE
Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing this button calls up the display
for entering characters. For details on entering characters, see page 108.
5 DELETE
Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list.
6 MOVE
Changes the order of the bookmarks.
1 Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [MOVE]
button.
The left part of the display changes, letting you select the new position for the
bookmark.
2 Select the intended position by pressing the desired position in
the display, or by using the [UP]/[DOWN] buttons or Data Control
dial.
3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the
[EXECUTE] button.
7 CLOSE
This closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
202
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Home Page
You can specify any desired page on the site to be the home page. In advance, open the
page you wish to set as your new home page.
Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the
Internet Setting display.
Press the [Browser] button to call up the Browser Page.
Press the [Register] button of the “Set this page as Home.”
To return to the browser, press the [EXECUTE] button in the
control menu.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [YES] to
return to the browser.
1
2
3
4
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
203
From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the Internet
connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet Settings
display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Browser
1 Encode
Selects the character code encoding for the browser.
2 Home page
Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page.
3 Set this page as Home
For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 202.
4 Restore default Home
Restores the home page setting.
5 Show images
Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to
on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off.
6 Character entry keys
This setting lets you select the character order of the virtual keyboard for entering
characters. When this is set to “Alphabetical,” the keys are in alphabetical order. When
this is set to “ASCII,” the keys are arranged as a conventional “QWERTY” keyboard.
7 Time zone
This determines the time setting for the browser.
3
About the Internet Settings Display
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
204
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
LAN
In this display page, you can make settings for the LAN connection. These settings are
needed for not only wired LAN connection but also wireless LAN connection.
1 Use DHCP
Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP,
select “ON (set DNS automatically)” here.
2 DNS server 1 / DNS server 2
These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These
settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manually)” or
“OFF.”
3 IP address / Subnet mask / Gateway
These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made when
“Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.”
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Wireless LAN
In this display page, you can make settings for the wireless LAN connection. These
settings must be the same as the settings on the Access Point.
1
2
3
Make a written note of these settings, in case you
have to enter the settings again.
Use DHCP
DNS server 1
DNS server 2
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
1
2
3
5
4
Make a written note of these settings, in case you
have to enter the settings again.
SSID
Channel Ch
Encryption On Off
WEP key type ASCII Hexadecimal
WEP key length 64 bit 128 bit
WEP key
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
205
1 Access Point
Pressing the [Display Information] button calls up the access point list. It shows the
access points near the Electone.
Once you select the desired access point and press the [OK] button, a message appears
prompting confirmation of whether to transfer the access point settings to the Electone
or not. When you select [YES], the SSID, Channel and Encryption settings are
transferred to the Electone.
2 SSID
Determines the SSID setting.
3 Channel
Determines the channel.
4 Encryption
Determines whether or not the data is encrypted.
5 WEP key type / WEP key length / WEP key
These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the type
and length of the encryption key.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Others
1 Proxy server / Proxy port / Non-proxy server
Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for a main, non-
proxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server.
2 Delete cookies
Deletes the contents of all saved cookies.
3 Delete all bookmarks
Deletes all saved bookmarks.
4 Initialize setup
Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializing
Internet Settings” on page 206.
5 Connection information
Shows detailed information on the current connection.
NOTE
An access point that is
encrypted in a non-WEP
format cannot be used.
NOTE
If no signal from the access
point is received, the access
point cannot be listed.
NOTE
The WEP key type, length
and WEP key are not entered
automatically. You have to
enter them by yourself if you
want to use an access point
that is encrypted.
2
3
4
5
1
NOTE
When using two or more non-
proxy servers, separate each
server name with a comma.
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
206
Pressing any button other than [INTERNET] button quits the Internet Direct
Connection and closes the website display. Pressing the [INTERNET] button again
automatically opens the previously opened website.
The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize
operation of the Electone (page 21); Internet settings must be initialized separately, as
explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the
browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays, including
those related to Internet connection.
Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the
Internet Settings display.
Press the [Others] button at the top right of the display.
Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the Internet settings.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [YES] to initialize the Internet settings, or select [NO] to
abort the operation.
4
Exiting from the Internet Display
5
Initializing Internet Settings
1
2
3
4
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
207
6
Glossary of Internet Terms
Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, high-
volume data communication.
Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display
that shows the contents of the web pages.
Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the
Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers”
certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each
time you visit the site.
DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information
can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet.
DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses.
Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other
local storage device — much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument,
this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.
Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite
differing communications standards.
Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to
mean the “front screen” or top page of a website.
Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile
phones and other devices.
IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location
on the network.
LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single
location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable.
Link A highlighted word, button or icon within a web page that, when clicked, opens another web page.
Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It
converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice
versa.
NTP Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a
network. For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for
cookies and SSL.
Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is
necessary to contract to a provider.
Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing
information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the
requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance
and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal
network.
Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting
several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is
usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router.
Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services.
Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the
collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha
site.
SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection.
Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names.
SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers
over the Internet.
Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks.
URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and
pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.”
Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.
Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
208
Connections
13
Connections
On the underside of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/
output terminals and miscellaneous controls.
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone.
For details on connecting to external devices, see page 211.
1 INPUT VOLUME knob
For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC./LINE IN jack.
2 MIC./LINE IN jack
For connecting a mono input, such as microphone or guitar. The Electone outputs the
microphone or guitar sounds, with reverb processing, through the built-in speaker
system.
3 MIC./LINE switch
When connecting a microphone or other electric/electronic instrument to the MIC./
LINE IN jack, make sure to set this level gain switch appropriately, depending on the
device you use.
4 PHONES jacks
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this
jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing
you to play without disturbing others.
Contents
1 Accessory Jacks and Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2 Connection Examples – External Devices . . . . . . . . . 211
•Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
•Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
•Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder 213
•Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the Built-in
Speakers of the Electone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
•Connecting a Microphone or Guitar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
•Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone . . . . . . . 215
•Controlling the Electone from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . 216
•Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adapter . . . . . . 216
3 Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
•What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
•MIDI Messages of the Electone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
•MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
5 MIDI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
1
Accessory Jacks and Controls
MIN MAX
INPUT
VOLUME
MIC. /
LINE IN MIC. LINE PHONES
1 2 3
4
Reference Page
Connecting a Microphone or
Guitar (page 214)
Reference Page
Using Headphones (page
211)
13
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
209
5 AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks
This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device. The signal from
the connected external device sounds from the Electone’s built-in speakers.
6 AUX OUT (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks
This pair of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker system.
The output level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial.
7 AUX OUT (RCA; L, R) jacks (LEVEL FIXED)
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output
level is fixed and cannot be controlled.
AUX IN
L / L+R R
AUX OUT
L / L+R R
AUX OUT
L R
(LEVEL FIXED)
5 6 7
Reference Page
Outputting the Sound of an
External Device Through the
Built-in Speakers of the
Electone (page 213)
Reference Pages
Playing the Sounds of the
Electone Through an External
Audio System (page 211)
Recording the Sounds of the
Electone to an External
Recorder (page 213)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
210
Connections
13
8 OPTICAL OUT terminal
For connection using an optical-fiber cable. This terminal outputs a digital signal of
44.1 kHz, 24 bits.
9 USB TO DEVICE terminals
For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB flash memory or floppy disk drive)
or a USB-LAN adapter for connecting to the Internet. A USB unit has been installed
to one of the terminals for convenient and easy connection/disconnection of a USB
device.
) MIDI IN/OUT terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use
these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.
OPTICAL
OUT
TO DEVICE
USB
IN OUT
MIDI
)
8
9
USB unit
Reference Page
Recording the Sounds of the
Electone to an External
Recorder (page 213)
USB unit
Reference Pages
Precautions when using the
USB TO DEVICE terminal
(page 100)
Internet Direct Connection
(page 194)
Connecting USB storage
devices or USB-LAN adapter
(page 216)
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 224)
Reference Pages
Controlling External MIDI
Devices from the Electone
(page 215)
Controlling the Electone from
an External Device (page
216)
Connection with Computer
(page 217)
What is MIDI? (page 218)
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
211
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Using Headphones
To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES jacks (standard 1/4" phone
jacks). Two people can enjoy listening to the Electone together by connecting two pairs
of headphones to the two jacks.
Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
External Audio System
By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can connect your Electone to external speakers. If
you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX OUT L/L+R jack
(standard phone).
2
Connection Examples – External Devices
Before connecting the Electone to other electronic components, turn off the
power to all the components. Before turning the power of the components
on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or
damage to the components may occur.
PHONES
AUX OUT
L/L+R R
Speaker (Left)
Speaker (Right)
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
212
Connections
13
Connection example: Using a mixer for live performance
Generally, when you use the Electone on stage (in concert, etc.), you should
connect it to a mixer. By using a mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone
quality of each component.
To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the Electone. The Electone
features different types of AUX OUT jacks, allowing you to choose the appropriate
one for your specific application.
*The balanced line is good for long cable runs, or for low-level signals since it picks up less noise
than unbalanced lines.
Power-on Procedure
Before turning the power on to all components, set all volume levels to minimum
(0) then turn on the power in the following order:
(1) Electone and external keyboard(s)
(2) Mixer
(3) Powered Speaker
To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for each devices, then turn off the
power in the reverse order (3 → 2 → 1).
Jacks Output Type Location
AUX OUT phone jacks
L/L+R, R
Balanced*
Level is controlled with the
MASTER VOLUME Dial.
Left underside of the keyboard
AUX OUT RCA pin jacks
L, R
Unbalanced*
LEVEL FIXED
Left underside of the keyboard
MIC.
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Sound
Sound
Sound
Sound
Sound
Main Speakers
(ex. Powerd-amp Speakers)
Monitar
Speakers
Mixer
Keyboards
AUX OUT
STAGEA
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
213
Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recorder
You can record your Electone performance to an external recorder, such as an MD
recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT
jacks. Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with
exceptionally high-quality digital sound (providing the external recorder has an Optical
In terminal). Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks (RCA or standard phone, depending
on the connectors of your particular recorder).
Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
the Built-in Speakers of the Electone
Connect the AUX IN jacks of the Electone with the LINE OUT of an external device,
such as a CD player. The sound from the CD player is output from Electone’s built-in
speakers.
First turn on the power of the external device, then that of the Electone. Reverse this
order when you turn the power off.
If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack.
NOTE
If you want to record the
sound input from the AUX IN
jack together with the
Electone sound, use the AUX
OUT standard phone jack on
the underside of the
keyboard.
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUTAUX OUT L
LINE IN L
R
R
Cassette tape recorder, etc.
Cassette tape recorder, etc.
Audio cable
Optical digital cable
Recording
Recording
R
R
L/L+R
L/L+RLINE OUT
AUX IN
Stereo audio system
Playing
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
214
Connections
13
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Connecting a Microphone or Guitar
By connecting a microphone to the Electone, you can enjoy singing along with your
own performance. The Electone outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the
built-in speakers.
Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack (standard
1/4"phone jack).
A dynamic microphone is recommended.
Set the MIC./LINE switch to the MIC position when connecting a
microphone, or the LINE position when connecting a guitar or
other high-level output device.
Use the INPUT VOLUME knob to set the microphone volume.
1
MIC./LINE IN
2
MIC. LINE MIC. LINE
When connecting
a microphone
When connecting
a guitar
NOTE
When you’re not sure which
position is the best, first set it
to LINE. If the output level is
too low, switch to the MIC
position.
3
MIN MAX
INPUT
VOLUME
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
215
To adjust the volume/reverb:
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility
display.
Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL
Page, adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone,
and the volume.
No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume
here, unless you turn the INPUT VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly, no
reverb can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here, unless you raise
the total reverb level with the panel REVERB button.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone
generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more
multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must
match the transmit channels on your Electone.)
The Electone transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with
note information, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed
down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device
responds to these messages depends on the particular device.
1
2
Reference Page
Reverb (page 46)
Reference Page
What is MIDI? (page 218)
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Tone generator
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
216
Connections
13
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Electone from an External Device
You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of
your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit
channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your Electone.)
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adapter
Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices (such
as the USB flash memory or UD-FD01 floppy disk drive) for saving your Electone
data, and/or a USB-LAN adapter for direct connection to the Internet.
When you use USB devices, refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE
terminal” on page 100.
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
received.
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
MIDI keyboard or synthesizer
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
Reference Pages
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 224)
Internet Direct Connection
(page 194)
Formatting External Media
(page 102)
NOTE
If necessary, use a USB hub.
Only self-powered (battery or
external power supply) types
can be used. Up to two USB
hubs can be used.
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
217
By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the Electone
to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the
Electone and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the
OUT terminal on the Electone to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the
other connecting the IN terminal on the Electone to the MIDI OUT terminal on the
interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable.
Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical
possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score
writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original
Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with
your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by
playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your Electone.
3
Connection with Computer
NOTE
Depending on your particular
MIDI interface, you may have
to connect the MIDI Interface
and the computer with a
serial cable.
MIDI
IN OUT
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
Computer
MIDI Interface
(for example, UX16)
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transferred to/from the
computer.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
218
Connections
13
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your Electone.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
What is MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a
grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy
to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings
and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But
how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the
speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for
note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the
Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the
electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what
Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it
released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to
the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored
sampled note.
Example of Keyboard Information
As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice
selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data – including rhythm
patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc. – also consist of
MIDI messages.
4
MIDI
Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)
Internal amp
Internal amp
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Playing the keyboard
RL
Acoustic guitar note production
Digital instrument note production
Pluck a string and the body resonates
the sound.
Based on playing information from the keyboard,
a sampled note stored in the tone generator is
played through the speakers.
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
219
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to
communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control
Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
MIDI Messages of the Electone
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System
Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the
keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several
MIDI devices to communicate with each other.
Channel Messages
Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which
keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the
Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard.
Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127.
The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.
For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 226 and MIDI
Implementation Chart on page 236.
• Program Change
Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With
these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone. For more detailed
information, see MIDI Data Format on page 226 and MIDI Implementation Chart on
page 236.
• Control Change
Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,
modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through
specific Control Change numbers.
For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the
Electone, see MIDI Data Format on page 226 and MIDI Implementation Chart on
page 236.
System Messages
• System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration
data.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
220
Connections
13
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
MIDI Channels
MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,
the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent
over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts
over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs
simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to
watch the desired program.
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI
data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to
the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive
Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound
according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.
The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,
channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that
when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set
the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s)
of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower
and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 221 for more information.
1
Weather Report
NEWS
2
2
NEWS
MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2
MIDI
cable
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
221
When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or
computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the
Electone is controlled.
Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel to call up the Utility
Display.
Press the [MIDI] button at the top right of the display to call up
the MIDI Page.
1 OUTPUT
For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any
channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard (the Upper keyboard, the
Lower keyboard and the Pedalboard) as well as the Expression pedal and 2nd
Expression pedal. The MIDI messages for each keyboard and Expression pedal will be
sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the
receive channel of the connected device. (The ELS-01 does not show the 2nd
Expression pedal.)
Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop-up menu. After you
select the desired channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes.
The Expression pedal and 2nd Expression pedal can be set to “OFF” (MIDI
information will not be transmitted). On the 2nd Expression pedal, CC#4 by which
MIDI information is output as Second Expression can be also set.
2 MIDI OUT FILTER
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone.
After Touch and Rhythm start/stop are automatically filtered on the ELS-01.
In addition, Horizontal Touch and Second Expression are automatically filtered on the
ELS-01C. Set the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON.
5
MIDI Control
1
2
1
23
3-1 3-2 3-3
NOTE
If you set Second Expression
to on in the MIDI OUT FILTER
parameters, the setting in the
OUTPUT (1) parameters will
be disabled.
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
222
Connections
13
3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (INTERNAL) or the
connected device (EXTERNAL).
3 - 1 LEAD 1
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices.
INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the Electone.
(If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower keyboard.)
EXT. (External): The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI
channel 4.
3
- 2 SYNC.
To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device, you can use either the
instrument's internal clock (INT.) or MIDI clock signals from the external
device (EXT.).
INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own internal clock.
EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock signals from the external device
(MIDI).
3
- 3 EXPRESSION
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this
control is set to AUTO.
AUTO: Internal and External is automatically switched.
INT. (Internal): You can manually control the expression pedal even during M.D.R.
playback.
EXT. (External): While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the
expression pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a USB
flash memory or received MIDI data.)
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
223
Appendix
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Bench for the ELS-01
Turn the bench board over and install two
legs for the front side.
Tighten the bolts using the included wrench (as shown).
Make sure to put washers between the bolts and
the bench board.
Install the foot rest to the legs with the
included four screws, using a screwdriver.
Install the two legs for the back side.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Bench for the ELS-01C
Turn the bench board over and install the
legs with the included eight screws.
Tighten the screws using the included hexagonal
wrench (as shown).
Make sure to put washers between the screws and
the bench board.
Install the foot rest to the legs with the
included four screws, using a screwdriver.
Bench Assembly
1
L
R
Logo is written on back
Washer
Bolt
2
3
If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-
term use, tighten them periodically using the included
tool and a screwdriver.
1
L
R
Logo is written
on back
Washer
Bolt
2
14
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
224
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Installing the Floppy Disk Drive
The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed
to the bottom of the instrument by using the included
floppy disk drive case. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver
ready.
Make sure that the screwdriver head snugly fits the
slots of the screw head. In particular, avoid
applying excessive force with an ill-fitting screw
driver; doing so may strip the slots and damage the
screws.
NOTE
None of the included screws are necessary for installing the UD-
FD01 to this Electone.
Remove the three backing papers from the
adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy
disk drive into the case.
Fold the USB cable inside the case as
shown.
Remove the USB unit from the Electone by
disconnecting the USB cable and removing
the four screws.
Put the USB unit on top of the UD-FD01
floppy disk drive as shown.
Installing Optional Hardware
1
Dual-sided
adhesive tape
2
3
4
Align the four holes of
these two units.
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
225
Install these two units together with the
screws removed in step 3.
First temporarily install the right-front screw, then
insert and partially fix the remaining three screws.
Finally, firmly tighten all four screws.
Connect the USB cables for both units to
the USB TO DEVICE terminals.
5
First install this screw.
6
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
226
1. Channel Messages
1.1 EL Mode
MIDI Data Format
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note Off
Note On
1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch
(4ch)*
16ch
(4ch)**
Control
LEAD 1
(ELS-01 not transmitted)
Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch
5-14ch
(16ch)* Control
XG
Bn,10, 00-7F VA After Touch 1ch (1ch)* UK
(ELS-01C only)
Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
5-14ch ˛ XG
“˛” indicates “Not available.”
“
Ø” indicates “Available.”
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
227
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 221).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
1.2 XG Mode
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
5-14ch ˛ XG
Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch
16ch
˛
16ch
XG
Control
Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1ch
2ch
(4ch)*
˛
5-14ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
˛
(1-16ch)*
UK
LK
LEAD 1
2nd Expression (ELS-01C only)
XG
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1-16ch ˛
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note On
Note Off
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ 16ch
(4ch)**
Control
LEAD 1
(ELS-01C only)
Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression
1-16ch
(16ch)* Control
Bn,10, 00-7F VA After Touch ˛ (1ch)* UK
(ELS-01C only)
Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
228
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 221).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
2. Realtime Messages
* Received only when in the Ext. mode
3. System Exclusive Messages
3.1 Format
Universal Realtime Messages
Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
1-16ch ˛
Cn, 00-7F Program Change
1-16ch
16ch Control
Dn, 00-7F After Touch
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(1-16ch)*
˛
UK
LK
2nd Expression (ELS-01C only)
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
F8 Clock Ø* Ø
FA Start ØØ
FC Stop ØØ
FE Active Sensing ØØ
FF Reset ˛˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Volume Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
229
Universal Non-Realtime Messages
XG Native
Clavinova Exclusive
Message Exclusive
Electone Exclusive
˛: don’t care N: Device Number (“0” on ELS-01/01C) ID: Model ID (ELS-01C=4DH, ELS-01=4EH)
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7
XN
GM ON Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7
XN
GM2 ON Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7
XN
GM OFF Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7
XN
GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 XG Parameter Change Ø˛
F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø˛
F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7
03
Request for Internal Synch. Mode
Request for External Synch. Mode
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Rhythm Start Ø˛
F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data ˛Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7
00
Switch ON
Switch OFF
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛Ø
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
230
*1. Switches
*2. Panel Switch Events
Selectors
Volume
Organ Flute Voice
To Lower
Solo Mode
nn Switch Receive Transmit
45H Left Footswitch ØØ
47H Knee Lever ØØ
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
0F Registration Memory [1-16] Ø [00-0F] ˛ -
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
19 Lead Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
30 Upper Organ Flute Voice
[U. ORGAN FLUTES]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
31 Lower Organ Flute Voice
[L. ORGAN FLUTES]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▼]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
39 Lead Voice 2 Solo (Knee)
[SOLO (KNEE)]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
231
Brilliance
Sustain
Solo Bar
Keyboard Percussion
Disable
Rotary Speaker
Rhythm Sequence
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
59 Solo Bar Ø [00-01] ˛ - 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
5B Keyboard Percussion [1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
5C Keyboard Percussion [2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
5F Disable [D.] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
60 Rotary Speaker Speed
[ROTARY SP SPEED]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
232
*3. MIDI Parameter
Voice Section Parameters
Panel Voice Parameters
(Address mm: 0 – 7 = UK1
,
UK2
,
LK1
,
LK2
,
LEAD 1
,
LEAD 2
,
PEDAL 1
,
PEDAL 2)
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
10 00-07 00-0D 5 00-7F
00-7F
00-02
00
00
Voice Assign Number 00-7F
00-7F
00-02
00
00
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
00-02
00
00
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
00-02
00
00
10 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D
10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:BRILLIANT
40:CENTER
7F:MELLOW
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET
01:16'
02:8'
03:4'
04:2'
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04
10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT
40:CENTER
7F:RIGHT
Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78
10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 17 1 00-7F Touch Tone After Touch 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 18 1 00-7F Pitch After Touch 00:NARROW
7F:WIDE
Ø 00-7F Ø 32-4E
10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET
01:USER
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT
7F:LONG
Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A
10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54
10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW
7F:FAST
Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C
10 00-05 1D 1 00-7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00:NARROW
7F:WIDE
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato (On/Off) 00:OFF
7F:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲/SOLO (KNEE) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Knee Lever/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
02:Knee Lever
Ø 00-02 Ø 00-02
10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F
10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down
40:Center
7F:Up
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-01/
04-07
23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46
10 06-07 28 1 00-7F Poly (On/Off) 00:Mono
01:Poly
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 05 29 1 00-7F Priority (Last/Top) 00:TOP
01:LAST
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF
01:Mute ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
233
10 00-07 40 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
10 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 51 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect 2 Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
10 00-07 52 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 53 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 54 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 55 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 56 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 57 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 58 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 59 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 60 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 61 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 63 1 00-7F Sustain Length 7F:Hold
7E:Long
00:Short
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
234
Organ Flute Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 1 = UK, LK)
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
11 00-01 00 1 00-7F Footage 16' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 01 1 00-7F Footage 8' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 02 1 00-7F Footage 5-1/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 03 1 00-7F Footage 4' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 04 1 00-7F Footage 2-2/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 05 1 00-7F Footage 2' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 06 1 00-7F Footage 1-3/5' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 07 1 00-7F Footage 1-1/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 08 1 00-7F Footage 1' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 09 1 00-7F Response 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0A 1 00-7F Attack 4' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0B 1 00-7F Attack 2-2/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0C 1 00-7F Attack 2' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0D 1 00-7F Attack Length 00:Short
7F:Long
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 10 1 00-7F Organ Flutes (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
11 00-01 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 13 1 00-7F Type (Sine/Vintage) 00:Sine
01:Vintage
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
11 00-01 40 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
11 00-01 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 11 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 12 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 13 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 14 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 15 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 16 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
11 00-01 63 1 00-7F Sustain Length 7F:Hold
7E:Long
00:Short
Ø 00-7F Ø 15-3D, 7F
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
235
Keyboard Parameters
Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL)
Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2])
Rhythm
Rhythm Parameters
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short
7F:Long
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
12 01-02 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
12 01-02 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00:PRESET
01:USER 1
02:USER 2
03:USER 3
04:USER 4
05:USER 5
06:USER 6
07:USER 7
08:USER 8
Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 00 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F Rhythm Assign Number 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
13 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number 00-0B Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B
13 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression
Tempo Control (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1
01:INTRO 2
02:INTRO 3
08:MAIN A
09:MAIN B
0A:MAIN C
0B:MAIN D
18:BREAK
20:ENDING 1
21:ENDING 2
22:ENDING 3
7E:STOP
7F:OFF
(INTRO 1 –
STOP)
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
236
Rhythm Sequence Parameters
Accompaniment Parameters
A.B.C. Function Parameters
M.O.C. Function Parameters
Section Parameters
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 01 00-03 1 00-7F Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 02 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 02 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb
(Send Level)
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 03 00 1 00-7F Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF
01:Single Finger
02:Fingered
03:Custom A.B.C.
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
13 03 01 1 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 03 02 1 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 04 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 00:OFF
01:1
02:2
03:3
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
13 04 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Knee Lever Control
(On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
MIDI Implementation chart
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
237
Keyboard Percussion Parameters
Overall
System Parameters
*ELS-01
Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb
Effect Parameters (Overall): Rhythm Reverb
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 10 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 10 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 00 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 01 1 00-7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00:Each
01:First
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46
14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C
0C:1200 C
Ø 01-0C Ø 01-0C
14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF
01:Rhythm
02:Glide
03:
Rotary Speaker
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown
40:Normal
7F:PitchUp
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C
14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal
01:External
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal
01:External
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 0A 3 00-04
00-04
(00-03)*
00-0B
Registration Menu 00-04
00-04
(00-03)
00-0B
Ø 00-04
00-04
(00-03)
00-0B
Ø 00-04
00-04
(00-03)
00-0B
14 00 0B 1 00-01 Disable Mode 00:Normal
01:Tempo
Ø 00-01 Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 01 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45
14 01 02 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Reverb Type (Panel) 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 02 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Rhythm) 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45
14 02 02 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Reverb Type (Rhythm) 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
238
Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker
*
4. MDR
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 03 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Mode
00:STOP
01:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
14 03 02 2 0000-
007F
Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Speed
0000:SLOW
007F:FAST
Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F
nn Command Receive Transmit
01H Play Start Ø˛
02H Play Stop Ø˛
03H Record Start Ø˛
04H Record Stop Ø˛
05H Fast Forward Start Ø˛
06H Fast Forward Stop Ø˛
09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø˛
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
239
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
16
96, 97
64-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
98-99, 100-101
:True Voice
1, 2, 3, 16
(
*
1)
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
7, *12)
˛
Ø
(
*
7)
Ø
(
*
8, *12)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
10)
************************
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
*1;
*2;
*3;
*4;
*5;
*6;
*8;
*10;
*11;
*12;
*7; CONTROL only
*9; External Mode only
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL
UK: 36-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60
UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127
UK: UK HorizontalTouch, LK: LK HorizontalTouch
XG only
UK only
CONTROL: 0-15
UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127
ELS-01C only
Mode 3
˛
************************
36-96
(
*
3)
************************
Ø
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Ø
(
*
5)
1-3, 5-16
(
*
2)
4
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
7)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6, 7)
Ø
(
*
8, *12)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
11)
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
9)
Ø
Ø (120)
(
*
6)
Ø (121)
(
*
6)
˛
Ø (123-127)
(
*
6)
Ø
˛
Mode 3
˛
˛
0-127
(
*
4)
Ø
Ø
Bank Select
2
nd
Expression
Data Entry
Expression
VA After Touch
Data Entry SW
Sound Controller
NRPN, RPN
(FAH, FCH)
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
Date: 10-Oct-2008
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: ELS-01/01C typeU
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
TransmittedFunction Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Note
Number
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode
Default
Changed
Note on
Note off
Key's
Ch's
:Clock
:Commands
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
:True number
Default
Messages
Altered
MIDI Implementation Chart
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
240
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
16
96, 97
64-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
98-99, 100-101
:True Voice
1, 2, 3, 16
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
2)
˛
Ø
Ø
(
*
2)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø 0-15
************************
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
*1;
*2;
Same as that in the EL mode
ELS-01C only
Mode3
˛
************************
36-96
************************
Ø
Ø
1-16
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Mode 3
˛
˛
0-127
Ø
Ø
Bank Select
2
nd
Expression
Data Entry
Expression
VA After Touch
Data Entry SW
Sound Controller
NRPN, RPN
Date: 10-Oct-2008
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: ELS-01/01C typeU
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Ø (120)
Ø (121)
˛
Ø (123-127)
Ø
˛
Transmitted
(
*
1)
Function Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Note
Number
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode
Default
Changed
Note on
Note off
Key's
Ch's
:Clock
:Commands
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
:True number
Default
Messages
Altered
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
241
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
GENERAL OPERATION
The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after
turning the power on.
This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an
electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this
occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible
from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.
Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an
amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
The sound of the Electone causes surrounding
objects to resonate.
Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,
resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass
windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.
In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit)
or white points (always lit).
Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs.
Some buttons on the panel do not respond. The UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES and LEAD VOICE 2 buttons are invalid
on the ELS-01. If you upgrade the ELS-01 to the ELS-01C, these buttons can
be used.
Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT section do
not light.
The LEDs of on/off buttons (UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES, VOICE EDIT,
RHYTHM PROGRAM, and ROTARY SP SPEED) are lit when those functions
are turned on. The LEDs of other function’s buttons momentarily light when the
functions are selected.
The sound is too small even when the volume is set to
its maximum.
• The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it
clockwise.
• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your
toe.
• The POWER switch of the speaker may have been turned off. Turn it on.
• (For the ELS-01C) The REAR SPEAKER switch may have been set to OFF.
Switch it to ON.
The Electone panel does not function normally or the
content of the memorized data has changed.
This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to
electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/
or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory
Set operation to reset the Electone (page 21).
VOICES/RHYTHMS
The pitch may sound excessively high on the
Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the
Lower and Upper keyboards.
This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy
sounds.
You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely
added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind
instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.
When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes
sound.
Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
Keyboards) is 14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the
total is 14 for all keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard.
When sustain length is set to HOLD, previously
played notes are cut off.
Since the HOLD setting causes notes to keep sounding, the cumulative notes
(elements) may go over the maximum elements that the Electone can sound.
When this occurs, previously played notes are cut off.
Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead
or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played.
For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that
only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want,
the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 40).
The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the
volume is properly set.
• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn
off the mode in the display (page 62).
• TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the
function off (page 26).
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
242
When selecting a User button Voice or rhythm, the
Voice or rhythm title at the top of the LCD does not
match the selected Voice or rhythm.
The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and
remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected.
When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion
instruments are also heard.
The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
function, be sure to turn it off (page 65).
Even though a User button’s rhythm has been
selected and started, the pattern does not sound.
Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern
has not been saved to the selected User button.
EFFECTS
The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 39).
The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice
sections, even when the REVERB button setting on
the panel is increased.
Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display
Pages 2 – 4.
The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even
when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY
SELECT section is on.
Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/
or 4 (for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page
(for Organ Flute Voices).
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change,
even when pressing different keys of the keyboard.
Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing,
the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound,
even when the keys are played.
Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of
an Intro/Ending pattern.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an
appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the
rhythm has been started.
• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 62).
• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
(page 61).
The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function
cannot be heard.
The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the
volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.
The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be
heard.
The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition
display (page 40).
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been memorized to
Registration Memory.
Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 81.
VOICE EDITING
The Voice Edit display cannot be called up even when
the [VOICE EDIT] button is pressed.
The Voice Edit display cannot called up by pressing only the [VOICE EDIT]
button. While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the desired Voice
button.
During Voice editing, the specified Voice isn’t heard,
even when the keyboard is played.
• The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or
increase the volume.
•You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys
within the Note Limit range.
An error message appears while the Voice name is
entered.
Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or
spaces.
RHYTHM PROGRAM
During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no sound
is produced even when you play a certain percussion
sound.
If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no
subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary,
erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
243
MUSIC DATA RECORDER
The USB flash memory is not recognized. The USB cable of the USB unit is disconnected. Firmly connect the cable to
the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have
been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
• The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
• The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the
media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record
the song to it.
Recording is stopped before the performance is
finished.
• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.
• When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part
cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the
previously recorded song, then record again (page 126).
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
An error message appears while entering a folder
name or song name.
• The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters.
• The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 110.
• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters.
Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path.
The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a
recording, or stops in the middle of the performance.
The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very
beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time
indicator appears in the display.
The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to
format an unformatted disk.
Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted.
Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again.
The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound
continuously.
During playback, you may have removed the USB flash memory. Whenever
you wish to stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop) button before
removing the media.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
244
Specifications
Electone STAGEA
ELS-01 typeU (ELS-01U)
Electone STAGEA
ELS-01C typeU (ELS-01CU)
TONE GENERATION
AWM (4) AWM (4) + VA + Organ Flutes
KEYBOARD
Upper: 49 keys (C – C),
Lower: 49 keys (C – C),
Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)
Keyboard Type
Standard (FS) Custom (FSV)
Initial Touch
Upper, Lower, Pedal
After Touch
Upper, Lower Upper, Lower, Pedal
Horizontal Touch
— Upper, Lower
REGISTRATION Registration Menu
240 300
Registration Memory
M. (Memory), 1 – 16, D. (Disable)
Registration Shift
Shift, Jump, User (80)
VOICE Voice Sections
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2
Voice
Buttons
Upper/
Lower
STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN, PERCUSSION, GUITAR,
CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2
Lead
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1,
TO LOWER (Lead 1), SOLO (Lead 2)
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET,
VA-ACOUSTIC, VA-VIRTUAL, VA-ELECTRONIC,
VA-CUSTOM, USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1),
SOLO (Lead 2)
Pedal
CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER
Preset Voice
415 509 (including VA Voices)
User Voice
AWM: 16 AWM:16, VA: 6
Organ Flute Voice
— Type: Sine, Vintage
Footage:
16', 5 1/3', 8', 4', 2 2/3', 2', 1 3/5', 1 1/3', 1'
Attack: 4', 2 2/3', 2', Length, Response
Effect: XG Rotary Sp, Rotary Sp 1 – 5,
2Way Rot Sp, Dual Rotsp 1 – 2, Dist+Rot Sp,
Odrv+Rot Sp, Amp+Rot Sp, Dist+2Rot Sp,
Odrv+2Rop Sp, Amp+2Rot Sp, OFF
Rotary Speaker Control
2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop
EFFECT/
CONDITION
Sustain
Upper 1, 2 (KNEE), Lower 1, 2 (KNEE), Pedal 1, 2
Reverb
Type: Hall 1 – 3, M, L, Room 1 – 4, S, M, L,
Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, White Room, Tunnel,
Canyon, Basement, XG Hall 1 – 2,
XG Room 1 – 3, XG Stage 1 – 2, XG Plate,
GM Plate
Depth: Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2,
Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment,
Keyboard Percussion
Type: Hall 1 – 3, M, L, Room 1 – 4, S, M, L,
Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, White Room, Tunnel,
Canyon, Basement, XG Hall 1 – 2,
XG Room 1 – 3, XG Stage 1 – 2, XG Plate,
GM Plate
Depth: Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2,
Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment,
Keyboard Percussion, Upper Organ Flute,
Lower Organ Flute
Effects
Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan, Rotary Speaker, Distortion,
Distortion+, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Pitch Change, Miscellaneous, Thru
RHYTHM Rhythm Buttons
MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD,
ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2
Preset Rhythm Pattern
274
Parts
Main Drum, Add Drum
Sections
Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill
ACCOMPANIMENT
Accompaniment Parts
Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2
Auto Bass Chord
OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.
Memory: Lower, Pedal
Melody On Chord
OFF, 1, 2, 3, Knee
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
245
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or
modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
PROGRAMS Voice Edit
✓
Rhythm Pattern
Program
✓
Rhythm Sequence
Program
SEQ. 1 – 4 (Rhythm and Registration program)
Keyboard Percussion
Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 8
CONTROLS
Footswitch
Left
Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A-D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3
Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Glide Time
Rotary Speaker Speed
Right
Registration Shift
Expression Pedal
✓
2nd Expression Pedal
Pitch Bend,
Tempo (set only, not controlled)
Pitch Bend, Tempo
Knee Lever
Sustain (Upper 1, 2/Lower 1, 2), M.O.C., Lead Slide, Solo (Lead 2)
Transpose
-6 – +6
Pitch
A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz
MIDI Control
✓
Main Controls
POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME
M.D.R.
Up, In,
Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record, Custom Play, Score,
Setting (Tempo/Part), Registration Edit
Tools: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete, Conversion (XG/EL/ELS format),
Format, Information
Utility
Language (English/Japanese), Touch Panel Sound, LCD Brightness,
Mic. (Reverb/Volume), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo), Initialize
Display Select
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR,
FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, INTERNET, VOICE EDIT,
RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM,
RHYTHM SEQUENCE PROGRAM,
ROTARY SP SPEED
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR,
FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, INTERNET, VOICE EDIT,
RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM,
RHYTHM SEQUENCE PROGRAM,
U. ORGAN FLUTES, L. ORGAN FLUTES,
ROTARY SP SPEED
OTHERS LCD Display
800 x RGB x 480 dots
Sound
System
Power
Amplifiers
50W x 2 70W x 2
Speakers
Cone: 13 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2
Monitor speaker: 6.6 cm x 2
Cone: 13 cm x 8
Dome: 2.5 cm x 4
Monitor speaker: 6.6 cm x 2
Storage
USB storage device (such as USB flash memory, USB floppy disk drive, etc.)
Connectors
PHONES (2), AUX OUT: L/L+R (standard phone), L/R (Level Fixed, RCA), AUX IN: L/L+R (standard
phone), MIDI IN/OUT, USB TO DEVICE (2; one terminal has been connected to the USB unit.),
OPTICAL OUT, MIC./LINE IN (jack, switch, and volume control)
Power Consumption
130W
Dimensions
(W x D x H), Weight
1229 x 574 x 1017 (1276 with Music Rest) mm,
100 kg
1229 x 574 x 1017 (1276 with Music Rest) mm,
109 kg
Bench
781 x 305 x 618 mm, 8.8 kg 915 x 365 x 618 mm, 12.1 kg
Color
Silver Metallic
Supplied Accessories
Bench, Owner's Manual, Tutorial Guidebook, Product ID card
Electone STAGEA
ELS-01 typeU (ELS-01U)
Electone STAGEA
ELS-01C typeU (ELS-01CU)
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
246
Numerics
2nd Expression Pedal............................................................. 190
A
A.B.C./M.O.C. ..................................................................... 62, 64
ACCENT.................................................................................. 152
Accompaniment........................................................................ 61
Add Drum ................................................................................. 61
AFTER touch (Pitch).................................................................. 40
AFTER touch (Touch Tone)....................................................... 39
ASSEMBLE ............................................................................. 148
ASSIGN (Keyboard Percussion)............................................... 70
ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 36
ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit)............................................. 137, 140
Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 62
Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 54
AUX IN .................................................................................... 209
AUX OUT ................................................................................ 209
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) ....................................................... 209
AWM (Voice Edit).................................................................... 134
AWM Voice ............................................................................... 34
B
BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 56
Bookmark................................................................................ 199
BREAK ...................................................................................... 53
BRILLIANCE (Panel) ................................................................. 47
Browser........................................................................... 196, 203
C
CHANGE SONG NAME .......................................................... 108
Channel Messages ................................................................. 219
CHORD 1 .................................................................................. 61
CHORD 2 .................................................................................. 61
CHORUS (Effect) ...................................................................... 50
CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 164
Control Change....................................................................... 219
Control Menu .......................................................................... 196
CONVERT EL TO ELS............................................................. 129
CONVERT ELS TO EL............................................................. 129
CONVERT TO XG ................................................................... 128
CUSTOM A.B.C. ....................................................................... 63
CUTOFF FREQ........................................................................ 137
D
[D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 82
DATA CONTROL dial................................................................ 10
DECAY RATE .......................................................................... 140
DELAY (Effect) .......................................................................... 50
DELAY (Vibrato)........................................................................ 41
DEPTH (Reverb) ....................................................................... 44
DEPTH (Vibrato)........................................................................ 41
Display Select ........................................................................... 10
DISTORTION............................................................................. 50
DYNAMIC.................................................................................. 50
E
EACH (Organ Flutes).................................................................36
EFFECT......................................................................................42
Effect category (Voice)..............................................................42
Effect Parameters ......................................................................43
EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes)....................................................37
Effect type (Voice) .....................................................................43
Element....................................................................................131
ENDING.....................................................................................53
Envelope Parameters ..............................................................140
EQ (Equalizer) .................................................................135, 140
EQ/ENHANCER (Effect) ............................................................50
ER/KARAOKE ............................................................................50
Expression pedal.......................................................................12
EXTERNAL...............................................................................222
F
Factory Set ................................................................................21
Fast Forward............................................................................119
FEET ..........................................................................................40
File .............................................................................................99
FILL IN .......................................................................................53
Filter.........................................................................................137
FINGERED CHORD...................................................................63
FIRST (Organ Flutes).................................................................36
FLANGER ..................................................................................50
Floppy disk ..............................................................................101
Folder ........................................................................................99
FOOT SWITCH ..................................................................86, 185
FOOTAGE..................................................................................35
Footswitch ...............................................................................185
FORMAT (MDR).......................................................................102
G
Gate Time ................................................................................160
Glide ........................................................................................187
H
Headphones............................................................................211
Home Page..............................................................................202
HORIZONTAL touch..................................................................40
I
INITIAL touch.............................................................................39
Initialize (Factory Set) ................................................................21
Initialize (Internet Settings) ......................................................206
Initialize (Registration Memory) .................................................85
INPUT VOLUME ......................................................................208
INTERNAL ...............................................................................222
INTERNET................................................................................195
Internet Direct Connection ......................................................194
INTRO........................................................................................52
Index
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
247
J
Jacks and Controls ................................................................. 208
JUMP ........................................................................................ 86
K
Keyboard Percussion ............................................................... 65
Knee Lever.............................................................................. 188
L
L. ORGAN FLUTES ................................................................... 35
LAN ......................................................................................... 204
LANGUAGE .............................................................................. 15
LAST (Lead Voice).................................................................... 40
LAYER (Voice Edit) ................................................................. 135
LCD BRIGHTNESS ................................................................... 16
LCD Display.............................................................................. 10
Lead Slide................................................................................. 42
Lead Voice................................................................................ 22
LEAD VOICE (Panel)................................................................... 9
LEVEL (Voice Edit).......................................................... 136, 139
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)............................................. 139
Lower Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 23
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel)........................................... 8
M
[M.] (Memory) ........................................................................... 80
M.O.C........................................................................................ 64
MAIN ......................................................................................... 52
Main Drum ................................................................................ 61
MAIN/FILL IN ............................................................................ 52
MASTER VOLUME .................................................................... 11
MDR .......................................................................................... 95
Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 64
MEMORY (A.B.C.)..................................................................... 64
METRONOME ......................................................................... 147
MIC./LINE IN jack ................................................................... 208
MIC./LINE switch .................................................................... 208
MIDI ........................................................................................ 218
MIDI Control............................................................................ 221
MIDI IN/OUT ........................................................................... 210
MIDI OUT FILTER ................................................................... 221
MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................... 50
MODE (Organ Flutes) ............................................................... 36
MODE (Rotary Speaker) ........................................................... 49
Music Data Recorder................................................................ 95
N
Next Page ............................................................................... 123
Next Regist ............................................................................. 113
NEXT REGIST (Shift End).......................................................... 88
NOTE LIMIT ............................................................................ 136
NOTE SHIFT............................................................................ 136
O
OPTICAL OUT......................................................................... 210
Organ Flutes ............................................................................. 35
OUTPUT (MIDI)....................................................................... 221
P
PAD ...........................................................................................61
PAN (Voice Edit)......................................................................136
PAN (Voice) ...............................................................................39
Part (Rhythm).............................................................................61
PART SETUP (MDR) ................................................................104
PATTERN.................................................................................144
Pause.......................................................................................119
Pedal polyphonic mode ............................................................40
Pedal Voice ...............................................................................23
PEDAL VOICE (Panel) .................................................................9
PHASER.....................................................................................50
PHONES ..................................................................................208
PHRASE 1..................................................................................61
PHRASE 2..................................................................................61
Pitch.........................................................................................193
PITCH (Voice Section)...............................................................40
Pitch Bend ...............................................................................191
PITCH CHANGE ........................................................................50
Playback..................................................................................117
POLY .........................................................................................40
POWER......................................................................................11
PRESET (Vibrato).......................................................................41
Preset Keyboard Percussion.....................................................65
PRESET TEMPO ........................................................................57
PRIORITY...................................................................................40
Program Change .....................................................................219
Protected Song........................................................................116
Punch-in Recording.................................................................108
Q
Quantize ..................................................................................156
R
Real Time Write ...............................................................149, 157
Recording................................................................................105
Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only)......................................106
Recording (Part) ......................................................................106
REGIST EDIT (MDR)................................................................111
Registration Memory .................................................................80
REGISTRATION MENU .............................................................19
Registration Sequence ............................................................179
Registration Shift .......................................................................85
RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit) ...........................................137, 140
Repeat .....................................................................................120
Re-recording (Retry)................................................................106
RESONANCE...........................................................................137
RESP. (Response) .....................................................................36
Reverb .......................................................................................43
REVERB (MIC.)........................................................................215
REVERB (Panel) ........................................................................43
REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ........................................163
Rewind.....................................................................................119
Rhythm ......................................................................................51
Rhythm button ...........................................................................51
Rhythm Clock ..........................................................................151
Rhythm Condition ......................................................................54
Rhythm Menu ............................................................................52
Rhythm Pattern Program .........................................................144
Rhythm Program......................................................................143
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
248
Rhythm Sequence Program.................................................... 174
Rhythmic Chord ...................................................................... 158
ROTARY SP SPEED .................................................................. 48
Rotary Speaker ......................................................................... 48
S
SCORE.................................................................................... 122
Sections .................................................................................... 52
SEQUENCE............................................................................. 174
SHIFT (Registration Shift).......................................................... 86
SHIFT END................................................................................ 88
SINGLE FINGER ....................................................................... 63
SLIDE ........................................................................................ 42
SLOW (Rotary Speaker)............................................................ 49
SOLO ........................................................................................ 27
Song.................................................................................. 99, 103
Song Copy .............................................................................. 124
Song Delete ............................................................................ 126
Specifications ......................................................................... 244
SPEED (Rotary Speaker) .......................................................... 49
SPEED (Vibrato)........................................................................ 41
START ....................................................................................... 53
Step Write ............................................................................... 149
STOP (Rotary Speaker)............................................................. 49
STOP (Shift End) ....................................................................... 88
Style File Format ..................................................................... 170
Sustain ...................................................................................... 47
SUSTAIN (Panel)....................................................................... 47
SYNCHRO START..................................................................... 53
System Exclusive Messages .................................................. 219
System Messages................................................................... 219
T
Tempo (MDR) ......................................................................... 119
TEMPO (Rhythm) ...................................................................... 56
THRU (Effect)............................................................................ 50
TIME (Slide) .............................................................................. 42
TO LOWER................................................................................ 26
TOP (Lead Voice) ..................................................................... 40
TOP (Shift End) ......................................................................... 88
TOUCH PANEL SOUND ........................................................... 16
TOUCH TONE........................................................................... 39
TOUCH VIBRATO ..................................................................... 41
Transpose ............................................................................... 193
TRANSPOSE (Voice section) .................................................... 42
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN.............................................................. 50
TUNE (Voice section)................................................................ 42
TUNE FINE (Voice Edit) .......................................................... 136
U
U. ORGAN FLUTES .................................................................. 35
UD-FD01 ................................................................................. 224
Upper Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 22
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel)............................................ 8
USB flash memory .................................................................. 100
USB TO DEVICE ..................................................... 100, 210, 216
USB unit .................................................................................. 210
USER (Registration Shift) .......................................................... 87
USER (Vibrato).......................................................................... 41
User button (Rhythm)................................................................ 58
User button (Voice) ...................................................................28
User Keyboard Percussion .......................................................70
User Rhythm............................................................................167
User Voice ...............................................................................141
UTILITY......................................................................................15
V
VA (Voice Edit) ........................................................................139
VA Custom Voice.....................................................................141
VA Voice ....................................................................................34
VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................165
Version.......................................................................................21
VIBRATO ...................................................................................41
Voice..........................................................................................22
Voice button ..............................................................................23
Voice Condition ...................................................................25, 39
VOICE DISPLAY ........................................................................17
Voice Edit ................................................................................131
VOICE EDIT (Panel).................................................................133
Voice Menu................................................................................24
Voice section .............................................................................22
Volume (Accompaniment).........................................................62
Volume (Keyboard Percussion).................................................66
VOLUME (MIC.).......................................................................215
VOLUME (Organ Flutes)............................................................36
VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) .......................................162
VOLUME (Rhythm) ....................................................................55
VOLUME (Voice) .......................................................................25
W
WAH ..........................................................................................50
Wireless LAN ...........................................................................204
X
XG................................................................................................6
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
249
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
MEMO
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual
250
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
MEMO
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex
Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-466-5551
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16
th
floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
EKB48
This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division
© 2004 – 2011 Yamaha Corporation
WR03710 109MWCP**-**E0
Printed in Japan
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
Documenttranscriptie
ELS-01/01C typeU Owner’s Manual v1.7 EN PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the instrument, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. (1)B-13 2 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Using the bench • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • Always save data to a USB flash memory or other external media, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Backing up the external media • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Model No. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. ELS-01U/ELS-01CU Serial No. (bottom) (1)B-13 2/2 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 3 Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELS-01/01C typeU (hereafter ELS-01/01C). The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-theart digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility. In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference. Accessories • • • • 4 Bench Owner’s Manual Playing the ELS-01/01C — Tutorial Guidebook Product ID card ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Main Features Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 19 The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 240 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The ELS-01C contains even more — an additional 60 Registrations that utilize the expressive VA Voices and Organ Flute Voices. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into five basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs. Richly textured, four-layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital Effects pages 22 and 50 The ELS-01 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices – 415 altogether – created with the AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The ELS-01C adds to that 94 VA (Virtual Acoustic) Voices and a virtually limitless variety of Organ Flute Voices. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section — letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices, without having to use the Voice Edit features. Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 51 The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) – such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break – that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as embellishments. Large, 6.5-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 12 This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any angle, it also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings simply by touching the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary with the Data Control dial. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 The ELS-01/01C is compatible with the following formats. “GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. [ELS-01C only] Products bearing the SONDIUS-XG logo are licensed under patents of Stanford University and Yamaha as listed on the internet web site, <http://www.sondiusxg.com>. This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied. This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. • Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The panel illustrations and LCD screens shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the ELS-01C, Version 1.7. • The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the ELS-01/01C, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments. 6 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Contents Accessories ..............................................................4 Main Features ...........................................................5 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front Panel ................................................................8 LCD Display/Display Select ....................................10 Overview .................................................................10 Getting Started ........................................................11 Using the LCD Display............................................12 LCD Display Settings ..............................................15 Voice Display ..........................................................17 Registration Menu ...................................................19 Confirming the Version of Your Electone ................21 Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)......................21 2 Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Voices for each keyboard .......................................22 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................23 Selecting Voices from the User buttons..................28 Voice List.................................................................30 3 Organ Flutes (ELS-01C) . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Voice Structure......................................................131 Editing a Voice ......................................................132 Saving the edited Voice ........................................141 Quitting Voice Edit.................................................142 Recalling an Edited Voice .....................................142 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation ....143 Rhythm Pattern Program .......................................144 Rhythm Sequence Program ..................................174 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media ..........................................184 Footswitches .........................................................185 Knee Lever ............................................................188 Expression Pedals.................................................190 12 Internet Direct Connection . . . . . . . 194 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . 51 13 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons............51 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons................58 Rhythm List .............................................................59 Accompaniment ......................................................61 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ...................................................................62 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) .....................................64 Keyboard Percussion..............................................65 Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................208 Connection Examples – External Devices ............211 Connection with Computer....................................217 MIDI .......................................................................218 MIDI Control ..........................................................221 Storing Registrations ...............................................80 Selecting Registrations ...........................................82 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory 84 Initializing Registration Memory ..............................85 Registration Shift .....................................................85 Unifying a specific parameter .................................90 Copying Registrations.............................................93 Voices 3 Organ Flutes (ELS-01C) 4 Voice Controls and Effects 5 Rhythm/ Keyboard Percussion 6 Registration Memory 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 8 Voice Edit 9 Rhythm Program 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls . . . . 193 Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............39 Selecting from the panel .........................................43 Effect List ................................................................50 6 Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2 10 Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals. . . . . . . . . . 185 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet.............194 Accessing the Website from the Electone ............195 About the Internet Settings Display.......................203 Exiting from the Internet Display ...........................206 Initializing Internet Settings ...................................206 Glossary of Internet Terms ....................................207 4 Voice Controls and Effects . . . . . . . . . 38 Quick Introductory Guide 8 Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 9 Rhythm Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 1 Quick Introductory Guide . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 14 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Bench Assembly ...................................................223 Installing Optional Hardware.................................224 MIDI Data Format ..................................................226 Troubleshooting ....................................................241 Specifications........................................................244 Index .....................................................................246 10 Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls 12 Internet Direct Connection 13 Connections 14 Appendix 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) . . . . . . . . 95 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display ................................95 Using the LCD Display............................................96 Formatting External Media ....................................102 Selecting a Song ...................................................103 Recording .............................................................105 Changing the Song Name ....................................108 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)...111 Recalling Recorded Registrations ........................115 Playing Back a Song .............................................117 Displaying the Score .............................................122 Other Functions (Tools).........................................124 Panel Layout Front Panel LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2 (page 23) REVERB buttons (page 43) UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2 (page 22) UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 REVERB BRILLIANCE MAX BRILLIANT Monitor speaker STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 MIN MELLOW LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 SUSTAIN SUSTAIN buttons (page 47) BRILLIANCE BRILLIANT UPPER (KNEE) LOWER (KNEE) PEDAL STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 MELLOW REGISTRATION MENU (page 19) KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 VOLUME BRILLIANCE MAX BRILLIANT STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 MIN MELLOW LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 VOLUME BRILLIANCE MAX STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 MIN VOLUME MAX MIN VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN REGISTRATION MENU 1 2 3 4 RHYTHM 5 VOLUME MAX MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN TEMPO RHYTHM/ KEYBOARD PERCUSSION (page 51) BAR / BEAT TEMPO INTRO 1 2 3 ENDING 1 2 SYNCHRO START START A B RHYTHM CONTROL 3 BREAK MAIN / FILL IN C D 13 [M.] (Memory) button (page 80) 8 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 14 15 16 1 Registration memory (page 80) 2 3 4 LCD display/ DISPLAY SELECT (page 10) PEDAL VOICE 1, 2 (page 23) DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. LEAD VOICE 1 UTILITY BRILLIANCE BRILLIANT MDR VIOLIN FOOT SWITCH LEAD VOICE 1, 2 (page 22) INTERNET FLUTE SYNTH TRUMPET MELLOW BRILLIANCE MAX TO LOWER DATA CONTROL LEAD VOICE 2 VOLUME 1 VA VA ACOUSTIC VIRTUAL VA VA ELECTRONIC CUSTOM VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN 1 Monitor speaker SOLO (KNEE) MIN RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE PEDAL VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE BRILLIANT U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS 1 TIMPANI SYNTH BASS TO LOWER MELLOW VOLUME PEDAL VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE MAX CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS 1 TIMPANI SYNTH BASS TO LOWER MIN VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN MASTER VOLUME dial (page 11) MASTER VOLUME POWER POWER switch (page 11) 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. [D.] (Disable) button (page 82) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 9 LCD Display/Display Select DISPLAY SELECT 1 VOICE DISPLAY 3 FOOT SWITCH 6 A.B.C. M.O.C. 4 UTILITY 7 5 MDR INTERNET 8 DATA CONTROL RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE 9 U.ORGAN FLUTES @ ) ! L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES # $ 2 1 LCD display (touch-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12 2 DATA CONTROL dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14 3 [VOICE DISPLAY] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17 4 [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button . . . . . . . . . . .pages 62, 64 5 [MDR] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 95 6 [FOOT SWITCH] button . . . . . . . . . .pages 86, 185 7 [UTILITY] button . . . . . . pages 15, 191, 193, 221 8 [INTERNET] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 195 9 [VOICE EDIT] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 ) [PATTERN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 144 ! [SEQUENCE] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 174 @ [U. ORGAN FLUTES] button. . . . . . . . . . . page 35 # [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button . . . . . . . . . . . page 35 $ [ROTARY SP SPEED] button . . . . . . . . . . page 48 Overview Key cover/Music rest Front Panel (page 8) Upper keyboard Lower keyboard USB/MIDI connectors (page 210) Knee lever (page 188) Speaker I/O connectors (page 208) Speaker switch Right footswitch (page 85) Left footswitch (page 185) Expression pedal (page 12) Second expression pedal (ELS-01C); (page 190) Pedalboard 10 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest possible manner how to start playing your Electone. Contents 1 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 4 Voice Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2 Using the LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 • Changing the Display Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 • Pressing Buttons on the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 • Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders . . . . 14 5 Registration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 • Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu. . . . . . . . . 19 • Registration Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3 LCD Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 • Selecting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 • Muting the Touch Panel Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 • Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 7 Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 6 Confirming the Version of Your Electone . . . . . . . . . . 21 1 Getting Started 1 Plug the power cord into an appropriate electrical outlet. Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the Electone. Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified technician. 2 3 Make sure that the POWER switch of the speaker is set to on. If you are using the ELS-01C, also set the REAR SPEAKER switch to on (not available on the ELS-01). Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch. NOTE When using the rear speaker, place the Electone against a wall, allowing about 20 cm from the wall for optimum sound. POWER 4 Set the MASTER VOLUME control. The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of the entire instrument. Increasing the volume Decreasing the volume NOTE You do not need to switch the power of the speaker on/off whenever you use the instrument. If you want, you can always keep it on and turn off the power by pressing the main POWER switch of the instrument. MASTER VOLUME ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 11 1 Quick Introductory Guide 5 Press the Expression pedal down with your foot. Maximum volume Minimum volume 2 Using the LCD Display NOTE When cleaning the display, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use any sharp or hard tools to operate the touch panel. Doing so may damage the display. This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters by simply touching the ‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that two or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously.) You can also use the Data Control dial to make fine changes to the parameter value shown in the display. Changing the Display Page ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display. Pressing these buttons changes the “page” of the display. The selected page’s button turns orange. Page 2 Page 1 Press this button to select Page 2 Press this button to select Page 1 12 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Press this button to select Page 3 1 Pressing Buttons on the Display ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Quick Introductory Guide There are three types of buttons: those that select a function, those that switch a function on/off, and those that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the desired function, simply press the button in the display directly. For switching on/off or opening a parameter list, see the instructions below. To switch the function on or off: On Off, or mute (button is grayed out) You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display, each accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit display. To open the parameter list: When you press the button, a parameter list will appear in which you can select the desired parameter. When you select items in the display, the list closes automatically. You can also close the list by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the list. To change the parameter value: To make coarse changes to the value, press the [▲]/[▼] buttons. For fine adjustment, use the Data Control dial. DATA CONTROL ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 13 1 Quick Introductory Guide Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb, Pan and so on, by using the ‘virtual’ sliders in the display. There are two ways to move the slider in the display: touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We suggest that you touch the display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine adjustment. Touching the display slider directly: Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value. The slider will move to the point you pressed. Also, by sliding your finger up or down while holding down the display slider, you can change the parameter value. or Slider will move to the point you touch Slider will follow your finger Using the Data Control dial: Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value, then turn the Data Control dial. Touch here to enable the parameter DATA CONTROL Blue mark To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders. DATA CONTROL 14 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide 3 LCD Display Settings Here you can change the display settings: displayed language (English or Japanese), touch panel sound, and display brightness. Selecting the Display Language ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default setting is English. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. The settings in the Utility Display are automatically saved when another display is called up. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET NOTE RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES 2 L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Press the desired button, (Japanese) or [English]. LANGUAGE ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 15 1 Muting the Touch Panel Sound ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Quick Introductory Guide The Electone is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on, giving you audio feedback when you press a button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel sound, follow the procedure below. 1 Press [UTILITY] button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the sound. TOUCH PANEL SOUND To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in Step 2. Adjusting the Display Brightness ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable, easy-to-read level. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or using the Data Control dial. Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker. DATA CONTROL LCD BRIGHTNESS 16 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide 4 Voice Display You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard, currently selected rhythm, Registration Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display. How to call up the Voice Display: The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on. To call up the Voice Display from any other display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing the [1], [2], or [3] button at the top right of the display. Voice Display [Page 1] Switching the Display Pages 1 3 2 4 5 6 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 17 1 Reference Page Quick Introductory Guide Selecting a Voice (page 23) Reference Page Selecting a rhythm (page 51) 1 Voice Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section. You can also mute specific Voice section by pressing its button (the button is grayed-out). 2 RHYTHM Shows the currently selected rhythm. 3 Reference Page Sections A.B.C. MODE Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord. Auto Bass Chord (page 62) 4 TEMPO Reference Page Adjusting the tempo (page 56) Shows the current rhythm tempo. 5 BAR/BEAT Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing. Reference Page Registration Shift (page 85) 6 REGISTRATION Shows the current position of the Registration Shift. Voice Display [Page 2] You can confirm the parameter values (for example, Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each Registration Memory simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify a specific parameter used in various Registration Memories at one time. See page 90 for the details. Voice Display [Page 3] Reference Page Registration Memory (page 80) 18 The Registrations stored to the Registration number can be copied to another Registration number for each individual section. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1 A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. Each Registration Menu button (1 – 5) includes 48 Registrations (or 60 Registrations on the ELS-01C), each specially suited for playing in a different music style. Quick Introductory Guide 5 Registration Menu NOTE Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 16. See page 80 for details. Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons. Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration Menu, see page 20. REGISTRATION MENU 1 2 2 1 Kids 2 Pops & Rock 3 Dance & Ballad 4 Jazz & Latin 5 Symphony & World 3 4 5 Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate button on the display. One display page contains 12 Registration buttons. Pressing the numbered buttons in the display changes the display pages, letting you select up to 48 Registrations from one Registration Menu button (or 60 Registrations, on the ELS-01C). Change the display pages here. The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected, and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the display. 3 Reference Page Auto Bass Chord (page 62) Play your favorite song with the selected Registration. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 19 1 Registration Menu List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Quick Introductory Guide Page 1 2 3 4 20 REGISTRATION MENU 1 KIDS REGISTRATION MENU 2 POPS & ROCK REGISTRATION MENU 3 DANCE & BALLAD REGISTRATION MENU 4 JAZZ & LATIN REGISTRATION MENU 5 SYMPHONY & WORLD Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin Sunny Pop 8 Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute&Harp Serenade Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March Synth. Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West Vienna Waltz Symphonic March 1 Rock&Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka Bluegrass 60’s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A Orchestra March*A Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B Orchestra March*B Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C Orchestra March*C Orchestra March*D Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D Pops Orchestra*A Evergreen Waltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A Pops Orchestra*B Evergreen Waltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B Pops Orchestra*C Evergreen Waltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C Pops Orchestra*D Evergreen Waltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D Kids On Stage *A 16 Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A Kids On Stage *B 16 Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B Kids On Stage *C 16 Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C Kids On Stage *D 16 Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B Majestic Sound*C Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A Orchestra Swing*A SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B Orchestra Swing*B SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C Orchestra Swing*C SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D Orchestra Swing*D 5 Bright 16 Beat *A Funk *A Hip Hop Pop *A Organ Bossa *A Orchestra 3001*A (ELS-01C) Bright 16 Beat *B Funk *B Hip Hop Pop *B Organ Bossa *B Orchestra 3001*B Bright 16 Beat *C Funk *C Hip Hop Pop *C Organ Bossa *C Orchestra 3001*C Bright 16 Beat *D Funk *D Hip Hop Pop *D Organ Bossa *D Orchestra 3001*D Movie Panther *A West Coast Rock*A Fusion Shuffle*A Afro Cuban *A Wedding Song *A Movie Panther *B West Coast Rock*B Fusion Shuffle*B Afro Cuban *B Wedding Song *B Movie Panther *C West Coast Rock*C Fusion Shuffle*C Afro Cuban *C Wedding Song *C Movie Panther *D West Coast Rock*D Fusion Shuffle*D Afro Cuban *D Wedding Song *D Powerful Swing*A 6/8 Enka *A Whole Ballad *A Midnight Jazz *A Fantasy *A Powerful Swing*B 6/8 Enka *B Whole Ballad *B Midnight Jazz *B Fantasy *B Powerful Swing*C 6/8 Enka *C Whole Ballad *C Midnight Jazz *C Fantasy *C Powerful Swing*D 6/8 Enka *D Whole Ballad *D Midnight Jazz *D Fantasy *D ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide 6 Confirming the Version of Your Electone You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. 2 Press the [GLOBAL] button at the top right of the display, then press the [Version] button in the display. The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing [OK] closes the dialog. 7 Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) All current settings including Registration Memory, User Voices, User Rhythms, and LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to external media, such as a USB flash memory. Factory Set does not reset the Internet Direct Connection settings. If you want to reset the Internet Direct Connection settings, see page 206. 1 Turn off the power. 2 While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back on. Reference Page Saving Registrations (page 111) Reference Page Initializing Internet Settings (page 206) POWER ENDING 1 3 2 3 Release the ENDING [1] button after Voice Display appears. Reference Page If you don’t want to reset the LCD Display settings, you can initialize only Registration settings. See page 85 for more information. Initializing Registration Memory (page 85) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 21 2 Voices This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections. 2 Voices Voices for the Upper Keyboard Voices for the Lower Keyboard Voices for Pedalboard Contents 1 Voices for each keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3 Selecting Voices from the User buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 28 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons. . . . . . . . . . . 23 • Selecting a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 • Changing the Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 4 Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 1 Voices for each keyboard Voices for the Upper Keyboard Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 BRILLIANCE BRILLIANT STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 MELLOW Lead Voice 1 LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE BRILLIANT VIOLIN FLUTE SYNTH TRUMPET Reference Page AWM Voices and VA Voices (page 34) 22 BRILLIANCE MAX STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 MIN VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN Lead Voice 2 LEAD VOICE 2 VOLUME BRILLIANCE MAX 1 TO LOWER MELLOW UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 VOLUME MIN VA VA ACOUSTIC VIRTUAL VA VA ELECTRONIC CUSTOM VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN 1 SOLO (KNEE) Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone. Lead Voice 2 includes additional, exclusive VA Voices which are not available in other Voice sections. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Voices for the Lower Keyboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 VOLUME BRILLIANCE MAX BRILLIANT STRINGS 2 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 MIN MELLOW Voices Lower Keyboard Voice 1 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN Voices for Pedalboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played, by default. Pedal Voice 1 PEDAL VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE Reference Page POLY (page 40) Pedal Voice 2 PEDAL VOICE 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT BRILLIANCE MAX CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS 1 CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS 1 TIMPANI SYNTH BASS TO LOWER TIMPANI SYNTH BASS TO LOWER MELLOW MIN VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 are given here. Selecting a Voice ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN Voice buttons ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 23 For example, if you have pressed the [PIANO] button, the following display (Voice Menu) will appear. 2 Voices 2 Select the desired Voice name from the Voice menu. The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more than can fit on one display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the display. The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected. 24 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Changing the Voice volume ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control. Voices 2 Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse) Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each Voice. The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine) Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or pressing the Voice name of the selected Voice in the display) calls up the Voice Condition Display. DATA CONTROL Volume slider To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume). VOLUME MAX MIN 24 20 16 12 8 4 0 24 23 NOTE Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent VOLUME button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. 12 1 0 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 25 Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected button. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the two displays. 2 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE Voices STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing [VOICE MENU] button on the display also calls up the Voice Menu. From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see page 39. If you wish to keep the panel settings you have made, save them to a USB flash memory or other external media before turning the Electone off (page 84). About the To Lower function Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each section is on. When [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section. LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE BRILLIANT ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual PEDAL VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE MAX VIOLIN SYNTH 1 CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS 1 FLUTE TRUMPET TO LOWER TIMPANI SYNTH BASS TO LOWER MELLOW 26 VOLUME MIN VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN About the Solo function The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function. Solo lets you instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard Voices. Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice 2 section. In this condition, all the Voices for Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and 2, and Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played. 2 Press the [SOLO (KNEE)] button in the Lead Voice 2 section. This sets Solo to standby status. LEAD VOICE 2 3 VA VA ACOUSTIC VIRTUAL VA VA ELECTRONIC CUSTOM BRILLIANCE Voices 1 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN 1 SOLO (KNEE) To use Solo, unfold the knee lever. (Bring it down into position.) Unfold In this condition (Solo on), only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard. (All other Voices are muted.) 4 To temporarily turn Solo off as you play, press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee. In this condition, all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except for Lead Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard. (Only Lead Voice 2 is muted.) Each time you press the Knee Lever (Solo off ) you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it (Solo on) you can play only Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard. Notes on using Solo • The knee lever can be used to control other functions, such as switching Sustain. When other functions are assigned to the knee lever, pressing knee lever turns these functions on at the same time. • Pressing the knee lever while holding down a key will not turn Solo off for that key. Solo remains active until the next key is played after pressing the knee lever. • Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are played. However, in the Solo mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played. Reference Page Knee Lever (page 188) Reference Page Voice Condition Display (page 39) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 27 3 Selecting Voices from the User buttons This Electone has a wide variety of Voices from which you can choose – far greater than what is immediately apparent from the Voice buttons on the panel. Each Voice section has one or two User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) which can be found at the right side of each Voice section. You can use the User buttons to select Voices that cannot be selected normally from the Voice buttons – such as Contrabass for the Upper Keyboard Voice. 2 Voices 1 Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN User buttons Reference Page Voice Edit (page 131) 2 Select the desired instrument category with the category buttons in the display. You can also choose the “USER” category to select a User Voice you have created. Instrument categories For example, to call up Marimba 1, select the percussion category. Reference Page Voice List (page 30) Percussion The name of the selected category (Percussion) is displayed on the upper left. The Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below. 28 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and simultaneously press the desired Voice button. 2 1. While holding down the User button… UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN Voices STRINGS VOLUME 2. Press the Voice button. 3 Select a Voice (Marimba 1, for example) from the displayed Voice Menu. Pressing number buttons in the display calls up the other Voices in the category, The Voice name of the selected Voice (Marimba 1) appears under the category name, indicating that the Voice has been selected. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 29 4 Voice List This list shows all available Voices on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu. 2 Voices ELS-01/01C STRINGS/VIOLIN Strings 1 Strings 2 Strings 3 Strings 4 Strings 5 Strings 6 1 Strings 7 Strings 8 Strings 9 Chamber Strs 1 Chamber Strs 2 Chamber Strs 3 Chamber Strs 4 Pizzicato Strs 1 Pizzicato Strs 2 2 Pizzicato Strs 3 Pizzicato Strs 4 Tremolo Strings Strings1&7 Strings2&Viola Strings3&4 3 Strings7&Violin5 Violin5&Cello Octave Strings 1 Octave Strings 2 Violin 1 Violin 2 Violin 3 Violin 4 Violin 5 4 Violin 6 Viola Cello 1 Cello 2 Pizzicato Violin CONTRABASS Contrabass 1 Contrabass 2 Contrabass 3 Contrabass 4 1 Contrabass 5 Acoustic Bass 1 Acoustic Bass 2 Pizzicato Bass 1 Pizzicato Bass 2 BRASS/TRUMPET Brass Section 1 Brass Section 2 Brass Section 3 1 Brass Section 4 Brass Section 5 Brass Section 6 30 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Trombone Sec 1 Trombone Sec 2 1 Trombone Sec 3 Trombone Sec 4 Trombone Sec 5 Brass1&Trp6 Brass2&Trp6 Horn 1&4 Octave Brass 1 Octave Brass 2 2 Octave Brass 3 Octave Brass 4 Octave Brass 5 Octave Brass 6 Octave Brass 7 Trumpet 1 Trumpet 2 Trumpet 3 Trumpet 4 Trumpet 5 Trumpet 6 3 Trumpet 7 Muted Trumpet 1 Muted Trumpet 2 Muted Trumpet 3 Flugel Horn 1 Flugel Horn 2 Trombone 1 Trombone 2 Trombone 3 4 Trombone 4 Muted Trombone 1 Muted Trombone 2 Horn 1 Horn 2 Horn 3 5 Horn 4 Horn 5 Horn 6 Muted Horn Tuba 1 Tuba 2 Euphonium 6 Brass Bass 1 Brass Bass 2 Brass Bass 3 WOODWIND/FLUTE Flute 1 Flute 2 Flute 3 1 Flute 4 Piccolo Recorder 1 Recorder 2 Ocarina Whistle Clarinet 1 Clarinet 2 2 Clarinet 3 Clarinet 4 Bass Clarinet Oboe 1 Oboe 2 Oboe 3 Oboe 4 Oboe 5 3 English Horn 1 English Horn 2 Bassoon 1 Bassoon 2 Bassoon 3 Alto Sax 1 Alto Sax 2 Tenor Sax 1 Tenor Sax 2 4 Tenor Sax 3 Soprano Sax 1 Soprano Sax 2 Baritone Sax Sax Ens 1 Sax Ens 2 Sax Ens 3 5 Woodwind Ens 1 Woodwind Ens 2 Woodwind Ens 3 Woodwind Ens 4 TUTTI Strings&Winds Strings&Brass 1 Strings&Brass 2 Strings&Horn 1 Brass&Sax 1 Brass&Sax 2 Brass&Sax 3 Brass&Winds 2 Orchestra Hit CHOIR Choir 1 Choir 2 Choir 3 Choir 4 1 Choir 5 Choir 6 Choir 7 Choir 8 Choir 9 1 2 Vocal PAD Smooth Pad 1 Smooth Pad 2 Smooth Pad 3 Smooth Pad 4 1 Smooth Pad 5 Smooth Pad 6 Smooth Pad 7 Smooth Pad 8 Resonance Pad 1 Resonance Pad 2 Resonance Pad 3 Resonance Pad 4 Resonance Pad 5 2 Resonance Pad 6 Resonance Pad 7 Resonance Pad 8 Resonance Pad 9 Resonance Pad 10 Resonance Pad 11 Bell Pad 1 Bell Pad 2 Bell Pad 3 Bell Pad 4 3 Bell Pad 5 Bell Pad 6 Bell Pad 7 Bell Pad 8 Bell Pad 9 Space Pad 1 Space Pad 2 Space Pad 3 4 Space Pad 4 Space Pad 5 Space Pad 6 Noisy Pad 1 Noisy Pad 2 5 Noisy Pad 3 Noisy Pad 4 Noisy Pad 5 SYNTH Synth Lead 1 Synth Lead 2 Synth Lead 3 Synth Lead 4 1 Synth Lead 5 Synth Lead 6 Synth Lead 7 Synth Lead 8 Pop Lead 1 2 Pop Lead 2 Pop Lead 3 Theatre Organ 8 Accordion 1 Accordion 2 2 Accordion 3 Accordion 4 Bandoneon Reed Organ Jazz Organ 1 Jazz Organ 2 Jazz Organ 3 Jazz Organ 4 3 Jazz Organ 5 Jazz Organ 6 Jazz Organ 7 Jazz Organ 8 Jazz Organ 9 Pop Organ 1 Pop Organ 2 Pop Organ 3 Pop Organ 4 4 Pop Organ 5 Rock Organ 1 Rock Organ 2 Rock Organ 3 Organ Bass 1 Organ Bass 2 5 Organ Bass 3 Organ Bass 4 PIANO Piano 1 Piano 2 Piano 3 1 Honkytonk Piano Harpsichord 1 Harpsichord 2 Clavichord DX E.Piano 1 DX E.Piano 2 DX E.Piano 3 DX E.Piano 4 Stage E.Piano 1 2 Stage E.Piano 2 Stage E.Piano 3 Stage E.Piano 4 Stage E.Piano 5 Stage E.Piano 6 Stack E.Piano 1 Stack E.Piano 2 3 Clavi 1 Clavi 2 GUITAR Nylon Guitar 1 Nylon Guitar 2 Steel Guitar 1 Steel Guitar 2 1 12Str Guitar Jazz Guitar 1 Jazz Guitar 2 Harp 1 Harp 2 1 Harp 3 Elec Guitar 1 Elec Guitar 2 Elec Guitar 3 Elec Guitar 4 2 Elec Guitar 5 Muted Guitar Distortion Gtr 1 Distortion Gtr 2 Distortion Gtr 3 Banjo 3 Mandolin Pedal Steel Gtr PERCUSSION Vibraphone 1 Vibraphone 2 Marimba 1 1 Marimba 2 Xylophone Glockenspiel 1 Glockenspiel 2 Celesta 1 Celesta 2 Music Box 1 2 Music Box 2 Chime 1 Chime 2 Chime 3 TIMPANI Timpani 1 Timpani 2 1 Timpani Roll 1 Timpani Roll 2 Timpani Roll 3 ELECTRIC BASS Fingered Bass 1 Fingered Bass 2 Fingered Bass 3 Fingered Bass 4 1 Fingered Bass 5 Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Slap Bass 3 Slap Bass 4 Picked Bass 1 Picked Bass 2 Picked Bass 3 2 Picked Bass 4 Fretless Bass 1 Fretless Bass 2 SYNTH BASS Funk Bass 1 Funk Bass 2 Funk Bass 3 Funk Bass 4 1 Funk Bass 5 Funk Bass 6 Funk Bass 7 Funk Bass 8 Funk Bass 9 1 Funk Bass 10 Dance Bass 1 Dance Bass 2 Dance Bass 3 Dance Bass 4 2 Dance Bass 5 Dance Bass 6 Dance Bass 7 Dance Bass 8 Smooth Bass 1 Smooth Bass 2 Smooth Bass 3 3 Smooth Bass 4 Smooth Bass 5 Smooth Bass 6 Smooth Bass 7 WORLD Pan Flute 1 Pan Flute 2 Bagpipe Dulcimer 1 Shakuhachi Yokobue Shamisen Koto Taishokoto Erhu 1 Erhu 2 Sheng Zheng Pipa 2 Nay Surnay Oud Sitar Kamanche Steel Drum 3 Log Drum Kalimba ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 2 Voices Pop Lead 4 Pop Lead 5 2 Pop Lead 6 Pop Lead 7 Synth Cla 1 Synth Cla 2 Synth Cla 3 Synth Cla 4 3 Synth Cla 5 Synth Cla 6 Synth Sax Synth Trumpet Synth Violin Synth Brass 1 Synth Brass 2 Synth Brass 3 Synth Brass 4 Synth Brass 5 Synth Brass 6 4 Synth Brass 7 Synth Brass 8 Synth Brass 9 Synth Brass 10 Synth Brass 11 Synth Brass 12 Synth Brass 13 Synth Strs 1 Synth Strs 2 Synth Strs 3 5 Synth Strs 4 Synth Strs 5 Synth Strs 6 Synth Strs 7 Synth Bell 1 Synth Bell 2 Synth Bell 3 Synth Bell 4 Synth Bell 5 6 Synth Bell 6 Synth Bell 7 Synth Decay 1 Synth Decay 2 Synth Decay 3 Synth Decay 4 ORGAN Pipe Organ 1 Pipe Organ 2 Pipe Organ 3 Pipe Organ 4 1 Pipe Organ 5 Harmonica 1 Harmonica 2 Harmonica 3 Theatre Organ 1 Theatre Organ 2 Theatre Organ 3 2 Theatre Organ 4 Theatre Organ 5 Theatre Organ 6 Theatre Organ 7 31 ELS-01C (VA) Voice Name VA ACOUSTIC V-Flute 1 2 Voices 2 Flute with breath and other noises, which may squeak in higher registers. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can recreate flutter tonguing. C2 – C6 C3 – C6 C3 – F5 D2 – F5 Flute suited for legato playing. Setting the User Vibrato depth to higher values has a nice effect. V-Soprano Sax A#2 – D5 Rounder and softer soprano saxophone. V-Alto Sax 1 D#2 – G4 A bright alto saxophone for contemporary music. You can make the sound ‘break up’ as if overblowing the instrument by setting After Touch to maximum and applying pressure to the key. V-Alto Sax 2 C2 – E4 Alto saxophone suited for fusion music. Playing legato creates squeaky attack sounds and high After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect. V-Tenor Sax 1 V-Tenor Sax 2 V-Breath Sax 1 V-Breath Sax 2 A#2 – C4 C1 – G4 A#2 – C4 C2 – E4 Multi-purpose tenor saxophone. Soft in pianissimo and brighter in fortissimo. V-Trumpet 1 V-Trumpet 2 V-Trumpet 3 V-Muted Trumpet V-Trombone A#2 – A#4 C2 – C5 G2 – C5 A#2 – A#4 E1 – G3 Soft trumpet. Slides and glissandos can be created with Horizontal Touch. Soft ocarina. Wider dynamic range with the Touch Tone effect. Playing pianissimo creates breath noises, while playing fortissimo creates a brighter sound with slightly lower pitch. Soft tenor saxophone suited for jazz. Playing Legato creates squeaky attack sounds. Soft, breathy tenor saxophone suited for slow tempo music. Brighter, breathy tenor saxophone suited for jazz. Trumpet with characteristic attack sound. Lip slurs can be created by changing the pitch. Soft trumpet. Applying slight keyboard pressure produces breath noise. Cup-muted trumpet. Slides and glissandos can be created with Horizontal Touch. Also, high After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect. V-High Trombone V-Shakuhachi V-Erhu V-Sitar VA VIRTUAL C2 – C5 ------- Brighter trombone suited for high notes. V-Pan Pipe 1 V-Pan Pipe 2 V-Bamboo V-Bottle V-Floboe V-Alt Kwek E2 – G5 C1 – C6 C1 – C6 C1 – C6 F2 – C7 C3 – C7 Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can result in flutter tonguing. V-Tin Whistle V-India V-East V-Zag V-Asian Pluck C2 – C7 --G1 – C5 --C1 – G6 Sound of a small flute. Playing with softer touch produces breath noise. V-Air Reed 1 A2 – C5 A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a saxophone. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect. V-Air Reed 2 V-Airphone V-Thin Reed E2 – C5 A2 – C5 E2 – G5 A hybrid sound combining a conventional flute with panpipes. V-Harmophone G1 – G5 A hybrid sound combining a harmonica and saxophone. Depending on use of Touch Tone, both breath noise and a bright clear sound can be produced. V-Saxonica G2 – G5 Harmonica sound resembling an alto saxophone. Playing with soft touch results in a high-pitched sound. V-Grass Reed E2 – G5 A hybrid sound grafting a bassoon reed onto a brass wind instrument. After Touch changes the pitch. V-Soft Reed 1 V-Soft Reed 2 V-Troppo A2 – G5 C1 – C6 E1 – C6 A hybrid sound grafting a clarinet mouthpiece to a brass wind instrument. V-Buzz String A2 – F5 Simulation of a hybrid bowed-wind instrument. V-Bow String V-String Bow E1 – E6 C1 – C6 Artificial synthesized strings sound. V-Cosmosis C1 – G5 Bowed strings. Initial Touch affects the attack sound. 1 2 3 32 Description G2 – A6 V-Flute 2 V-Ocarina V-Oboe V-Clarinet 1 Range ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Higher Touch Tone (After) setting increases breath noise and also squeaks the sound. Playing with softer touch produces hoarse sounds. Playing with harder touch squeaks the sounds. Panpipe flute sound. After and Initial Touch affect the pitch and timbre. Bamboo panpipe sound with breath noise. After Touch changes the pitch dynamically. Sound of blowing a bottle. Playing trills over a wide interval range creates a squeaky attack sound. A hybrid sound combining oboe and saxophone. A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a piccolo, with a distinctive pitch change in the low registers. Percussive sitar sound. Sitar with resonance and reverberation. Simulation of a bowed ethnic instrument. Playing legato brings out higher octave sounds. Plucked ethnic instrument. Using Initial Touch brings out higher octave sounds. A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a soprano saxophone. A hybrid sound grafting a clarinet mouthpiece onto a flute. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect. A hybrid sound grafting a bassoon reed onto a soprano saxophone; includes breath noise. Thick bassoon sound. After Touch changes the pitch dynamically, and applying keyboard pressure more produces wind noise. Simulation of a slow-attacked violin bowed with something other than a violin bow. Playing trills over a wide interval range creates a squeaky attack sound. 3 V-Waspy Horn C1 – G4 A hybrid sound grafting a brass wind instrument mouthpiece to a wind instrument. After Touch affects the muted condition. Lip-slide can be created with Horizontal Touch. V-Mizu Horn V-Cosmo Mute C1 – C6 C1 – C5 A hybrid sound combining a harmonica and trumpet. F1 – C7 Simulated deep bassoon sound. Playing with soft touch pr oduces breath noise with a high tone range. E1 – E5 E1 – E5 ----C1 – E4 C1 – C5 C1 – C5 C1 – C4 G1 – C5 Soft and warm jazz guitar sound. C2 – G5 C2 – C5 C1 – C5 Lead sound with woody quality. V-Woody Lead V-Muted Lead V-Talken Lead 3 Description Synth violin. V-Fago VA ELECTRONIC V-Jazz Guitar V-Picked Guitar V-Simple Bass V-Bass Attack V-Thumb Bass V-Fretless 1 V-Saw Lead V-Edge Lead V-Dist Lead 2 Range C1 – C6 C1 – C5 G2 – G5 C2 – G5 Simulation of a hybrid bowed-saxophone sound. A hybrid sound combining a violin and wind instrument. Simulation of a distorted brass wind instrument. After and Initial Touch affect the muted condition. Hard-attack guitar played with a pick. Voice suited for bass phrases. After and Initial touch affect the resonance effect.* Voice suited for bass phrases. Initial touch affects the muted condition.* Bass sounds played with the thumb.* Fretless bass.* Multi-purpose lead sounds. After Touch affects the filter changes. Synth bass sound with a sharp attack portion. After Touch affects the filter changes. Distorted lead sounds. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure raises the pitch. Lead sound with wah-wah effect. After Touch heightens the wah-wah effect. Human voice-like lead sound. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure allows creation of hum noise. V-Mad Tube --- Distorted synth lead with long release sound. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect.* V-Mob --- Distorted lead sound played with pick. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure raises the pitch by an octave.* V-Transylva V-Destiny V-Igneous V-Wurli Lead V-Fifty Fifty V-Ana Wave V-Lyric Off V-Ossyncro V-Wahman V-Q. Klav V-SFX 1 C1 – C6 --C1 – C4 C1 – C5 ----C1 – C6 C1 – C6 C1 – A3 C1 – G5 --- 2 A bowed instrument sound with noise. Voices Voice Name V-E.Violin V-Bowe V-Claviolin V-Air Bow Softly distorted lead sounds.* Wah guitar with a sharp attack. Lead sound with full feedback effects. After Touch affects the degree of feedback. Simple synth lead with a sharp attack. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect. Analog synthesizer with simple square wave sound. Analog synthesizer. Initial touch and the length of holding down a key changes the filter effect. Wind synth sound with square wave sound. Lead sound with dynamic pitch change.* Wah-wah lead voice with pitch change in the attack. Funky electric clav sound. Initial touch affects the timbre.* Simulated hand-tapping of the open end of a pipe. V-SFX 2 V-SFX 3 ----- Simulated scraping of a metallic plate. After Touch affects the degree of scraping. V-SFX 4 --- Soft playing results in wind sounds. Applying keyboard pressure (After Touch) produces a distorted guitar sound. V-SFX 5 V-SFX 6 V-SFX 7 V-SFX 8 V-SFX 9 V-SFX 10 V-SFX 11 V-SFX 12 V-SFX 13 ------------------- Jet noise. Applying keyboard pressure produces lead sound. V-SFX 14 V-SFX 15 ----- Lead sound with After Touch-produced pitch change. V-SFX 16 --- Cry/roar of an animal. Simulated hitting of a metallic plate with a wood block. Initial Touch changes the apparent hardness of the wood block. Simulation of metallic plates colliding. Initial touch affects the resonance effect. Cry of a strange animal. Simulation of a thick and long hose. Trumpet with loop feedback sound. Initial touch produces the sound of hitting metal, and After Touch increase the noise. Initial touch produces the sounds of footsteps, and After Touch creates a windy sound. The sound of a soprano saxophone played in the distance. Playing with softer touch produces only breath noise. Initial touch produces the sound of metal being scraped, and After Touch creates noise. Each acoustic instrument has its own ideal note range. Keep in mind that playing outside of the range may create unexpected and unrealistic sounds. Voices that do not have a specified ideal note range (“---” is shown in the chart above) can be played in any range and result in optimum sound with stable pitch. * When the Feet parameter is set to 8', the resulting sound is actually 16'. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 33 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● AWM Voices and VA Voices 2 The ELS-01C features two different types of Voices: AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) and VA (Virtual Acoustic). Voices VA Voices are available only on the Lead Voice 2 section while AWM Voices are available on all sections except Lead Voice 2. AWM is a synthesis system based on sampled waves, or audio recordings of actual instruments. AWM Voices uses multiple samples, so that they sound like a real instrument. On the other hand, VA synthesis applies sophisticated computer-based “physical modeling” technology to musical sound synthesis. VA Voices in this Electone offer many advantages in terms of musical performance, not just in terms of sound, but also in terms of the behavior that makes acoustic instruments so musical. Driver – generates physical energy Mouthpiece Embouchure Bow Pipe/strings – simulates resonation Calculates the speed of the resonated air Single-ended pipe (saxophone) Double-ended pipe (flute) Strings VA synthesis simulates the very complex vibrations, resonances, reflections and other acoustic phenomena that occur in an actual wind or string instrument. Notes on VA Voices Reference Page Voice Edit (page 131) Since the VA Voices have unique sonic characteristics and are closer in behavior to acoustic instruments than the AWM Voices, you should observe the following precautions when playing VA Voices. • Some Voices may produce unexpected or unnatural sounds when played outside (higher or lower than) the recommended note range (pages 32 and 33). • Pitch change may not be smooth on some Voices when Horizontal Touch is applied. • Portamento (Lead Slide) effects may not be smooth on some Voices. • Keep in mind that playing legato or trills may not produce any sound. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 34 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 3 Organ Flutes (ELS-01C) The ELS-01C has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices, giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There are nine flute footage settings, with three additional footage settings for the attack sound. Organ Flutes (ELS-01C) 1 3 Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER). The lamp above the button lights and the Flute Footage Levers appear on the display. On the ELS-01, [U. ORGAN FLUTES] and [L. ORGAN FLUTES] buttons are not active (Organ Flutes does not function). FOOTAGE Page DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES 2 Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice. Selecting [SINE] button produces a clean, clear sound and selecting [VINTAGE] produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound. 3 Adjust flute footage settings (over a range of 0 – 8). The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display. The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the keyboard and listen to the changes in the sound as you adjust the footage levels. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 35 4 Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in the upper right on the display to adjust the volume. ATTACK/VOLUME Page 3 Organ Flutes (ELS-01C) 1 1 2 3 4 5 ATTACK Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice. Footage settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'. The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the attack sound. 2 RESP. (Response) Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response. Moving the lever downward makes the keyboard response slower, creating a pipe organ effect. 3 MODE Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound. This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices. FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All other notes played while the first is held have no attack. EACH: All notes played have an attack sound. 4 Reference Page Reverb (page 43) REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. 5 VOLUME Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice. The volume balance of the individual footages is maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute sound. 36 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 Press the [EFFECT] button at the top right of the display for the Rotary Speaker settings. EFFECT Page 1 Organ Flutes (ELS-01C) 3 2 6 EFFECT TYPE Reference Pages Selects the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Press the EFFECT TYPE button to calls up a list of the effect types. Select the desired type from the list. To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button. Effect List (page 50) Rotary Speaker (page 48) Select the desired effect type 2 Effect Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type. 6 Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER) to cancel the Organ Flute function (the lamp above the button turns off). ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 37 4 Voice Controls and Effects The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound. However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital. The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system. 4 Controls and Effects Selecting from the panel Selecting from the Voice Condition display Voice Controls and Effects Reference page for changing the settings Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Organ Flute Voice Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Lead Voice 1, 2 Lower Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Organ Flute Voice Pedalboard Pedalboard Voice 1, 2 Pan page 39 O — O O — O Touch Tone page 39 O — O O — O Pitch page 40 O — O O — O Feet page 40 O — O O — O Reverb (send level) page 40 O O O O O O Volume page 40 O O O O O O Priority* page 40 — — O* — — — Poly (Pedal polyphonic mode) page 40 — — — — — O Vibrato page 41 O — O O — O Touch Vibrato page 41 O — O O — O Lead Slide page 42 O — O — — — Transpose page 42 O — O O — O Tune page 42 O — O O — O Effect (1/2) page 42 O (Rotary Speaker only) O O (Rotary Speaker only) Reverb page 43 Sustain page 47 Brilliance page 47 Rotary Speaker page 48 O O O O O O — — O O O O — O O * Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2. Contents 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2 Selecting from the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3 Effect List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 38 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again (or press the name of the selected Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display appears. Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing [1] – [4] buttons at the top right of the display. Voice Condition [Page 1] 4 1 2 3 2-1 2-2 3-1 3-2 2 4 5 6 7 2-1 2-2 3 3-2 4 5 6 Voice Controls and Effects 1 8 In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch tone and volume. The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their functions. 1 PAN Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. 2 TOUCH TONE The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a Voice. All Voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments. Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch. 2 -1 INITIAL touch Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 2 -2 AFTER touch NOTE Initial Touch may not be effective on some organ Voices. NOTE Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 On the ELS-01, After Touch is not applied to the Pedal Voices. NOTE After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices (such as piano or vibraphone), percussion sounds, or some organ Voices. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 39 3 PITCH Controls pitch according to the play style of Horizontal Touch or After Touch. On some Voices in the Lead Voice 2 section, not only pitch but also timbre may be affected. 3 -1 HORIZONTAL touch (ELS-01C) NOTE Controls the pitch by holding down the key and moving it laterally (wiggling your finger from side to side). The faster you move the key laterally, the faster and greater the pitch change becomes, within a range of +/- one octave. You can use this function in combination with Touch Tone described above to add expressiveness to your performance. Higher settings result in a wider pitch change. The minimum setting produces no effect. This function is not available on the Pedalboard. Range: 0 – 14 Parameters that are available only on the ELS-01C are indicated by a dark frame and background in their display controls. 4 Voice Controls and Effects 3 -2 AFTER touch Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The minimum setting produces no effect at all. Higher (positive) settings make the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower (negative) settings make the pitch lower. The setting of +14 or -14 results in the widest pitch change. Range: -14 – +14 4 FEET Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is the original (factory) setting. 5 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. See page 43 for details. 6 VOLUME Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 25 for more information. 7 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2) Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top. LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. When the Solo mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to Last mode, regardless of the setting made here. Reference Page Solo function (page 27) 8 POLY (only for Pedal Voices) Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off. Setting POLY to on switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes it possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways, such as playing legato or playing intervals and chords. Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony: 14 notes for all sections, Upper, Lower and Pedal. 40 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Voice Condition [Page 2] 1 1 -1 3 1-2 1-3 1-4 2 3-1 3-2 4 4 5 1 Voice Controls and Effects The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other sections. SLIDE (3) only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2. VIBRATO The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected. Selecting PRESET calls up the original (factory) vibrato settings for the Voice. When PRESET is selected, DELAY, DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot be edited. Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself. Vibrato Control Speed Delay Depth 1 - 1 PRESET/USER 1 - 2 DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset. Range: 0 – 14 1 - 3 DEPTH Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect. Range: 0 – 14 1 - 4 SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the vibrato. Range: 0 – 14 2 TOUCH VIBRATO Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys. NOTE Touch Vibrato is not applied to the Pedal Voices of the ELS-01. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 41 3 Reference Page Controlling Lead Slide (with Knee Lever); (page 190) SLIDE (only for Lead Voices) Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes beyond a one-octave range. 3 - 1 ON/KNEE/OFF On/Off switch and knee lever selector for the Slide effect. 3 - 2 TIME Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. Higher settings makes the slide speed slower. Range: 0 – 14 4 Reference Page Voice Controls and Effects Transpose (for entire instrument); (page 193) 4 Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range is from -6 to +6. 5 Reference Page Pitch (for entire instrument); (page 193) TRANSPOSE TUNE Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice section, producing a richer sound. Each step represents a 1-cent change in pitch. Range: -64 – +63 Voice Condition [Page 3, 4] 2 1 3 You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays. Both displays have the same contents. You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays (Voice Condition Pages 3 and 4). 1 Reference Page Effect List (page 50) 42 EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4) Selects the effect category. Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect category list. Select the desired effect category from the list. To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory) effect category for the selected Voice is automatically set. Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added to the selected Voice). Voice Controls and Effects 2 TYPE 4 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4) Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the effect type list, corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the desired effect type from the list. To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button. If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect type cannot be edited. After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected effect type. 3 Effect Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type. 2 Selecting from the panel The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the panel. Reverb ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections, or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately. To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages: REVERB MAX Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display appears. The Reverb display consists of four pages. MIN ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 43 REVERB [Page 1] 4 DEPTH: Voice Controls and Effects NOTE Depending on the reverb depth value (set by the slider), two adjacent REVERB button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB buttons let you make coarse adjustment in seven settings to the reverb depth while the slider gives you fine control. When this parameter or the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the settings in the pages that follow have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 REVERB [Page 2] 1 Reference Page Effect List (page 50) 44 2 3 1 TYPE Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice. Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Press the number buttons to change the display pages. 4 Voice Controls and Effects The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on one display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display. Select the desired reverb type from the list. To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button. After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type. 2 TIME Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice. Higher settings increase the reverberance. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 3 ORGAN (only for the ELS-01C) Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. This parameter corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the Organ Flute display. On the ELS-01, this slider is not displayed. Range: 0 – 24 Reference Page Organ Flutes (page 35) REVERB [Page 3] Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section. Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the respective Voices. Range: 0 – 24 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 45 REVERB [Page 4] 4 1 Voice Controls and Effects Reference Page Connecting a Microphone or Guitar (page 214) 2 3 4 1 TYPE Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone signal. 2 TIME Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone signal. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 3 Reference Pages Changing the rhythm reverb (page 57) Keyboard Percussion (page 65) RHYTHM Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm (with PERCUSSION slider) and accompaniment (with ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display. Range: 0 – 24 4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. Range: 0 – 24 46 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Sustain ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The sustain effect, selectable for each Voice section, causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control. The Knee Lever can also be used to switch the sustain on/off. Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead Voices. To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain Length page: Reference Page Knee Lever (page 188) SUSTAIN UPPER (KNEE) The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the button again to turn sustain off and the lamp turns off. When the lamp is off, sustain does not affect the corresponding keyboard. Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are on or off before you start to play. LOWER (KNEE) 4 PEDAL SUSTAIN LENGTH Display Voice Controls and Effects Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain. The Sustain Length display appears. NOTE If you change the Voice when the sustain length is set to HOLD and the keys are released, the Voice only changes after you play another key. NOTE When the sustain length is set to HOLD, previously played note(s) may be cut off by subsequently played notes. To adjust the sustain length value, use the display slider. If you set the highest value (HOLD), some Voices such as organ or synth will sound continuously even when the keys are released. Range: 0 – 12, HOLD NOTE The minimum setting results in no sustain. Turning sustain off automatically resets the sustain length to be the default setting. Brilliance ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Adjustment of the Voice tone, brighter or mellower. Press the BRILLIANCE buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired brilliance for each Voice. The buttons have seven brilliance settings. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 47 Rotary Speaker ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect. The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front panel button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). The Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. The following procedure is needed to use the Rotary Speaker effect. 1 4 Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice. When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section, you can select the effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4. See page 42 for details. Voice Controls and Effects Select “Rotary Speaker” here. When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice, select the effect type in the EFFECT Page. See page 37 for details. Select an effect type other than [OFF]. 2 48 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker. Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections. ROTARY SPEAKER Display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES 1 1 4 2 Voice Controls and Effects U.ORGAN FLUTES SPEED Determines the speed of the speaker rotation. Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz 2 MODE Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW] is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel. If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button on the panel. Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch. 3 Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left Footswitch. You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel but also the Left Footswitch, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned. See page 188 for details. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 49 3 Effect List XG CHORUS 3 DUAL ROTSP 1 AT WAH+ODRV HALL 1 XG CHORUS 4 DUAL ROTSP 2 XG AT WAH+OD HALL 2 GM CHORUS 1 DIST+ROT SP TC WAH+DIST HALL 3 GM CHORUS 2 ODRV+ROT SP XG TC WH+DST HALL M GM CHORUS 3 AMP+ROT SP TC WAH+ODRV HALL L GM CHORUS 4 DIST+2ROT SP XG TC WAH+OD ROOM 1 FB CHORUS ODRV+2ROT SP CLAVI TC WAH ROOM 2 CELESTE 1 AMP+2ROT SP EP TOUCH WAH ROOM 3 CELESTE 2 ROOM 4 CELESTE 3 DIST HARD 1 WAH+OD+T DLY ROOM S CELESTE 4 DIST HARD 2 WAH+DIST+DLY ROOM M SYMPHONIC DIST SOFT 1 XG WH+DST+DL ROOM L XG SYMPHONIC DIST SOFT 2 WAH+ODRV+DLY STAGE 1 ENS DETUNE ST DIST HARD XG WH+OD+DLY REVERB 4 Voice Controls and Effects 1 STAGE 2 DYNAMIC FLANGER 1 OVERDRIVE M BAND COMP PLATE 2 FLANGER 2 ST OVERDRIVE COMPRESSOR WHITE ROOM XG FLANGER 1 XG DIST NOISE GATE TUNNEL XG FLANGER 2 XG ST DIST CANYON XG FLANGER 3 V_DIST HARD ST 2BAND EQ BASEMENT GM FLANGER V_DIST SOFT ST 3BAND EQ XG HALL 1 V_FLANGER COMP+DIST XG 3BAND EQ XG HALL 2 TEMP FLANGER XG CMP+DIST EQ DISCO XG ROOM 1 DYNA FLANGER AMP SIM EQ TEL XG AMP SIM HM ENHANCER XG HM ENHNCE PHASER EQ/ENHANCER XG ROOM 3 PHASER 1 ST AMP SIM 1 XG STAGE 1 PHASER 2 ST AMP SIM 2 XG STAGE 2 EP PHASER 1 XG ST AMP XG PLATE EP PHASER 2 GM PLATE EP PHASER 3 DIST+DELAY TEMPO PHASER ODRV+DELAY DYNA PHASER XG DIST+DLY AMBIENCE TREMOLO/AUTO PAN XG ODRV+DLY IMPULSE EXP DELAY LR TREMOLO 1 CMP+DIST+DLY RESONATOR ECHO TREMOLO 2 CMP+ODRV+DLY VOICE CANCEL CROSS DELAY XG TREMOLO XG CMP+DT+DL TALKING MOD TEMPO DELAY EP TREMOLO XG CMP+OD+DL LO-FI TEMPO ECHO GT TREMOLO 1 V_DIST H+DLY DYNA FILTER TEMPO CROSS GT TREMOLO 2 V_DIST S+DLY DYNA RINGMOD ORGAN TREMOLO DIST+T DLY RING MOD ER 1 AUTO PAN ODRV+T DLY ER 2 XG AT PAN 1 CMP+DST+TDLY GATE REVERB XG AT PAN 2 CMP+OD+TDLY REVERS GATE EP AUTO PAN V_DST H+TDLY DELAY DELAY LCR XG DLY LCR ER/KARAOKE DISTORTION+ KARAOKE 1 ROTARY SPEAKER KARAOKE 2 XG ROTARY SP KARAOKE 3 ROTARY SP 1 AUTO WAH ROTARY SP 2 XG AUTO WAH CHORUS 1 ROTARY SP 3 TOUCH WAH 1 CHORUS 2 ROTARY SP 4 TOUCH WAH 2 XG CHORUS 1 ROTARY SP 5 AT WAH+DIST XG CHORUS 2 2WAY ROT SP XG AT WH+DST CHORUS 50 ST DIST SOFT WAH+DST+TDLY PLATE 1 XG ROOM 2 2 FLANGER DISTORTION ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual V_DST S+TDLY WAH PITCH CHANGE PITCH CHANGE XG PCH CHG 1 XG PCH CHG 2 MISCELLANEOUS ISOLATOR THRU THRU 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion This Electone features 274 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 RHYTHM VOLUME MAX MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN TEMPO BAR / BEAT TEMPO INTRO 1 2 3 2 START A B RHYTHM CONTROL ENDING 1 SYNCHRO START 3 BREAK MAIN / FILL IN C D 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Contents 5 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) 62 6 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 7 Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 • Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 • Preset Keyboard Percussion List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 • Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . 70 • Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 • Detailed settings for each percussion instrument. . . . . . . . . . . 74 • Kit Assign List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons . . . . . . . . 51 • Selecting a rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 • Operating the rhythm from the panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 • Changing the rhythm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 • Adjusting the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 • Changing the rhythm reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons . . . . . . . . . . 58 3 Rhythm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 4 Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the front panel. Selecting a rhythm ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example. 1 Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the front panel (for example, the [POPS] button). RHYTHM VOLUME MAX SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN Rhythm buttons The relevant Rhythm Menu is displayed. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 51 2 5 Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu. The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms, more than can fit on the display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the display. The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Rhythm Structure Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back. INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. INTRO 1 2 3 Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures repeats indefinitely. MAIN / FILL IN A B C D Selected Main section’s lamp is lit 52 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual FILL IN This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section. MAIN / FILL IN A B C D Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. START SYNCHRO START 5 BREAK Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the rhythm automatically stops. ENDING 1 2 3 Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit Operating the rhythm from the panel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest and “spice” to your performance. To start/stop the rhythm: START The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the button again. SYNCHRO START START SYNCHRO START The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When the A.B.C. mode is set to OFF, pressing the [SYNCHRO START] button again stops the rhythm. When the A.B.C. mode is set to something other than OFF, releasing the key from the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard stops the rhythm. SYNCHRO START START Reference Page Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) (page 62) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 53 INTRO Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm. NOTE When an Intro or Ending pattern is playing, the Lower Keyboard cannot be played. While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears: 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main section will first call up the fill in pattern, then the Ending 1 pattern. 1 2 3 BAR / BEAT TEMPO ENDING Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm. NOTE INTRO ENDING 1 2 3 When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing. To switch the rhythm sections: You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/ FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit. MAIN / FILL IN A B C D To use the Fill In patterns: NOTE You can record the currently selected section to Registration Memory. However, you cannot record the on/off status of the Auto Fill In function. As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/ FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes. When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display. Pressing the selected Rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display. When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. 54 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual To use the Break patterns: As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK] button. START SYNCHRO START BREAK Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the Footswitch. See page 186 for details. Changing the rhythm volume ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Using VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse): Press one of the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to set the desired level. The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. RHYTHM VOLUME MAX SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine): Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display. DATA CONTROL To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume). NOTE Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent VOLUME button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 55 Adjusting the tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Turn the TEMPO dial clockwise to increase the tempo, and counter-clockwise to decrease it. Decreasing the tempo TEMPO Increasing the tempo TEMPO Indicator BAR / BEAT TEMPO TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per minute. The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute. 5 When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/ BEAT indicator. BAR/BEAT Indicator Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion BAR / BEAT TEMPO Bar (measure) Beat On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar. Reference Page You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in the Voice Display. In the Voice Display, both Tempo and Bar/Beat can be seen in one display. Voice Display (page 17) DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES 56 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press [PRESET TEMPO] button in the display to restore the tempo to the original setting. 5 Changing the rhythm reverb You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page Reverb (page 43) DATA CONTROL When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 57 2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that you have created with the Rhythm Pattern Program function. This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others from the User buttons. 1 Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons. RHYTHM VOLUME MAX 5 SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN User buttons Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The Rhythm Menu appears in the display. Reference Page 2 Rhythm Pattern Program (page 144) Select the desired rhythm category with the category buttons in the display. You can also choose the “User” category to select a User rhythm you have created. The currently selected rhythm category appears at the top left of the display. The rhythm name shown below the category name is that of the currently assigned rhythm and is irrelevant to the rhythm category. Currently selected rhythm category Currently selected rhythm name 3 58 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Select a rhythm from the displayed Rhythm Menu. Pressing the number buttons in the display calls up the other rhythms in the category. 3 Rhythm List This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu. Fast Jazz Combo Swing Cool Combo Light Swing 2 Afro Cuban 1 Afro Cuban 2 Bebop Five-Four Jazz Ballad 1 Jazz Ballad 2 Movie Swing Piano Trio Midnight Swing 3 Slow Jazz Moonlight 1 Moonlight 2 Winter Song 1 Winter Song 2 Foxtrot Slowfox Quickstep Dixieland 1 4 Dixieland 2 Dixieland Jazz Ragtime Charleston Guitar Swing POPS 8Beat Light 1 8Beat Light 2 8Beat Light 3 8Beat Light 4 Folk Rock 1 Folk Rock 2 1 60’s 8Beat Asian Pops Unplugged 1 Unplugged 2 Unplugged 3 8Beat Adria Bubblegum Pop 70’s 8Beat Tijuana SingerSongWriter 2 Surfin’ 8Beat Finger Pickin’ Heart Beat Guitar Pop 2 British 16Beat 16Beat 1 16Beat 2 16Beat 3 16Beat 4 3 Fusion Shuffle 1 Fusion Shuffle 2 Jazz Pop 16Beat Shuffle 1 16Beat Shuffle 2 Pop Shuffle Eurovision Pop British Pop 4 Sing Along Simple Shuffle 1 Simple Shuffle 2 Simple Shuffle 3 R&B Blues Rock Motor City Soul 1 Soul 2 16Beat Soul Frankly Soul 1 Gospel Funk Jazz Funk Funk Beat 1 Funk Beat 2 Detroit Pop 1 Detroit Pop 2 New R&B Modern R&B New Gospel Cool Blues Gospel Shuffle 2 Gospel Sisters Amazing Gospel 6/8 Blues Slow Blues 6/8 Soul Blues Shuffle LATIN Samba Big Band Samba Light Samba 1 1 Light Samba 2 Pop Samba 1 Pop Samba 2 Bossa Nova 1 Bossa Nova 2 1 Bossa Nova 3 Pop Bossa Mambo 1 Mambo 2 Salsa 1 Salsa 2 2 Montuno Calypso Cha Cha Cha Big Band Cha Cha Pop Cha Cha Rumba Pop Rumba Fast Rumba Guitar Rumba Beguine 1 3 Beguine 2 Cuban Bolero Tango 1 Tango 2 Tango Orchestra Tango Milonga WORLD MUSIC Bolero Flamenco Pop Flamenco Pasodoble Polka 1 1 Polka 2 Banda Polka Irish Dance Tarantella Sirtaki Enka Reggae Happy Reggae Sheriff Reggae Shuffle Reggae Bluegrass 1 Bluegrass 2 2 Hoedown Country 2/4 Country Shuffle Country Band Hawaiian Mexican Dance ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion MARCH Marching Band 1 Marching Band 2 Marching Band 3 Alpine March 6/8 March 1 6/8 March 2 1 6/8 Kids 6/8 Organ March Broadway SF March Wild West Baroque WALTZ Vienna Waltz Orchestra Waltz Simple Waltz Gentle Waltz Guitar Serenade 1 Snow Waltz Classic Waltz Mariachi Alpine Waltz Musette Jazz Waltz 1 Jazz Waltz 2 Jazz Waltz 3 2 Jazz Waltz 4 Modern Waltz Pop Waltz Country Waltz SWING&JAZZ Big Band 1 Big Band 2 Big Band 3 Big Band 4 Big Band 5 Big Band 6 1 Big Band 7 Big Band Bop Orch. Big Band Orchestra Swing Movie Panther Jungle Drum Jazz Club Simple Swing 2 Acoustic Jazz Medium Jazz 59 BALLAD Power Ballad Dramatic Ballad Movie Ballad 1 Movie Ballad 2 Secret Service Carpenters Pop 1 Romantic Ballad Love Song 16Beat Ballad 1 16Beat Ballad 2 16Beat Ballad 3 Easy Ballad Guitar Ballad 1 Guitar Ballad 2 Guitar Ballad 3 Organ Ballad Chart Ballad 2 Analog Ballad Pop Ballad 8Beat Modern Chillout Slow&Easy 6/8 Slow Rock 1 6/8 Slow Rock 2 6/8 Orchestra 1 3 6/8 Orchestra 2 6/8 Ballad Acoustic Ballad ROCK Power Rock Southern Rock 60’s Rock 1 60’s Rock 2 Hard Rock 1 Hard Rock 2 1 Rock Shuffle 1 Rock Shuffle 2 Tears Rock 1 Tears Rock 2 Soft Rock British Rock Country Rock 1 Country Rock 2 New Country Cowboy Rock Rock&Roll 1 2 Rock&Roll 2 Skiffle Caribbean Rock R&R Shuffle Jive Boogie Woogie 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 60 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual DANCE Ibiza 1 Ibiza 2 Euro Trance Disco Teens Techno Party 1 Club Dance Dream Dance Club House UK Pop US Disco Swing House US Pop US Hip Hop Classic Hip Hop Trip Hop Chart Pop 2 Ground Beat Hip Hop Groove Hip Hop Pop Hip Hop Light Euro Hip Hop Latin DJ’s Club Latin Latin Disco 1 Latin Disco 2 Garage 3 6/8 Trance 80’s Dance Pop Beat 1 Pop Beat 2 Funky Dance Disco Philly 1 Disco Philly 2 70’s Disco 1 4 70’s Disco 2 Disco Funk Disco Chocolate Dance Pop Certain rhythms created for use with slow, soft Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the Table 1: not have drum sections. To use beginning, may these rhythms, refer to the following information. Some sections of the following nine rhythms are configured with accompaniment only; they do not • contain any drum or percussion. Category Rhythm Section 6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B Baroque All sections except Intro 1 Simple Waltz Ending 1 Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1 Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A Hoedown Ending 1 Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A ROCK R&R Shuffle Ending 1 MARCH WALTZ WORLD MUSIC Some sections of the following five rhythms do not contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass part will not sound. • • • • • Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category Unplugged 1 in the POPS category Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category New Country in the ROCK category 4 Accompaniment The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments when rhythms are used. Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition display. 1 Press any one of the RHYTHM buttons once. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Accompaniment parts At the bottom of the display, there are seven part buttons, such as Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, and so on. These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts. 2 Turn the desired parts on. The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding button in the display. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound. CHORD 1/CHORD 2: These are the rhythmic chord backing parts. PAD: This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings and organ. PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2: These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section. Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 61 3 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment. Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm Condition display. The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompaniment volume and reverb. Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial to adjust the volume/reverb. DATA CONTROL 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Automatic Accompaniment 5 – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) Reference Page POLY (page 40) The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns. Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass pattern of the A.B.C. will not sound. To set the A.B.C. function: Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button. A.B.C./M.O.C. Display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES 1 2 The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The A.B.C. section is at the left half of this display. 62 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual A.B.C. MODE OFF: Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function. SINGLE FINGER: The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard. Key of C C Major chords: Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s name). Cm Minor chords: 5 Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it. C7 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it. Cm7 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 Minor 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it. Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. FINGERED CHORD: The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the basis of the previously played chord. Key of C C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7 Cm maj7 Caug Cdim Cdim7 Csus4 C7sus4 Cm7-5 C6 Cm6 NOTE When playing certain chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6), make sure to play the root of the chord as the lowest note in that chord. Cadd9 Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. CUSTOM A.B.C.: The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 63 2 MEMORY LOWER: When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm plays. PEDAL: When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays. (In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 6 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played. Melody On Chord can also be controlled with the Knee Lever. To set the M.O.C. function: Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button. A.B.C./M.O.C. Display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES 1 2 The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The M.O.C. section is at the right half of this display. 1 M.O.C. MODE OFF: Cancels the Melody On Chord function. Mode 1: Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played. 64 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Mode 2: Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played. Mode 3: Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody played. 2 KNEE On/off switch for Knee Lever control over Melody On Chord operation. To use the Melody On Chord function with Knee Lever control, first switch the Knee setting to ON, then select one of the three modes (described above). When the control is on, pressing the Knee Lever to the right activates the Melody On Chord function. Reference Page Controlling Melody On Chord (with Knee Lever); (page 189) Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 7 Keyboard Percussion The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of drum and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish. Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] or [2] button. The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) Display appears. NOTE In the Voice Display, each Voice section can be muted (page 18). KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 1 2 NOTE Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the Pedalboard. Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [1] and [2], can be played at the same time by setting both buttons to on. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 65 NOTE Percussion Kit selection is common for the Keyboard Percussion function. For example, if you select “Standard Kit 1” for Preset 1 of the Keyboard Percussion, the kit for Preset 2 and User 1-8 will also be changed to “Standard Kit 1.” 3 5 Select the desired percussion kit. As a default, EL Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit from a total of 16 different kits. Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up the Percussion Kit List. Choose the desired Kit from the list. To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard Percussion List on page 67. The message “Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data?” may appear when you change the kit. Select [CLEAR] to clear all assignments (made in the ASSIGN Page) and detailed settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected kit without erasing the assignments and detailed settings. 4 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the reverb and volume settings. DATA CONTROL The settings here determine the reverb/volume for the entire Keyboard Percussion setup, not for each percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume (page 74). 5 66 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard. Preset Keyboard Percussion List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Standard Kit 1* Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Bass Drum Heavy - Kick - SD Brush Roll - Side Stick Surdo Mute Snare Drum Heavy - Snare Surdo Open SD Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap Hi Q SD Reverb 1 - Snare Tight Whip Slap Snare Drum Light - Floor Tom L Scratch H Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise Hi-Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell B1 Hi-Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L C2 Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - Mid Tom H Seq Click H - Synth Tom 3 SD Brush Roll - Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap - Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - High Tom Brush Swirl - Synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 - Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap - Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 - Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl - - Snare Drum Light - Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll - Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 - Tambourine Castanet - - Snare Drum Rim 1 - Splash Cymbal Snare Soft - Tom 2 - Sticks - Hi-Hat Close - Kick Soft - Tom 1 - Open Rim Shot - B2 Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight - C3 Ride Cymbal 1 - Kick Bongo H Orch Snare Drum - Side Stick Bongo L Crash Cymbal 1 - Snare Conga H Mute Snare Drum Roll - Hand Clap Conga H Open E3 Orchestra Cymbal - Snare Tight Conga L F3 Orch Cymbal Roll - Floor Tom L Timbale H Triangle Mute - Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L Tambourine - Floor Tom H Agogo H Triangle Open - Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L Castanet - Low Tom Cabasa Cowbell 1 - Hi-Hat Open Maracas B3 Timbale 1 Low - Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H C4 Timbale 1 High - Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L Wood Block Low - Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short Conga Low - High Tom Guiro Long Wood Block High - Ride Cymbal 1 Claves E4 Conga High - Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H F4 Bongo Low - Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Agogo Low - Tambourine Cuica Mute Bongo High - Splash Cymbal Cuica Open Agogo High - Cowbell Triangle Mute Cuica Low - Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Hand Claps - Vibraslap Shaker Cuica High - Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Shaker - - Bell Tree C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 - - D5 D5 - E5 F5 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion EL Kit Preset 2 (PK) F5 - G5 G5 - A5 A5 - B5 - C6 : Indicates the keys of the ELS-01/01C keyboard. *The 10 kits, Standard Kit 2 – Symphony Kit, have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 67 SFX Kit 1 Preset 2 (PK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) - Phone Call - Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak - - - Door Slam - String Slap - Scratch Cut - E1 - - Scratch H 3 - F1 - - Wind Chime - - - Telephone Ring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Flute Key Click - - CarEngnIgnition - - - - - Car Tires Squeal - - - - - Car Passing - - - - - Car Crash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call Burst Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak Roller Coaster - - Door Slam Submarine String Slap - Scratch Cut - - - Scratch H 3 - - - Wind Chime - - - Telephone Ring - - - - - - Shower - Laugh - Thunder - Scream - Wind - Punch - Stream - Heart Beat - Bubble - Foot Steps - Feed - - - - - - - - - - Flute Key Click - CarEngnIgnition - - - Car Tires Squeal - - - Car Passing - - - Car Crash - - - Siren - - - Train - - - Jet Plane - - - Starship - - Dog - Machine Gun C1 D1 D1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 G2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion G2 A2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 B3 C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 Horse Laser Gun Bird Tweet Explosion - Firework - - - - Ghost - Maou - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 68 Preset 1 (UK) Cutting Noise 1 C1 5 SFX Kit 2 Preset 1 (LK) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Pop Latin Kit Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Kick Soft - Bongo H Open 1 f - Side Stick - Bongo H Open 3 f - Snare Soft - Bongo H Rim - Arabic Hand Clap - Bongo H Tip - E1 Snare Drum - Bongo H Heel - F1 Floor Tom L - Bongo H Slap - Hi-Hat Closed - Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap Floor Tom H - Bongo L Open 3 f - Hi-Hat Pedal - Bongo L Rim - Low Tom - Bongo L Tip - Hi-Hat Open - Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip Mid Tom L - Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom - Timbale L Open Conga H Open - Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa - - Conga H Mute - High Tom Nakarazan Edge - - Conga H SlapOpen - Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom - - Conga H Slap - Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge - - Conga H SlapMute - Duhulla Dom Bongo H - Paila L Conga L Tip - Tambourine Bongo L - Timbale H Open Conga L Heel - Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute - - Conga L Open - Conga H Open - Conga L Mute - Conga L - Conga L SlapOpen - Zagrouda H - Conga L Slap - Zagrouda L - Conga L Slide - Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f - Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim - Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip - Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short Floor Tom L Tabla Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long Hi-Hat Closed Tabla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f - Floor Tom H Tabla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f - Hi-Hat Pedal Tabla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine Low Tom Tabla Sak Bongo L Tip - Hi-Hat Open Tabla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel - Mid Tom L Tabla Flam Bongo L Slap - Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom - Shaker High Tom Sagat 3 - Cabasa Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak - Cuica Mute Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 - Cuica Open Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L - Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open - Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 - - Cowbell Rik Tak 1 - - Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 - Triangle Mute Claves Rik BrassTremolo - Triangle Open Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H - - Rik Tik - Wind Chime C1 C1 D1 D1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 B3 C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Arabic Kit Preset 2(PK) 69 Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] or [2] buttons. In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Reference Page 1 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button. The K.B.P. display appears. 2 Press [USER 1] on the display. This procedure assigns User 1 to the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button. You can call up the User 1 setting the next time you press the [1] button. 3 4 Select the desired percussion kit. See page 66 for selecting the kit. 5 Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to a key. Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the display. The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears. Kit Assign List (page 76) Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top right of the display to call up the ASSIGN Page. In the ASSIGN Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys. Drum Instrument Category Drum Instrument Menu 70 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 6 Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the display and pressing the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The key to which the instrument is to be assigned Instrument Name NOTE Though eight User Keyboard Percussion setups can be created, they cannot be memorized to Registration Memory. Only on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration Memory. 5 Press the key. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Hold down the Instrument name… When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is displayed at the top of the display. The assignments are saved to the User memory selected in Step 2 (in this example, User 1). 7 Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your own User Keyboard Percussion set. To erase one instrument: Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page) and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 71 To erase all instruments: You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page). 1 Press, then release the [CLEAR] button. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all data. When [CLEAR] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the display. Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the operation. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations, or copy from one User location to another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to User 1. 72 1 Press the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button to copy Preset 1. To copy Preset 1, select the [1] button; to copy Preset 2, select the [2] button. To copy either User location, select button [1] or [2]. 2 Within the Menu buttons, select the User location as the destination — for example, User 1. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Press the COPY [FROM] button in the display. A list appears, letting you select the copy source location. 4 Select the copy source (Preset 1 here) from the list. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 5 Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy Preset 1. When [COPY] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears in the display. Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 3 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 73 Detailed settings for each percussion instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each instrument. The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to Registration memory. 5 1 Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard (the keyboard to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). 2 Press the [SETUP] button at the top right of the K.B.P. display to call up the SETUP Page. 3 Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its settings. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The name of the selected instrument 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. 2 PITCH COARSE Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by 100 cents. Range: -64 – +63 3 PITCH FINE Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE (2). Range: -64 – +63 4 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 24 5 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 24 74 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 6 RESET Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their default values. Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following display, prompting confirmation of the operation. 5 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore (initialize) the default settings. When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message momentarily appears on the display. Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation. 75 Kit Assign List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EL Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Roll Orch Cymbal Mute Cymbal March Cym Brush Shot Tam-Tam HI-HAT Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Close Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Analog HH Open Analog HH Close SNARE DRUM Snare Drum Light Snare Drum Heavy Snare Drum Rim 1 Snare Drum Rim 2 SD Accent 1 SD Accent 2 SD Reverb 1 SD Reverb 2 Synth Snare Drum Orch Snare Drum Snare Drum Roll Analog SD SNARE BRUSH SD Brush Shot 1 SD Brush Shot 2 SD Brush Roll TOM Tom 1 Tom 2 Tom 3 Tom 4 Tom Brush Shot 1 Tom Brush Shot 2 Tom Brush Shot 3 Tom Brush Shot 4 Synth Tom 1 Synth Tom 2 Synth Tom 3 BASS DRUM Bass Drum Light Bass Drum Heavy Bass Drum Attack Synth Bass Drum Bass Drum March Concert BD Analog BD Short Analog BD Long CONGA/BONGO Conga High Conga Low Conga Slap Conga Muff Conga Slide Bongo High Bongo Low Bongo Slap Bongo Mute CUICA/SURDO Cuica High Cuica Middle Cuica Low Tamborim Open Tamborim Mute Surdo Open Surdo Mute Surdo Rim Surdo Muff TIMBALES/COWBELL Timbale 1 High 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 76 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Timbale 1 Low Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 Low Timbale 3 High Timbale 3 Low Timbale 4 High Timbale 4 Low Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Cowbell 4 PERCUSSION 1 Cabasa Shaker Maracas High Maracas Low Guiro Short Guiro Long Woodblock High Woodblock Mid Woodblock Low Claves Castanet Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Agogo High Agogo Low Triangle Open Triangle Mute Windbell Down Windbell Up Tambourine Pandeiro Bells Hand Claps Finger Snap Scratch Noise Percussion PERCUSSION 3 Kotsuzumi 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Ohtsuzumi 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Taiko 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 1 Ohdaiko 2 Kakegoe 1 Kakegoe 2 Kakegoe 3 Standard Kit 1 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Snare Tight Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard Kit 2 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Short Snare Tight H Snare Soft 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot H Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Short Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Hit Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 SNARE DRUM Snare Ambient Snare Tight 2 Snare Electro Snare Roll Stick Ambient Snare Pitched Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Hybrid Tom 1 Hybrid Tom 2 Room Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Snappy Snare Tight Snap Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Room 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Room 6 BASS DRUM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Rock Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Rock Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Rock 1 Tom Rock 2 Tom Rock 3 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Rock 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Kick 2 Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Electro Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Noisy 2 Snare Noisy 3 Snare Snap Elec Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Electro 1 Tom Electro 2 Tom Electro 3 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Electro 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Heavy Kick Gate Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Hybrid Tom 3 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Hybrid Tom 6 BASS DRUM Kick Tight H Kick Wet Kick Tight L PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Light Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Analog Kit CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hat Open Analog Hat Close Analog Hat Close Anlg 2 SNARE DRUM Snare Analog Snare Analog 2 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Roll Side Stick Anlg Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 6 BASS DRUM Kick Analog Kick Anlg Short Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 77 Conga Analog H Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Analog Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Dance Kit CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hat Close Anlg 3 SNARE DRUM Snare Clap Snare Dry Snare Techno Reverse Dance 2 Side Stick Anlg Rim Gate Snare Analog 3 Snare Analog 4 Vinyl Noise Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Dance 1 Tom Dance 2 Tom Dance 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Tom Dance 6 BASS DRUM Kick Techno Kick Techno L Kick Techno Q PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Conga Analog H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L 78 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Dance Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap Analog PERCUSSION 2 Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Anlg Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4 Snare Dance 1 Whip Slap Finger Snap Dance Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Jazz Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Jazz L Snare Jazz M Snare Jazz H Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Brush Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Brush Slap 3 Brush Tap 2 Brush Slap 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Brush 1 Tom Brush 2 Tom Brush 3 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Brush 6 BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Symphony Kit CYMBAL Hand Cymbal Hand Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Hand Cymbal S Hand Cymbal 2 S Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Band Snare Band Snare 2 Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Gran Cassa Mute Gran Cassa Kick Soft 2 PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap SFX Kit 1 SFX Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Ghost Maou Dog Horse Bird Tweet SFX Kit 2 SFX 1 Phone Call Telephone Ring Wind Chime Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps SFX 2 CarEngnIgnition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Arabic Kit ARABIC 1 Nakarazan Dom Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Zagrouda H Zagrouda L Arabic Hand Clap Duhulla Dom Duhulla Tak Duhulla Sak Doff Dom Doff Tak ARABIC 2 Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Tik Tabla Roll Edge Tabla Flam Tabel Dom Tabel Tak ARABIC 3 Sagat 1 Sagat 2 Sagat 3 Rik Dom Rik Tak 1 Rik Tak 2 Rik Sak Rik Tik Rik Finger 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Snare Soft Side Stick TOM/BASS DRUM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom Kick Soft PERCUSSION Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Cowbell Claves Cabasa Tambourine BONGO Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap PERCUSSION 1 Timbale H Open Timbale L Open Paila H Paila L Cowbell Top Tambourine Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Cuica Open Cuica Mute Cabasa Shaker PERCUSSION 2 Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wind Chime Hand Clap 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Pop Latin Kit CONGA Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 79 6 Registration Memory Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel. The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media. 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration Memory buttons, 1 – 16. When you record your own Registration settings to a numbered button, the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result. When you initialize the Registration Memory (page 85), the preset settings will be recalled and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults. 6 Contents Registration Memory 1 Storing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 5 Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 2 Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 • Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display . . . . 86 • Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display . . . . 88 3 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory . . . 84 4 Initializing Registration Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 6 Unifying a specific parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 7 Copying Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 1 Storing Registrations Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media for future recall. 1 Reference Pages Selecting a Voice (page 23) Selecting a Rhythm (page 51) Voice Controls and Effects (page 38) 2 Create your original Registration. While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save your Registration. 1. While holding down [M.] button... 13 14 15 16 2. Press desired numbered button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. When the Registration is stored, the numbered button flashes momentarily. When recording Registration settings, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Registration is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved. 80 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Functions and settings that cannot be memorized: The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number. • Pitch (page 193) • MIDI Control settings (fpage 221) • Mic. Volume (page 215) • Mic. Reverb (page 215) • LCD related settings (page 15) • Internet Direct Connection settings (page 203) • Score related settings except Next Page (page 123) Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File); (page 111) 6 Registration Memory The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored individually for each number. • Transpose (page 193) • Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 36) • Registration Shift (page 85) • Auto Fill setting (page 54) • Reverb type (page 44) • User Voices (page 141) • User rhythms (page 167) • User Keyboard Percussion (page 70) • Rhythm Sequences (page 174) • Disable setting (page 82) • Disable mode (page 83) • Next Page setting of score setting (page 123) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 81 2 Selecting Registrations Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. • You can also recall Registrations by using the right footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 85). • You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at specific points within the Rhythm Sequence. This function is called “Registration Sequence” (page 179). Using the [D.] (Disable) button: Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to. 6 Disable Button Registration Memory 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. The particular settings that do not change when the [D.] (disable) button is on depend on the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting Disable Mode” on page 83. 82 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Selecting Disable Mode: The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [D.] (Disable) button is on. There are two Disable modes: NORMAL (rhythm menu, tempo, etc. are disabled) and TEMPO (only tempo is disabled). 1 2 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. Press the DISABLE MODE [NORMAL] or [TEMPO] button. 6 Registration Memory Disable Mode NORMAL When the Electone is set to the NORMAL mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. • Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb • Rhythm reverb time • Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of Accompaniment parts • A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory • M.O.C. mode, Knee lever control for M.O.C. • Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo TEMPO When the Electone is set to the TEMPO mode and the [D.] (Disable) button is on, the rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 83 Saving the Registration data to USB flash 3 memory Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File); (page 111) You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as USB flash memory, with sixteen Registrations comprising a single file. The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash memory. For details about using other external storage devices, see chapter 7, Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.). 1 Insert a USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 2 Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. DISPLAY SELECT 6 VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET Registration Memory RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES Reference Page Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 115) 3 Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data (page 103). 4 Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Registration Edit display. 5 Press the [SAVE] button in the display. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved. When the operation is completed, the message closes. Reference Page Changing the Song Name (page 108) 84 L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 4 Initializing Registration Memory Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration Memory. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data. In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to an external storage device. 1 Reference Page Factory Set (Initializing the Electone); (page 21) Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL Page in the Utility display. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE 2 L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES 6 Registration Memory U.ORGAN FLUTES Press the INITIALIZE [EXECUTE] button on the right side in the display. The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears. Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data. When the operation is complete, the Electone will be restarted. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation. 5 Registration Shift The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify. Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist Shift display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 85 Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel. 2 Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right of the display to call up the RIGHT Page (Regist Shift display). REGIST SHIFT Display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET 1 2 3 4 RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE 6 U.ORGAN FLUTES Registration Memory 1 L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES OFF Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you select OFF, you cannot change Registrations by using the Right Footswitch. 2 SHIFT In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The numbered buttons light up as they are selected. 3 JUMP Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration. You can set the Jump “destination” with buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Registration number of the destination 86 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 4 USER In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. To set the User Registration order: 1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. 2 Press the [SET] button in the display. The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is entered. 3 Repeat the above procedure 1 through 2 to set the Registration order. Registration row 6 3 1 2 Registration Memory 1 POSITION These are cursor controls used to move the cursor (colored orange) along the Registration row in the display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in the row above indicate the position in the sequence (in other words, the number of successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be memorized. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left. Moves the cursor one step to the right. Moves the cursor five steps to the right. 2 DATA These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration row. SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row, or for replacing a number at the current cursor position. To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), then press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row. After using SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers. INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position. To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), and press [INSERT] in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers. Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of 80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be executed. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 87 DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press [DELETE] in the display. CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all data” momentarily appears in the display and returns to the previous display. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 3 SHIFT END Determines how to end the Registration shift function. Reference Page Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song (page 111) STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation. TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the sequence over again from the beginning. NOTE NEXT REGIST: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen Registrations. When you play the song using Next Regist. function, always press the [F] (Play) button in the M.D.R. display to start the song and activate these functions. The [CUSTOM] (Custom Play) button will not activate the Next Regist. function. 6 The Shift End mark ( ) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End. Registration Memory NOTE If the next Registration data contains User voices and/or VA custom voices, the Electone may produce no sound for a few seconds while loading the Registration. NOTE When you use the Next Regist function during Rhythm playback, Rhythm Sequence and User Rhythm cannot be loaded. Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display, Page 1. Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice Display. The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES 88 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Registration Shift, OFF: The current Registration number is displayed. Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode: Current Registration Next Registration The current Registration number (left) and the next number (right) are displayed. 6 Registration Memory Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode: Destination number can be changed. The current Registration number (left) and the destination number (right) will be displayed. You can change the destination number even in the middle of the performance by using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Registration Shift, in “USER” mode: Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift. You can change the Registration by moving the cursor (in orange) right/left, using the displayed buttons or the Data Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle of your performance. The user Registration settings cannot be edited here. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration. Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration. Moves the cursor five step to the right and selects the Registration. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 89 6 Unifying a specific parameter In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently “unify” a specific parameter used in different Voice groups at one time. This is useful when you are changing, for example, the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be applied to the entire instrument. Available parameters • Reverb • Panning 6 • Rhythm Reverb • Brilliance • Volume • Sustain 1 Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel. 2 Press the [2] button at the top right of the display to select Page 2. DISPLAY SELECT Registration Memory VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES 3 L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Press the PARAMETER button (indicates the currently selected parameter) in the display to select the desired parameter for changing. The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting you select the desired parameter. Parameter Part 90 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop-up menu. After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up menu automatically closes. The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the display. Parameter value for each Registration Selected parameter Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on. 6 Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed. Registration Memory 4 Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the SETTINGS buttons: ALL ON, ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT. ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers. ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory numbers. ON: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “ON.” OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “OFF.” SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same Voice as the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position. The targeted Registration numbers are underlined. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 91 5 Unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values. You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or offset them. Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you change the parameter’s value. Unifying the currently turned-on parameter’s value: Pressing [SET] unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values to the one in the currently selected Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation. 6 Registration Memory To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Offsetting the currently turned-on parameter’s value. Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets the currently turned-on parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter, [E]/[F] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-]. If you change the value, and if parameter values for some Registration memory number reach the maximum or minimum, the following message appears. In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation, ignoring those parameters at maximum or minimum value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation. 92 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 7 Copying Registrations In the Voice Display, Page 3, you can copy a Registration stored to a specific Registration Memory number to another number on a specific section basis (Voices, rhythm, keyboard percussion). (The function is called Regist Section Copy.) This is useful, for example, when you want the upper keyboard Voice in Registration number 4 to be the same as in Registration number 1. 1 2 Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice Display. Press the [3] button at the top right of the display to call up Page 3. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET 6 U.ORGAN FLUTES 3 Registration Memory RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Press the COPY FROM [REGIST] number button and select the Registration number that you wish to copy. To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button. Registration number ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 93 4 Press the COPY FROM [SECTION] button and select the Regist Section that you wish to copy. To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button. Section NOTE If you change the source Regist Section after changing the destination Regist Section the destination may automatically change to the section selected as the source Regist Section. 6 Registration Memory 94 5 In the same way, select the COPY TO Registration number and Regist Section. The COPY TO Regist Section depends on the Regist Section selected for COPY FROM. 6 Press the [COPY EXECUTE] button at the bottom right in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 7 Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy the Registration and a message momentarily appears in the display indicating that the Registration has been copied. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Music Data Recorder (MDR) The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory or other external media. If you install the optional floppy disk drive such as the UD-FD01 to the Electone, you can record your performances/settings to floppy disks. Before using an external media such as USB flash memory, carefully read “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 100. Contents 1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 • Song Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 • Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal . . . . . . . . . . 100 • Handling the floppy disk drive (FDD) and floppy disks. . . . . . . . . . 101 3 Formatting External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 4 Selecting a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 5 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 • • • • Recording your performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-recording (Retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording each part separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punch-in Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 106 106 108 6 Changing the Song Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 7 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) . . . 111 • Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song . . . . . . . . . . . 111 • Replacing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 • Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 8 Recalling Recorded Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 9 Playing Back a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 • • • • Playing Back the Selected Part(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Changing the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 10 Displaying the Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 • Changing the score contents and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 11 Other Functions (Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 • • • • • • Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Song Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Converting to XG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Converting ELS format to EL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Converting EL format to ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Checking the Remaining Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations related to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done in the M.D.R. display. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY FOOT SWITCH A.B.C. M.O.C. UTILITY NOTE MDR The items shown in the display and their order differ depending on the connected external media. INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open exits from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the [MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display. All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M.D.R. display. To call up the M.D.R. functions and the M.D.R. display, press the [MDR] button. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 95 2 Using the LCD Display The M.D.R. display consists of two display pages: the SONG Page and the TOOLS Page. In the SONG Page, you can select a song, then play it back or record it. The TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations, such as copy, delete, rename, etc. Pressing the [SONG] or [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display switches between the SONG Page and the TOOLS Page. SONG Page 1 TOOLS Page 2 7 3 5 8 9 4 ) ! 5 @ # $ % ^ 6 & 1 Current Media/Folder Displays the currently selected media and folder(s). The left side of the indication (before “:/”) shows the particular media and the right side shows the path with currently selected folder name at the end. For example, “USB 01:/Folder1/” indicates that the folder named “Folder1” contained in the USB flash memory is selected. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 2 Media/Folder/Song List Displays the media, folders or songs. Up to 120 folders can be displayed (5 folders at once). 3 Scroll Buttons If the Media/folder/Song List contains more than 5 media/folders/songs, you can scroll through the display with these buttons. Reference Page 4 SETTINGS Displays/changes the settings for the currently selected song. Setting a song (page 104) 5 UP Selects the higher layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects “USB 01:/” (USB flash memory). 96 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 6 IN Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/ Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [IN] button selects “USB 01:/Folder1/SONG/” (the SONG folder contained in Folder1 of the USB flash memory). 7 Elapsed Time Displays the elapsed time when recording/playing back a song (up to 59 min. 59 sec.). 8 Song Control Reference Pages Controls song recording, playback, etc. Recording Your Performance (page 105) 9 CUSTOM PLAY Records/plays back only the performance data of the selected songs. Using this button does not recall the Registration data. ) SCORE Playing Back a Song (page 117) Reference Page Displays the selected song’s score. Displaying the Score (page 122) ! REGIST EDIT Displays the Regist (Registration) Edit Display for the selected song’s Registration data. Reference Pages Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) (page 111) Creates a new folder in the Media/Folder/Song List. Up to 120 folders can exist in one media or within a single upper folder. Pressing this button calls up the New Folder display in which you can enter the desired name. Enter the name and press the [OK] button to create a new folder. The method for entering a folder name is the same as that of the song name. See page 108. 7 Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 115) Music Data Recorder (MDR) @ CREATE FOLDER Reference Page # CHANGE NAME Changing the Song Name (page 108) Changes the folder/song name. Reference Page $ COPY Song Copy (page 124) Copies the selected song. % DELETE Reference Page Deletes the selected folder/song. Song Delete (page 126) ^ CONVERT Reference Pages Converts the selected song for use on another Electone or other instruments, or converts songs recorded on another Electone for use on the ELS-01/01C. Songs can be converted to XG format, EL format or ELS format. Converting to XG (page 128) & INFORMATION Converting EL format to ELS (page 129) Displays available memory when media is selected and displays information such as the title and composer when a song is selected. The information to be displayed depends on the songs. Converting ELS format to EL (page 129) Reference Pages Checking the Remaining Memory (page 130) About Protected Songs (page 116) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 97 If media cannot be found: 1 Press the button until the button is grayed out. The Media List will be displayed. If there are more than five media selections, scroll through the display with the Scroll buttons (page 96) to display the desired media. If songs cannot be found: NOTE 1 2 Check the current media/folder (page 96). If the desired song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use the Scroll buttons (page 96) to display the song. If the desired song is stored in a different folder, use the and buttons to select the folder in which the desired song is stored. If the message “Registration data will be initialized” is displayed when you select a folder, press [INITIALIZE] button (media is not initialized). The message will appear when recalling the protected song. If you are not sure of the folder in which the desired song is stored, press button a few times to display the Media List and check the folders in which the song is likely to be stored. Song Icons 7 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song. Music Data Recorder (MDR) Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or floppy disk. This icon is displayed in the Media/Folder List. Indicates a folder. Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is effective for the media. Indicates that performance data is contained in the song. Indicates an XG-compatible song. Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 116 for details. Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 116 for details. 98 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files Folders: A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in groups. If you’ve saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory, it may be difficult to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the songs you want. Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Song 4 Song 5 Song 6 Song 1 2 Song 3 Folder A Creating folders Song Song Song USB flash memory Song 4 5 6 Folder B USB flash memory Songs: A song is the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single song can contain a variety of data, including the recorded performance, Registrations, and so on. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 Files: A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various files, such as Registration files and performance files. The following files are created with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.) Files in the song File Explanation Extension Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the Electone. .mid Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences. .b00 XG-converted data This file contains XG song data, for which Electone performance data is converted to XG-compatible format. .mid In addition, one file (extension: .name) is automatically created in each folder for organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone display. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 99 Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. ■ Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. ■ Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, etc.) • USB hub • USB-LAN adaptor The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://www.yamahamusicsoft.com/ NOTE Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. 7 While holding this button, pull the unit toward you. Keeping the unit in position toward you, connect/ disconnect the device. NOTE During your performance, make sure to slide the USB unit under the keyboard. If you leave it in the forward position, there is a danger of hitting it with your hand and breaking the USB device. • If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time to a terminal, you should use a self-powered USB hub device. Make sure to connect the USB hub to the USB TO DEVICE terminal directly, not to the USB unit. Up to two USB hubs can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. Music Data Recorder (MDR) Using USB Storage Devices ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device (external media), you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. ■ The number of USB storage device to be used Up to four USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB storage devices that can be used simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of four.) This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. ■ Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/ media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 102). The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage media. ■ To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. ■ Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. If you are using a USB flash memory which has a lamp, the lamp will flash when the instrument is accessing the USB flash memory. Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. ■ Data Backup For maximum data security, Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate USB storage devices. This gives you a backup if one device is lost or damaged. 100 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Handling the floppy disk drive (FDD) and floppy disks ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. ■ Floppy disk compatibility • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. ■ Formatting a floppy disk • If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. For details on how to format a disk, see page 102. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the disk contains important data. NOTE Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable as is on other devices. ■ Inserting/removing Floppy Disks ● Inserting a floppy disk into the disk drive • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. ● Removing a floppy disk • After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy disk, firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. ■ Cleaning the disk drive read/write head • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper headcleaning disks. ■ About floppy disks ● Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these precautions: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) If you want to use floppy disks, install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive to the Electone. For information on how to install the UD-FD01, see page 224. ● To protect your data (write-protect tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). ● Data backup • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 101 3 Formatting External Media NOTE Before purchasing a USB flash memory device, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice, or see the Yamaha website (http:// www.yamahamusicsoft.com/). NOTE The indications USB 1, USB 2, etc. will be displayed depending on the number of the connected media. NOTE “USB-FD01” appears in the display only when a floppy disk drive has been installed to the Electone. 7 If you find that you are unable to use new, blank external media (such as floppy disks or USB flash memory) or old one that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage media. 1 2 3 Connect the media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. Press the is grayed out. button repeatedly if necessary until the button Select the desired media you want to format. To format a USB flash memory, select [USB XX] (USB 01, USB 02, etc.). To format a floppy disk, select [USB-FD01]. 5 Press the [FORMAT] button in the display. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [FORMAT] to format the media, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 Do not remove the media while formatting. 102 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 4 Selecting a Song In the M.D.R. display, you can select a blank song to which you want to record your performance or save the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for playback. In the M.D.R. display, songs in the currently selected media are displayed. First call up the desired media (and folder, if necessary) in the display, then select the desired song. 1 Check the currently selected media at the top of the display. For example, if you want to select a song in the USB flash memory, confirm that “USB 01:/” is displayed at the top of the display. Currently selected media/folder Do not remove the media while the instrument is accessing the media. (If you are using a USB flash memory which has a lamp, the lamp will flash when the instrument is accessing the USB flash memory.) Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 For information on selecting the desired media, see page 98. 2 Press desired song button in the display. Referring to the song name and icons, select the desired song. The selected song button is highlighted in orange. Song containing data Reference Pages Changing the Song Name (page 108) Song Icons (page 98) Blank song (containing no data) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 103 Reference Pages Playing Back the Selected Part(s) (page 118) Changing the Tempo (page 119) About the [SETTINGS] button Pressing the button calls up a display of the currently selected song, letting you confirm the tempo and parts that are played when playing the song. When playing back the song (by pressing the [F] (Play) button), only those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo (over a range of 50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the song contains no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.” Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part playback setting (the tempo is not saved). 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 104 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 Recording Recording your performance ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Set the desired Registrations on the Electone. Make all the Electone settings necessary for the song you will record. This means entering the all Registrations you will need for the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song. 3 4 5 6 Insert a media to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Select a blank song for recording your performance. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data, you will need to delete it beforehand. Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up the SONG Page, then select the [I] (Record) button. The following display appears, indicating that you can record your performance. NOTE If a message appears indicating there is not enough free space in media, press the [CANCEL] button, then press the [J] (Stop) button to go back to the M.D.R. display. Delete any unnecessary songs if possible or insert new media. To continue recording your performance on media that does not have enough space, press the [CONTINUE] button. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 2 Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. Press the [F] (Play) button. An hourglass icon appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating that Registration data is currently being read. After the hourglass disappears, begin playing. When you finish playing, press the [J] (Stop) button in the display. The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the M.D.R. display. The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named “SONG_XXX” (XXX indicates song number). You can change the song name as desired. (For details, see page 108.) Do not remove the media from the Electone while data is being recorded (while the hourglass icon or other message is shown). ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 105 Re-recording (Retry) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the beginning. NOTE Pressing the [J] (Stop) button cancels the rerecording and records the previous performance. 7 1 Press the [I] (Record) button while the song is still running. This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the song. 2 Press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY] button to begin rerecording the song. Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance. Music Data Recorder (MDR) Recording each part separately ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song. Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately, though, the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard. 1 2 Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 105 to call up the Rec Standby display. Select the parts for recording. Each pressing of a part button switches the status: PLAY, OFF, and REC. PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded. OFF: Recording or playback is not active. REC: Records the part. NOTE When you record the Keyboard Percussion, make sure that the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] and/or [2] button is set to on. 106 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard (including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however, records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to “REC” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts be recorded at the same time. The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard parts. NOTE You should also set the Control button to “REC,” in order to record Registration changes and expression pedal operation. 3 4 Press the [F] (Play) button, and start playing after the hourglass icon disappears. 5 Press the [I] (Record) button to set up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears. Press the [J] (Stop) button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording. Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance. 6 Select the parts for recording. Set the next parts you want to record (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.” Also set the part already recorded (in this case Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,” so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones. 7 Change the playback tempo for the selected part. The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo. 8 Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to start recording of the new part or parts (Upper part). Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM PLAY] button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper Keyboard. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 NOTE Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value (100%). When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 107 Punch-in Recording ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which you don’t want to use, either that of a specific part(s) or all parts. NOTE This function is best used when the phrase to be rerecorded has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before and after. 7 1 2 3 4 Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 5 6 7 Set the parts which you want to change to “REC” status and other parts to “PLAY.” Press the [F] (Play) button to start playback of the song. Press the [K] (Pause) button at the point you want to execute punch-in recording. Press the [I] (Record) button. The recording display appears, indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready to record. Press the [F] (Play) button to start punch-in recording. Play the new phrase, as you want it to be changed. Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the punch-in recording as soon as you reach the end of the phrase. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 Changing the Song Name NOTE When you change the name of an XG song, the extension (.mid) cannot be changed. 108 You can name the song, such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was recorded. However, song names of the EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, cannot be changed. 1 2 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Select the song whose name you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. 3 Press the [CHANGE NAME] button. The following display appears. 4 Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [E][F] buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Cursor DATA CONTROL or 6 7 Select the desired character for entry. A song name can contain up to 50 characters. 7 NOTE If you select Japanese as the Language in the Utility display, you can also select Japanese language characters (hiragana and kanji, normal size katakana, half size katakana, full size alphabet, and full size symbols). Music Data Recorder (MDR) 5 Select the desired character type: alphabet, upper or lowercase, or symbol. NOTE An XG song name can contain up to 46 characters. After finished, select [OK] to actually enter the name. The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 109 To delete the entered character: 1 Move the cursor to the character you want to delete. Cursor DATA CONTROL or 2 Press the [DELETE] button at the bottom right in the display. The character is deleted. To convert into kanji (Japanese language): This applies only if you are using the 7 (Kana-Kan) button in Japanese. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 When the input “Hiragana” characters are shown in the reverse display (highlighted), press the (kanji-conversion) button once or several times to convert to the characters into the appropriate kanji. • The reversed area can be changed by the [E][F] buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. • The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the (cancel) button. 2 To actually enter the change, press the [OK] button or enter the next character. To enter the hiragana character itself (without converting it), press the (delete) button. A “name is not available” message may appear when you press the [OK] button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you should enter another name. The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates numbers.) NOTE Songs are ordered in the following sequence: symbol, number, alphabet, hiragana, kanji, other symbols. Names with an asterisk (*) at the top are exceptions to this rule. 110 MDR_xx.EVT MDR_xx.MID MDR_xx.Bxx MDR_xx.Vxx SONG.NAM ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.B00 SONG_xxx MDR_xxx.TMP REG_xxx.TMP ELS_SONG.TMP SONG_xxx.C02 TMP TMP.E02 7 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) You can also record Registrations by themselves, without recording a performance. Bulk data, including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Patterns (User rhythms) Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices, are also saved in the operation. 1 First create your original settings you want to save then select the destination (blank song). For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 2 3 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit Display. Press the [SAVE] button in the display. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved. After the message disappears, exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit Display by pressing the [CLOSE] button and return to the SONG SELECT Page. The song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG XXX” (XXX indicates song number). Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song 1 First create the original settings you want to save, then select the destination song. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit Display. The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown. Next Regist (page 88) Programming a Registration Sequence (page 179) Music Data Recorder (MDR) When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers, you can save additional Registration banks to a single song, with the following procedure. 3 7 Reference Page ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Press the lowest blank (empty) Registration button. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 111 4 Press the [SAVE] button. The Registration data will be added. When you play back this song, the top Registration bank in this display will be loaded to the Electone. You can also change the order of the Registration bank. See page 113. Replacing Registrations ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without changing the performance data. In advance, you need to create the original Registration that will replace the old one. 1 Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit Display. The Registration bank which has been saved to the song is shown. 7 3 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 112 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Select the Registration bank you wish to replace. Press the [SAVE] button. A message appears, prompting confirmation of overwriting the Registration bank. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite (replace), or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Next Regist (Registration) Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can use two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as you play the song. This function is called Next Regist (Registration). M16 REG_001 M1 M16 REG_002 If you want to use the Next Regist (Registration) function, you’ll have to make one of the following settings in advance: • Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next Regist (Registration) as the Shift End, in advance. • Enter the Next Regist (Registration) data in the Registration Sequence. 1 Save the desired Registrations to a song. For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song, see page 111. NOTE If the next Registration data contains User voices and/or VA custom voices, the Electone may produce no sound for a few seconds while the Registration is being loaded. NOTE 2 Select the song containing the Registrations for which you want to change the order. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 3 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG Page to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit Display. 4 Change the Registration order, in the order you want to recall. First select the specific Registration bank you want to edit, then move, copy or delete the selected data as needed to change the order. If the Next Regist (Registration) function is used while the rhythm is being played back, the sequence data and User rhythm will not change. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) M1 113 4 1 5 6 7 2 3 1 Registration Data List From this list, select the Registration you want to move, copy or delete. The selected Registration is highlighted in orange. When more than five Registration banks are saved in the song, a scroll button is available for scrolling through the Registration Data List. 2 MOVE Moves the selected Registration bank up or down. 3 DATA TO BE LOADED When loading the Registration bank to the panel, select the desired data you want to load. For more information, see page 115. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 LOAD Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel/keyboards. After loading, press one of the Registration Memory button and play the keyboard to check the Registration. 5 SAVE Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song. The currently selected Registration in the Registration Data List (1) will become the destination location. 6 COPY Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the Registration Data List. 7 DELETE Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List. 5 114 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit Display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. 8 Recalling Recorded Registrations Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to the Electone by the following procedure. The M.D.R. independently recalls the following five types of data: • • • • • REGIST USER VOICE K.B.P. USER RHYTHM SEQUENCE You can select and recall the desired data independently. 1 Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to load back to the Electone. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 2 3 Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Regist (Registration) Edit Display. Select the Registration you want to load to the Electone. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 4 Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED” buttons, select the desired data you want to load. NOTE When you load the Registration data by using the Next Regist function, all data will be loaded no matter which buttons you select here. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 115 NOTE If you load a Registration while a rhythm is playing, sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded. 5 Press the [LOAD] button. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Press the [LOAD] button to load the Registration data. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation. 6 Exit from the Regist (Registration) Edit Display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. When you select the protected song, the buttons (DATA TO BE LOADED) may be unavailable (grayed out). For example, combining a part of one protected song with another protected song is not allowed. About Protected Songs 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) When you want to edit a protected song, first initialize the Registration Memory (page 85), then select the desired song. If you have not initialized the Registration first, the edited song may not be saved. If you buy or download the song data, it may be protected so that you cannot delete or copy, in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright. This is “Protected Song.” Protected songs can be saved to a USB flash memory confirmed by Yamaha. The protected song can be played back as well as the song you created, but it cannot be converted to XG format, or EL format. It is not possible to edit the Registration data in the protected song, nor to overwrite the performance data. If you want to edit the protected song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copy song (called “protected edit song”) is available only when the original song (called “protected original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the protected original song. Folder Protected Original Song Protected Edit Song Copy You cannot edit this song You can edit this song, only when this is in the folder that contains protected original song. To move the protected song in a USB flash memory with a computer, you’ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application. If you move the song without Musicsoft Downloader, the song cannot be played back. Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http:// music.yamaha.com/download/ 116 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 9 Playing Back a Song The M.D.R. enables you to play back commercially available XG-compatible song data and MIDI data created with a computer as well as songs recorded on the Electone itself. 3 Select the song to be played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to load the Registration data. An hourglass icon appears, indicating the Registration data is loading. If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be loaded. You can check the Registration order in the Regist (Registration) Edit Display. If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the LCD returns to the SONG Page. Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data (the elapsed time is shown). In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute specific parts and playback only selected parts. For more information, see page 118. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the [J] (Stop) button in the display. Reference Page Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) (page 113) Reference Page About the [SETTINGS] button (page 104) 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 2 Custom Play If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button instead of the [F] (Play) button. This displays the song time and starts playback immediately. When you play the song using the Next Regist function, always press the [F] (Play) button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 117 Playing Back the Selected Part(s) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts. Reference Page Setting a song (page 104) 7 Reference Page Music Data Recorder (MDR) Converting to XG (page 128) To play back the selected part(s): During playback or in the Settings Display, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback to “PLAY” and the part you want to mute to “OFF.” Each pressing of a part button switches the status between PLAY and OFF. Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part’s playback status. To play back the selected part(s) of XG-compatible song data: Press the Part [XG] button while XG-compatible song data is being played back. The following XG Part Setup Display appears. Press the appropriate channel buttons (e.g., the [CH1] button) to set each channel to playback or mute. Each pressing of a button switches the status: PLAY and OFF. Set a part to [PLAY] if you want to play it back and [OFF] if you do not. The [ALL] button enables you to switch all channels to PLAY/OFF at once. To set each channel’s volume use the sliders. Each channel’s volume can be adjusted between 0 and 100. The [ALL] slider adjusts the overall volume. 118 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fast Forward and Rewind: During playback, press the [H] (Fast forward) button or [G] (Rewind) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM PLAY] button. Pause: If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [K] (Pause) button. To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM PLAY] button. Changing the Tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display, either while the song is stopped or while it is playing. To Change the Tempo: 7 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Music Data Recorder (MDR) Use the TEMPO buttons in the display or Data Control dial to change the tempo. (The TEMPO dial on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100% and values less than 100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100% indicate faster tempo. 119 To reset the changed tempo: Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value (100%). Repeat Playback ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one specific song. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 120 1 Select the song you wish to play back. If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 2 3 Press the [SONG] button at the top right of the display to call up the SONG Page. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Press the Display. button on the panel to call up the Settings 4 Press the REPEAT button to select the repeat mode. Each press of the button switches the mode. REPEAT button SINGLE Repeats the currently selected song again and again. ALL Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order. RANDOM Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly. OFF Cancels repeat playback. 7 button at Music Data Recorder (MDR) 5 6 Exit from the Settings Display by pressing the the top right of the display. Press the [F] (Play) button in the SONG Page to begin playback. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 121 10 Displaying the Score The M.D.R. display can display a music notation (score) of the performance data recorded to media. You can change the size and the number of staffs to be displayed. While a song is being played back, the cursor moves according to the performance and the pages are automatically turned. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) NOTE 1 Select the song containing performance data. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 2 Press the [SCORE] button in the display. The currently selected song score will be displayed. 3 Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to start playing back the song. As the song plays back, the cursor moves accordingly and the page is automatically turned at the appropriate point. The score size setting cannot be stored to a Registration Memory. In this condition, pressing the [I] (Record) button in the display lets you record a song and have the score displayed for you. NOTE The score size can be adjusted by pressing the [SIZE CHANGE] button in the display. Each press of the [SIZE CHANGE] button alternates the score size in the following sequence: normal, large, extra large, small, normal, and so on. Please note that the size cannot be changed while a song is being recorded. Scores for protected songs cannot be displayed, excepting those songs that specifically allow score display. 4 5 122 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual You can manually turn the page, by stopping playing back a song using the [J] (Stop) or [K] (Pause) button, and then pressing the PAGE [E] or [F] buttons in the display. Pressing these buttons moves to the previous or next page. The PAGE [F] button can be assigned to the left foot switch (page 123). To exit the score, press the [SCORE OFF] button in the display. Changing the score contents and settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The Score Settings Display lets you choose the contents to be displayed. In this display, you can also assign the Next Page function to the left foot switch: 3 Please note that the score settings cannot be changed while the song is being recorded. The [SET UP] button is disabled during recording. Display the score. Press the [SET UP] button in the display to call up the Score Settings Display. Change the score settings. To set whether a specific part is displayed or not in the score, press the appropriate [ON] or [OFF] buttons of each part. Please note that at least one of the upper keyboard, lower keyboard or pedalboard will be set to [ON]. Available settings for notes and how they will be displayed (NOTE) include [A, B, C] (conventional C-D-E indications), [FIXED DO] (solfeggio), [MOVABLE DO] (relative solfeggio) and [OFF]. For the CH SETTINGS, the upper keyboard, lower keyboard and pedalboard can be assigned to the channels with the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button. Selecting [AUTO] automatically assigns parts to the channels according to the song data. To set the QUANTIZE value use the [▲] or [▼] button. You can also use the Data Control dial to select channels after pressing the [▲] or [▼] button. The shorter the note value is selected, the more precisely the score is displayed. Setting the NEXT PAGE L. Foot SW [ON] lets you turn the score to the next page with the left foot switch. You can also turn the score to the next page with the PAGE [F] button in the display. If rhythm, glide and/or rotary speaker are assigned to the left foot switch and set on, both the assigned functions and the Next Page function work. 4 NOTE The score display settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory. Only the left foot switch setting can be stored to USB flash memory as Registration data common to all Registration Memory numbers. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 2 NOTE NOTE Setting the NOTE to [MOVABLE DO] displays each key note as “Do.” Reference Page About Quantize (page 156) Exit from the Score Settings Display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 123 11 Other Functions (Tools) The TOOLS Page in the M.D.R. display has many functions, such as song copy, song delete, etc. Song Copy ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This function lets you copy data recorded in one song to another song. You can copy and exchange the data even between two different media. (Only songs created with the ELS-01/01C can be copied. Songs created with the EL-series, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 songs, Song Copy is not available. Moving a Protected Song A protected song can be copied within a folder, but it cannot be copied to another folder or media. If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination, a message appears prompting moving of the song—not copying. When the [MOVE] button is pressed, the protected original song and all protected edit songs which come from the same protected original song will be moved together. This effectively “moves” a protected song, but does not “copy” it. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) To copy a song: Insert the media that contains a song to be copied and the destination media. • To copy within one media Insert the media that contains a song to be copied. • To copy a song from USB flash memory to another Insert both the USB flash memory that contains a song to be copied and the destination USB flash memory. When there are not enough terminals available, use a self powered USB hub. If you don’t have a USB hub, you can copy a song by following the procedure on page 125. 1 2 124 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Select the song to be copied. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. Press the [COPY] button in the display to call up the Copy To Display. 4 5 (If necessary) Change the destination. For details on changing the destination, see page 103. Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy. The song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source song. If you copy a song to a folder that contains a song whose name is the same as the source song, the copied song name will be “source song name_XXX” (XXX indicates song number). If you want to change the song name, see page 108. If you copy an XG-compatible song to another folder or media that contains a song with the same name as the source song, a message appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the XG-compatible song in the destination. Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during copying (or moving a protected song). Data may be lost. NOTE If you copy a protected song to the same folder as the source song, the copied song will be the protected edit song. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 To copy a song from USB flash memory to another: It is recommended that you use connect both media (source and destination) to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. However, if there are not enough terminals available, you can copy a song by following the procedure below. 1 2 3 Follow the step 1 – 3 on page 124. Press the displayed. button several times until the Media List is Select “MEMORY” as the destination. Removing the media during operation may result in loss of the data. Never attempt to remove the media unless the “Eject the source media” message appears. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 125 NOTE If you want to abort the operation, press the [CANCEL] button. Never attempt to turn the power off during copying a protected song. Data may be lost. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the Song Copy. The song to be copied is copied to the internal memory of the Electone. The message “Eject the source media” will appear on the display. 5 Eject the source media. After ejecting the source media, the message “Insert the destination media” will appear on the display. 6 7 8 Insert the destination media to which you want to copy. Select the destination. For details on specifying the destination, see page 103. Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute Song Copy. Select [OVERWRITE] to execute or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. The song is copied with the same name as the source song. If you copy a song to a folder that contains a song whose name is the same as the source song, the copied song name will be “source song name_XXX” (XXX indicates song number). If you copy an XG-compatible song to another folder or media that contains a song with the same name as the source song, a message appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the XG-compatible song in the destination. If you want to change the song name, see page 108. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Song Delete ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can delete the data of one song. You can specify for deletion only Registration data, only the performance data, or both of them (entire song). Also, only the songs created on the ELS-01/01C and XG-compatible songs can be deleted. Songs created on the EL series instruments such as the EL-900 cannot be deleted. 1 2 3 126 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Select the song to be deleted. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. Press the [DELETE] button in the display. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Confirm that the song to be deleted is shown in the display. If you want to change the song, press the [CANCEL] button and select the desired song. 4 Press the button of the specific data you want to delete (“DELETE ALL,” “DELETE REGIST” or “DELETE PERFORMANCE”). The selected data will be deleted. • DELETE ALL: Deletes the entire song. • DELETE REGIST: Deletes only Registration data in the song. • DELETE PERFORMANCE: Deletes only performance data in the song. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation. When deleting folders, songs with only registration, songs with only performance data, protected songs or XG-compatible songs: Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 Select [DELETE] to actually delete the data, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 127 Converting to XG ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This function allows you to convert the ELS-01/01C song data to XG format data. You can playback the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may sound differently from the original data. Confirm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before the conversion. The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format. 1 2 3 Select a song to be converted to XG. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 4 Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button. The following display appears. 5 (If necessary) Changes the destination to save the converted song. For details on changing the destination, see page 103. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A message appears indicating that the converted data is being checked and the M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song. When playback is finished, the display returns to the previous display. Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. Press the [CONVERT] button. A message “Which do you want to select?” appears. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) NOTE Playing the keyboard or pressing the panel controls during the confirmation of the conversion will be recorded to the converted XG-compatible song. 128 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Converting ELS format to EL ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can convert songs created on the ELS-01/01C to EL-series format, and save them to a floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL-900. This function is not available for protected songs. You’ll need to install the optional floppy disk drive such as UD-FD01. Select the song to be converted to EL-series format. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. 3 Press the [CONVERT ELS ➞ EL] button. If the source song contains two or more Registration banks, you’ll need to make ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data. NOTE In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button. A “Which do you want to select?” message appears. 7 NOTE Music Data Recorder (MDR) Insert the floppy disk, then press the [EXECUTE] button in the display. If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient, conversion cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.) Converting EL format to ELS If the source song’s name contains full size characters or Japanese characters, these characters will be shown as question marks (such as “????”). Reference Page ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can convert the songs in the floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, to the ELS-01/01C format, and save it to a USB flash memory confirmed by Yamaha. You’ll need to install the optional floppy disk drive such as UD-FD01. Depending on the original song, the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ from the original song, or the Next Song function of the original song may not be effective. 1 About Protected Songs (page 116) User rhythms cannot be converted to EL format. 1 2 4 Reference Page Insert the floppy disk that contains the song you want to convert to ELS format, then select the source song. For details on selecting a song, see page 103. Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (page 224) NOTE When you convert the protected EL data to ELS format, set the write-protect tab of the EL disk to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 129 2 In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT] button. A message appears confirming if you want to convert from the EL format to the ELS format. 3 Press the [CONVERT EL ➞ ELS] button in the display, then specify the destination for the converted song. To use the converted song on the ELS-01/01C, the destination must be USB flash memory. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion. If the remaining memory of the USB flash memory is insufficient, conversion cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.) 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Checking the Remaining Memory ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● In the TOOLS Page, press the [INFORMATION] button. If media is selected, the remaining memory in the media is shown and if a song is selected, the song data capacity, title, composer, etc. are shown. 130 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 8 Voice Edit This Electone has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices. We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firmer understanding of the Voices. Then go through the editing steps, reading Editing a Voice on page 134 for editing of an AWM Voice, or page 139 for editing of a VA Voice. Contents 1 Voice Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 • AWM Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 • VA Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 2 Editing a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 • Selecting a Voice for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 • Editing an AWM Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 • Editing a VA Voice (only for ELS-01C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 3 Saving the edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 4 Quitting Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 5 Recalling an Edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 1 Voice Structure The internal structure of the Voices of this Electone is explained below. Refer also to “AWM Voices and VA Voices” (page 34). AWM Voice structure ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument. Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be edited, by changing the level (volume), filter settings, and so on. A single Voice contains four boxes (AWM1 – AWM4) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists of less than three Elements, some boxes are empty. For example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown). Voice Edit 8 Strings 1 Element 1 Element 2 AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4 You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for example – if a box (AWM3 and/or AWM4) is empty. This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds. In the Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each Element, but also assemble some Elements from other Voices. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 131 VA Voice structure ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● VA Voices are made by simulating the characteristic behavior of acoustic instruments. You can edit the Voice’s volume and timbre. Moreover, you can also add AWM Elements to a VA Voice to create your own original Voice. VA Voices are available only on the Lead Voice 2 section of the ELS-01C. All Voices in the other Voice sections are AWM Voices. 2 Editing a Voice Selecting a Voice for editing ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu. For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select [Accordion 1] in the Voice Menu of the [ORGAN] button in any Voice section. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN 8 Voice Edit Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section. 132 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 2 While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the Voice button corresponding to the Voice you wish to edit. If you press [VOICE EDIT] without selecting a Voice, the following display will prompt you to complete the step. While this display appears, press the desired Voice button. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR UPPER KEYB FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION T G Press the Voice button. While holding down… After you have selected the Voice button, the AWM Page (first page of the Voice Edit display) will appear if the selected Voice is an AWM Voice. If you have selected a VA Voice, the VA Page will appear. Voice Edit 8 If you release the [VOICE EDIT] button before pressing a Voice button, the Voice Edit function will not be called up, and the normal Voice Display will appear. The message “Voice data is too large to edit” may appear when you press the Voice button while holding down the [VOICE EDIT]. If this message appears, select another Voice. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 133 Editing an AWM Voice ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in the Voice Edit display. In the AWM Page, the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make detailed edits to each Element. AWM Page 1 1 2 3 4 Element On/Off switches The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator (the VA button is grayed out when you are editing an AWM Voice). You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. 2 VOICE/ELEMENT Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. For example, the screen above shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM1, the Element 2 of Accordion 1 is assigned to AWM2 and no Voice is assigned to AWM3 and AWM4. You can also call up another Element from another Voice and replace the currently selected Element with it. Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can select the desired Voice/ Element (usually Element 1). If you change Voice, the Element will automatically change to the first Element of the Voice (usually Element 1). 8 Voice Edit 3 EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency band. The EQ LOW FREQ. slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ LOW GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ LOW FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB. 4 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency band. The EQ HIGH FREQ. slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The EQ HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ HIGH FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB. 134 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual EQ (Equalizer) Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made. This Electone has a two-band (high and low) digital equalizer that lets you adjust the overall sound according to the type of music you play — classical music being more refined and soft, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic. LAYER Page 1 3 2 1 Element select buttons Select the Element you wish to edit. 2 8 Element On/Off switches 3 Voice Edit The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator (the [VA] button is grayed out when you are editing an AWM Voice). You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. Muting all other Elements except for the one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease in editing. Note that when some Elements are muted, playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with certain velocities may result in no sound. Display switch buttons The LAYER Page contains three pages. The them. buttons are used to switch among ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 135 LAYER Page 1 These buttons switch the display. 1 1 2 3 LEVEL Determines the output level of the Element. Range: 0 – 127 2 NOTE LIMIT Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds. The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter. Range: C-2 – G8 3 PAN Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image. Range: L64 – R63 8 Voice Edit LAYER Page 2 1 1 2 NOTE SHIFT Determines the pitch settings in semitones. Range: -64 – +63 2 TUNE FINE Determines the fine tuning. Range: -64 – +63 136 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 3 4 5 6 3 ATTACK RATE Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is played. Higher values produce a faster attack. Range: 0 – 127 4 Reference Page Envelope Parameters (page 140) RELEASE RATE Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released. Higher values make the time shorter. Range: 1 – 127 5 CUTOFF FREQ. Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter. Range: 9600 – 24000 cent 6 RESONANCE Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter. Range: 16 – 140 Filter — Cutoff frequency and Resonance Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound. This Electone is equipped with a low pass filter, which passes only those signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency. Cutoff Frequency Level Voice Edit 8 Frequency These frequencies are passed by the filter. Level Resonance Cutoff Frequency Frequency You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency. Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 137 LAYER Page 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 LFO WAVE Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. For details, see page 139. 2 LFO SPEED Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher values make the speed faster. Range: 2 – 93 3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change. For the minimum setting, the pitch does not change. Range: 0 – 400 8 4 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth) Voice Edit Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the filter cutoff frequency. Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change. For the minimum setting, the frequency does not change. Range: 0 – 4800 cent 5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change. For the minimum setting, the amplitude does not change. Range: 0 – 128 Reference Page Vibrato (page 41) 138 When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters (above), set the Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato is set to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or speed) are set fairly high, you may not be able to hear the effect of the LFO. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency. These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. The following five waveforms are available. saw tri rnd sine squ Editing a VA Voice (only for ELS-01C) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can edit a VA Voice in the VA Page of the Voice Edit display. If you are using the ELS-01, the VA Page cannot be selected. VA Page Voice Edit 8 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Element On/Off switches The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. AWM buttons are grayed out when you are editing a VA Voice since VA Voices do not contain Elements. However, you can add AWM Elements to a VA sound in the AWM and LAYER Pages if you want. See page 134. 2 LEVEL Determines the level of the VA sound. Range: 0 – 127 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 139 3 ATTACK RATE Determines how quickly the sound will reach its maximum level after the key is played. Lower values produce a slower attack. Range: -64 – +63 4 DECAY RATE Determines how much time it takes to reach its second level from the first (maximum) level. Range: -64 – +63 5 RELEASE RATE Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released. Positive value makes the time shorter and negative value makes it longer. Range: -64 – +63 6 Reference Page EQ (Equalizer); (page 135) EQ LOW Determines the level (volume) of the low range frequencies. Positive values boost or increase the level, while negative values decrease or cut it. Range: -64 – +63 7 EQ HIGH Determines the level (volume) of the high range frequencies. Positive values boost or increase the level, while negative values decrease or cut it. Range: -64 – +63 8 Envelope Parameters Voice Edit The level envelope lets you control the transition in volume from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. The parameters 2 – 5 above are envelope-related parameters. 4 3 Attack Rate Decay Rate 5 Release Rate Level (volume) 2 Level Pressing the key 140 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Time Releasing the key 3 Saving the edited Voice Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to sixteen), and edited VA Voices can be saved as VA Custom Voices (up to six). Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page. When saving User Voices (AWM) When saving VA Custom Voices (VA) 2 Select the User Voice number or VA Custom Voice number you wish to save to. The message appears to prompt confirmation of the operation. (Saving a new Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User number.) 3 (If necessary) Press the [RENAME] button to give a name to your original Voice. The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the M.D.R. section. (See page 108 for more information.) Up to sixteen characters can be entered. 4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the Voice, or press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 8 Voice Edit 1 This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously saved to the selected User Voice number or VA Custom Voice number. Be careful not to erase any important data. Always save your important data in advance to a USB flash memory or other external media using the M.D.R. function. After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit function (page 142) before turning the power off. Turning off the Electone without quitting Voice Edit erases the User Voice you have edited. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 141 4 Quitting Voice Edit You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages. 1 2 Press the [VOICE EDIT] button on the panel. If your original Voice has already been saved, the Voice Edit function quits automatically. If the edited Voice has not been saved, a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [CANCEL] to about the operation and return to the previous display. When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice you have created is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being saved. 5 Recalling an Edited Voice Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the User button in each Voice section. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices from the User buttons” (page 28). 8 Voice Edit UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE STRINGS BRASS WOODWIND TUTTI PAD SYNTH 1 PIANO ORGAN PERCUSSION GUITAR CHOIR WORLD 2 VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN Once your original VA Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the [VA CUSTOM] button in LEAD VOICE 2. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” (page 23). LEAD VOICE 2 142 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual VA VA ACOUSTIC VIRTUAL VA VA ELECTRONIC CUSTOM BRILLIANCE VOLUME BRILLIANT MAX MELLOW MIN 1 SOLO (KNEE) 9 Rhythm Program The Electone includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original rhythms and save them as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect the existing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks, which you can automatically play back during your performance. Moreover, Rhythm Sequence Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration Sequence. Contents 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation . . . . . . . 143 • Selecting Rhythm from an External Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 • Percussion Kit List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 2 Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 • Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 • Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 • Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write . . 150 • Editing Entered Percussion Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 • Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write 157 • Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function). . . . . . . . . 158 • Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 • Adjusting Volume and Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 • Effect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 • Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 • Saving Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 • Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 • Recalling User Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 3 Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 • Selecting a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 • Programming a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 • Auditioning a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 • Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 • Programming a Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 • Editing an Existing Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 • Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 • Playing Rhythm Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 • Playing All Sequences in Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 • Copying a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 4 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 144 – 169) You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset rhythm patterns. 9 Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them Rhythm Program Creating the backing (Rhythmic Chord) patterns and/or editing them Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice (Panning, Tuning, and so on) Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 174 – 181) You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover, you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back. Selecting the destination of the sequence Entering a rhythm pattern one by one Programming the Registration Sequence ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 143 2 Rhythm Pattern Program Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different instrument sounds (drum and percussion) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms. Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm that is similar to the rhythm you want to create, and creating your own rhythm from scratch. To copy a preset rhythm: Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, saving you time if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern. 1 NOTE 2 Pressing the [PATTERN] button while the rhythm is running automatically stops the rhythm. Select the rhythm you want to copy from the Rhythm Menu. While holding down the [PATTERN] button in the panel (the display prompts you to select a rhythm), select the Rhythm button that contains the preset rhythm to be copied to the Rhythm Pattern Program. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE 9 Rhythm Program U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES RHYTHM VOLUME MAX SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN 144 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual To create your own rhythm from scratch: Press the [PATTERN] button and release it without selecting a Rhythm button. A blank pattern is loaded to the Rhythm Pattern Program. A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break. In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part from other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm. Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm Preset Rhythm User Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3 C C D D Changing Intro 1 to Intro 1' Save as a User Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1' Main A 2 B B 3 C C D D Ending 1 Ending 1 Break 2 Break 2 3 3 All Rhythm sections, including any which have not been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm. Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different rhythms Preset Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1 Main A 2 B B 3 C C Ending 1 D D 2 Assemble some sections or parts User Rhythm Break 3 Save as a User Rhythm Preset Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3' C' C' D' D' Ending 1 Intro 1' Main A' Fill In A' 2 2' B' B' 3 3' C' C' Ending 1' D' D' 3' 9 Break' Rhythm Program 2' Break' Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from scratch Blank Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3 C C D D 3 Save as a User Rhythm User Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1 Main A 2 B B 3 C C D D Ending 1 Ending 1 2 Entering percussion sounds into each section Break 2 Break 3 These are blank sections (no percussion sounds); if you press ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 145 Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of the rhythm, such as time signature, measure length, and so on. You can also customize the part settings in this SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. 1 Press the [SETTING] button in the display to call up the SETTING Page. 2 Determines the time signature used for the rhythm. You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons. 9 Rhythm Program If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the following message. Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm and changes the time signature. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 146 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 3 Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm pattern. Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop-up menu. After selecting the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically closes. You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm [START] button on the panel. You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing. For details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to page 162. 4 Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern. Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select popup menu. Select the desired measure in the pop-up menu. If you select Break or Fill In as the section, the measure cannot be changed. 5 (If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part Assemble, and Part Clear parameters. 9 Rhythm Program 2 3 1 1 METRONOME Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome sounds on each beat of the measure (for example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On here with Real Time Write. Reference Pages Step Write and Real Time Write (page 149) Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern — Real Time Write (page 157) NOTE Pressing the VOLUME buttons for Rhythm also changes the volume of the metronome. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 147 2 ASSEMBLE Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. You can assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm. Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following display. Select copy source (Rhythm, Section, and Part) Select the part for the copy destination Press here to execute the copy Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then select the destination. You can copy only one part, or all parts of a rhythm. After setting the source and destination, press [EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and returning to the previous display. You can also select a rhythm pattern currently being created as the COPY FROM RHYTHM. To create a MAIN B section based on MAIN A, you can conveniently create that you create the MAIN A rhythm first and copy it to MAIN B, then edit the MAIN B rhythm. To select the rhythm currently being created, select “Current Rhythm” on the 5th page of the “USER” category. 9 Rhythm Program 148 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 3 CLEAR PART Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected rhythm. Pressing this button calls up the following display. Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts. You cannot select a part that contains no data (the button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared. Reference Page Accompaniment (page 61) When selecting the desired part, a display prompting confirmation of the operation appears. Select [CLEAR] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. NOTE If you select BASS here, the bass phrase in the A.B.C. will be cleared. Step Write and Real Time Write There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write and Real Time Write. Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values. As a method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each note is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each individual note entered, you cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for precision and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure. 9 Rhythm Program Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multi-track tape recorder; you can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm, because it allows you to actually play the pattern as you are creating it. Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which method you use depends partly on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your own personal preference. You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use of both methods. This would come handy, for example, in programming the basic beats of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and embellishments. Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm. If the rhythm is stopped, Step Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing, Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions below for Step Write, and page 157 for Real Time Write. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 149 Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● NOTE The volume of the percussion and accompaniment sound during use of Rhythm Pattern Program can be controlled with the VOLUME button of the RHYTHM section. When you quit Rhythm Pattern Program, the VOLUME of the RHYTHM section will return to the previous selected level. You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display. Before entering percussion sounds, turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. 1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the INPUT Page. 2 Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM, to which you want to enter the percussion. In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion instruments (such as Bass Drum, Snare Drum, and so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others (such as Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add Drum part. 3 Select the desired Drum Kit. You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits. For details on each kit, see page 171. Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up the kit Select the pop-up menu, then select the desired kit from the pop-up menu. The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards. Drum kit SFX kit 9 Rhythm Program You can select only one kit for each part (Main Drum or Add Drum). When you want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits, select one kit for Main Drum and another for Add Drum. 150 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 4 Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the sound. The selected instrument’s name appears on the display. Selected key Instrument name 5 Set the appropriate Quantize value. For details on Quantize, refer to page 156. 6 Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and only necessary when you want to enter a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.) For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting, refer to the Percussion Kit List on page 171. For details on Gate Time, refer to page 160. 7 Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected point. Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the percussion sounds. You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by pressing the QUANTIZE [E][F] buttons. NOTE The Quantize setting can be changed in the middle of Step Write. 9 Rhythm Program 1 2 1 3 Rhythm Clock box Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure, beat, and number of clicks. A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat is made up of 480 clicks. The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops back to the beginning of the rhythm (01:01:000). Reference Page Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern (page 146) ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 151 2 ACCENT buttons Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level. Press one of the ACCENT buttons you wish to set (“” is softer and “ ” is louder; “REST” is no sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected position in the pattern. Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm clock by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value. 3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value. 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm. Editing Entered Percussion Notes ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of the entered sound, or delete the entered sound. To change the accent level of an entered note: 1 Select the desired note for changing the accent level. 9 Rhythm Program 1 1 1 2 23 4 5 3 NEXT INSTRUMENT Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key to right. 2 NOTE [E][F] controls Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently selected instrument. In the above notes for example, you can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and 5) are ignored. 3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value. 152 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 2 Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent box. The Accent box allows for finer changes. 1 2 1 Accent box Touch on the box to enable the Accent box. Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 – 127. The minimum setting results in no sound. 2 ACCENT buttons Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels (from “” to “ ”) are available. Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected level. To move an entered note: Select the note you want to move (as in Step 1 on page 152). 2 Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box. 3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock. 9 Rhythm Program 1 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 153 To change the length of an entered note: The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by adjusting the Gate Time. See page 161 for more information. To erase an entered note: 1 2 Select the note you want to erase (as in Step 1 on page 152). Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT section of the display. The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest. You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all notes entered. To erase one instrument: 1 9 Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is assigned. The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed. Selected key Rhythm Program 154 Instrument name 2 Press [CLEAR] in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 3 Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected instrument. A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual The following method can also be used to erase one instrument. While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased. To erase all instruments: 1 Press [CLEAR] in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all instruments. All instruments are instantly erased. When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another instrument, it’s not necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace the sound with the following procedure. 9 To replace the instrument: 1 Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is assigned. The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed. Selected key 2 Rhythm Program Before the operation, stop the rhythm. Instrument name Simultaneously hold down the [CHANGE] button in the display and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the instrument you want to use. The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 155 About Quantize The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing or duration values, so that each note plays with precise timing. You can select nine types of Quantize value. With this button, change the displayed Quantize buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 With Step Write It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of each note you enter. Steps Depending on the Quantize Values 1 2 240 3 120 4 60 6 320 7 160 8 9 80 9 40 Clock 0 120 240 360 480 Rhythm Program (1 beat) Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the finest, least amount of quantization (1/480 beat). With Real Time Write It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play, according to the specified Quantize resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE. Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to play. Original data (you play) After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data 156 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Quarter note length Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern — Real Time Write ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click, play the Upper/Lower keyboards to enter the desired percussion sounds. 1 Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are entered, and the desired drum kit, by following Steps 1 – 3 on page 150. 2 Set the appropriate Quantize value. The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation. For details, refer to page 156. 3 Press the rhythm [START] button in the panel. The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling the Real Time Write operation. Rhythm Program 9 4 5 While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from the Upper and/or Lower keyboards. If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm, you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have started from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in the SETTING Page and listen to the metronome click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or “loop”) for a certain number of measures as set in the SETTING Page. Reference Page Metronome (page 147) Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 157 You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played. To erase an instrument/key assignment: While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances of the selected instrument will be erased from the pattern. When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered percussion notes, you need to stop the rhythm then edit. See page 152, “Editing Entered Percussion Notes.” Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the Electone’s Accompaniment patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save the Accompaniment pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing patterns to the rhythms you create. To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly created rhythm: Reference Page Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern (page 146) 9 1 Press the [SETTING] button at the top of the display to call up the SETTING Page. 2 3 Press the [ASSEMBLE] button. A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy source and destination part. 4 Using the COPY FROM [PART] button, select the accompaniment part you want to copy. 5 Using the COPY TO [PART] button, select the desired accompaniment part (CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for the Rhythmic Chord pattern. Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and [SECTION] buttons, select the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you wish to use. Rhythm Program 158 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy. The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord pattern) has been copied. To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord function: The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm: Step Write and/or Real Time Write. 1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the INPUT Page. 2 Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2, which you want to create for the Rhythmic Chord pattern. If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern, a message appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear the existing data or not. To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR]. Select the desired Voice. Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu. Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons, then select the desired Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is called up for both the Upper and Lower keyboards. 9 NOTE The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the one for the Voice Sections. Rhythm Program 3 Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern. You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1 or Chord 2). When you want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices, select one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 159 4 Set the appropriate Quantize value. For details on the Quantize function, refer to page 156. 5 Set the Gate Time. You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using the GATE TIME buttons in the display, or the Data Control dial. Using the buttons in the display makes coarse changes in the value. Using the Data Control dial makes fine changes. DATA CONTROL Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds. For example, a quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as staccato (short length). Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate time between 450 – 470, and a staccato quarter note may be about 240. 6 9 Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern. The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for entering the rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord (C, E, and G). For information on Step Write, see page 151; for information on Real Time Write, see page 157. Rhythm Program You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in “Editing Entered Percussion Notes” (page 152). To change the gate time of the notes of the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions below. 160 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual To change the Gate Time: 1 Select the note for which you want to change the gate time (see Step 1 on page 152). 2 Press the Gate Time box to enable the box. 3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time. Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original drum patterns using Main Drum and Add Drum, and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2. Moreover, you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts, including Pad, Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page. 2 Press the [VOICE] button in the display. The following display will appear. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 9 Rhythm Program 1 Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the top of the display to call up the VOICE/EFFECT Page. 161 NOTE The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the one for the Voice Sections. 3 Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice. The Voice menu appears. 4 Select the desired Voice, and the Voice menu automatically closes. After selecting the desired Voice, customize the accompaniment to your personal preference by adjusting the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects below. Adjusting Volume and Panning ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Volume and Pan are set in VOICE/EFFECT Page. VOLUME Display 9 1 Rhythm Program 2 1 ON/OFF Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment part. When this is set to OFF, the part is muted. 2 Volume sliders Determines the volume of each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 162 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual PAN Display Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image. Range: L64 – R63 Effect Settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm. Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements. Variation includes many kinds of special effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically. These effects are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page. REVERB Display Rhythm Program 9 Determines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 163 CHORUS Display 1 2 1 CHORUS TYPE Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up the chorus type list. Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically closes. 2 Chorus sliders Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 9 Rhythm Program 164 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual VARIATION Display 1 2 3 1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category) Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing the VARIATION button calls up the effect category list. Reference Page Effect List (page 50) Select the desired effect category, and the list automatically closes. After changing the category, the variation type below automatically changes corresponding to the selected category. 2 TYPE (Variation Type) 9 Rhythm Program Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect type list. LCD Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes. 3 Variation sliders Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 165 Detailed settings for each percussion instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each instrument. 1 Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the top of the display to call up the DRUM SETUP Page. 2 Select the desired part, Main Drum or Add Drum. 3 Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its settings. 9 Rhythm Program 4 Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume, Reverb and Pitch. 1 2 3 166 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 4 5 6 1 Percussion Kit Name Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list, letting you select the desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments you have already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit. 2 Reference Page Percussion Kit List (page 171) PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Range: L63 – R63 3 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 127 4 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 127 5 PITCH COARSE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in semitone (100-cent) steps. Range: -64 – +63 6 PITCH FINE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE ( 5) above. Range: -64 – +63 Saving Rhythm Patterns ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm, up to a maximum of 48 patterns. 9 Rhythm Program 1 If necessary, confirm the contents of the rhythm you want to save. Confirming rhythm patterns before saving The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into one rhythm. Before saving, we recommend that you confirm the contents of each section. Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created into one user rhythm First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on the SETTING Page, then press the [START] button on the panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern you have created. Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION] button, then play it back and confirm that this is what you want to save as Main B. If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data, create the desired data by using the Assemble function (page 148). After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B here), we recommend that you confirm that all other sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is contained in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that unnecessary data. This can reduce the data size of the user rhythm. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 167 2 Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page. If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped. 3 Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. LCD 4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the pattern, or press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for storing rhythms) is shown on the display as a percentage. Remaining Memory 9 Reference Page Confirming rhythm pattens before saving (page 167) Rhythm Program CLEAR PART (page 149) If a “Data full” message appears when you press the [SAVE] button, the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space. If this occurs, check through all fifteen sections for any unnecessary data. After erasing some of the less necessary data, try to save the pattern again. To avoid this, you should periodically check the amount of remaining memory while you are creating your rhythm. After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program (page 169) before turning the power off. Turning off the Electone without quitting Rhythm Pattern Program erases the User Rhythm you have created. 168 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages. 1 Press the [PATTERN] button. If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped. If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns, this simply quits the Rhythm Pattern Program. If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern Program, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the square at the top left in the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved. Recalling User Rhythm Patterns ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected and played from the User buttons in the panel Rhythm section. Refer to Chapter 5, “Selecting rhythms from the User buttons” (page 58). RHYTHM VOLUME MAX SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 9 MIN User Buttons Rhythm Program SEQ. Select “USER” category here. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 169 Selecting Rhythm from an External Media ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can load rhythms from a USB flash memory or other external media and edit and save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded includes not only that of the Electone, but also all Style File Format files. 9 1 2 Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 3 Press [FILE] at the top right in the display. If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing, the rhythm will automatically be stopped. 4 Press the [SELECT] button to select the desired pattern file. The method for selecting a file is the same as that in the M.D.R. section. See page 103 for more information. 5 Press the [LOAD] button to load the pattern. To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page (page 152), then save your created pattern(s) as a User Rhythm (page 167). Press the [PATTERN] button on the panel. Rhythm Program About file types that can be loaded to the Electone This Electone is compatible with Style File Format data. The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style data format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “style”) is made up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3) as rhythm pattern variations. Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight different parts, made up of MIDI sequence data. You can load any patterns (styles) which have been created by an SFF-compatible instrument. Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the panel. 170 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Percussion Kit List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Standard Kit 2 Live!Funk Kit Live!Funk+P Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot H Kick Tight Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Hand Clap Snare Tight H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Hit Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Electro Sticks Kick Tight L Snare Pitched Kick Wet Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Ambient Hand Clap Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Hybrid Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Light Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Room Kit Rock Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Snappy Hand Clap Snare Tight Snap Tom Room 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Room 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Room 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Noisy Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick 2 Kick Gate Side Stick Snare Rock Hand Clap Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Rock 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Rock 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Rock 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Electro Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal* Snare Roll* Hi Q 2 Snare Snap Elec Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Side Stick Snare Noisy 2 Hand Clap Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree 9 Rhythm Program Standard Kit 1 Live!Std Kit Live!Std+P Kit E5 F5 F5 G5 *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 171 Analog Kit C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 F2 G2 A2 B2 9 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 Rhythm Program F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal* Snare Roll* Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Anlg Short Kick Analog Side Stick Anlg Snare Analog Hand Clap Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hat Close Analog Tom Analog 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Tom Analog 3 Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves 2 Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Dance Kit Jazz Kit Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Hi Q Whip Slap* Scratch Dance 1* Scratch Dance 2* Finger Snap Click Noise Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Snare Analog 3 Vinyl Noise* Snare Analog 4 Reverse Cymbal* Reverse Dance 2* Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Snare Dance 1 Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Anlg Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Dry Tom Dance 1 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Dance 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Tom Dance 3 Hi-Hat Open 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Crash Analog Tom Dance 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Anlg Splash Cymbal Cowbell Dance Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Analog Ride Analog Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves 2 Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4* Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2* Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Jazz H Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Snare Jazz L Hand Clap Snare Jazz M Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Brush Kit Live!Brush Kit Live!Brush+P Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Brush Slap 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Hand Clap Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Brush 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Brush 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Symphony Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft 2 Open Rim Shot Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Side Stick Band Snare Hand Clap Band Snare 2 Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Hand Cymbal High Tom Hand Cymbal S Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Hand Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Hand Cymbal 2 S Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree EL Kit 1 Scratch Concert BD Noise Percussion Bass Drum March Analog BD Short Synth Tom 3 Analog BD Long Synth Tom 2 Synth Bass Drum Synth Tom 1 Bass Drum Attack Bass Drum Heavy Tom 4 Bass Drum Light Tom 3 Orchestra Cymbal Snare Drum Roll* Tom 2 SD Brush Roll Tom 1 SD Brush Shot 2 Tom Brush Shot 4 SD Brush Shot 1 Snare Drum Heavy Tom Brush Shot 3 Snare Drum Light Tom Brush Shot 2 SD Accent 2 SD Accent 1 Tom Brush Shot 1 SD Reverb 2 Snare Drum Rim 2 SD Reverb 1 Snare Drum Rim 1 Synth Snare Drum Analog SD Triangle Mute Tambourine Triangle Open Castanet Claves Cabasa Finger Snap Hand Claps Crash Cymbal 2 Hi-Hat Close Crash Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Open Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Ride Cymbal Cup Cym Brush Shot Cymbal March Analog HH Close Orch Cymbal Roll Analog HH Open Orch Cymbal Orch Cymbal Mute Tam-Tam E5 F5 F5 G5 *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. 172 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 F2 G2 A2 Maracas High Surdo Mute Maracas Low Surdo Muff Surdo Rim Cuica High Surdo Open Cuica Middle Tamborim Mute Cuica Low Tamborim Open Pandeiro Bongo High Conga Slide Bongo Low Conga Slap Conga Muff Bongo Mute Conga High Bongo Slap Conga Low Timbale 1 High Timbale 1 Low Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 Low Timbale 3 High Woodblock High Timbale 3 Low Woodblock Mid Timbale 4 High Woodblock Low Timbale 4 Low Vibraslap Triangle Mute Tambourine Triangle Open Castanet Claves Cabasa Finger Snap B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Wind Bell Down Agogo High Wind Bell Up Agogo Low Bells Cowbell 4 Shaker Cowbell 3 Guiro Short Cowbell 2 Guiro Long Cowbell 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 2 Taiko 1 Ohdaiko 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Ohtsuzumi 1 Kakegoe 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Kakegoe 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kakegoe 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 1 Live!Studio Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Studio L Sticks Kick Ambience H Open Rim Shot Kick Ambience L Kick Studio Side Stick Snare Studio M Hand Clap Snare Studio L Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit Hand Clap Cutting Noise 1* Cutting Noise 2* String Slap* Flute Key Click* Shower* Thunder* Wind* Stream* Bubble* Feed* Dog* Horse* Bird Tweet* Phone Call* Door Squeak* Door Slam* Scratch Cut* Scratch H 3* Wind Chime* Telephone Ring* CarEngnIgnition* Car Tires Squeal* Car Passing* Car Crash* Siren* Train* Jet Plane* Starship* Burst* Roller Coaster* Submarine* Laugh* Scream* Punch* Heart Beat* Foot Steps* Machine Gun* Laser Gun* Explosion* Firework* Nakarazan Dom Cabasa Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Zagrouda H Zagrouda L* Kick Soft Side Stick Snare Soft Arabic Hand Clap Snare Drum Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Duhulla Dom Tambourine Duhulla Tak Cowbell Duhulla Sak Claves Doff Dom Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Katem Tak Doff Tak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Edge* Tabla Flam Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 3 Tabel Tak Sagat 2 Rik Dom Rik Tak 2 Rik Finger 1 Rik Tak 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo* Rik Sak Rik Tik Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide* Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide* Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Paila H Cowbell Top Guiro Short Guiro Long* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Tambourine Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Maracas Shaker Cabasa Cuica Mute Cuica Open 9 Rhythm Program EL Kit 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Wind Chime E5 F5 G5 F5 Ghost* Maou* *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 173 3 Rhythm Sequence Program With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can string together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make complete rhythm compositions. You can save four rhythm compositions (each can contain up to 140 bars) to the Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can be played back in succession, letting you divide a song into parts and play back the rhythm data as desired. Here are a couple of example applications: • When you want to play more than two songs in a medley, save the rhythm composition for each song to a separate sequence button. You can then recall each desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the song is saved. • When you want to practice a song in separate sections (for example, separately practicing the verse, chorus and bridge), divide the song into the relevant parts. For example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the main chorus part to the [SEQ. 2] button, the ending to the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button. You can also play through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence. Selecting a Sequence ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page Programming a Sequence (page 175) Copying a Sequence (page 183) There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence: creating your own sequence from scratch, or copying and editing an existing sequence that is similar to the sequence you want to create. 1 Press the [SEQUENCE] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. The MENU Page of the Sequence display appears. DISPLAY SELECT 9 Rhythm Program VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up the Rhythm Sequence Program function. 174 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 2 Press one of the Sequence buttons ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the left half in the display to select the rhythm sequence number you want to edit. The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section lights. RHYTHM SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the display, you can press one of the sequence buttons in the Rhythm section on the panel to select the sequence number. This selects the Sequence number, to which a rhythm composition can be saved. If you want to edit existing a rhythm composition, refer to “Copying a Sequence” on page 183. If you want to program a rhythm sequence from scratch, refer to “Programming a Sequence” below. Programming a Sequence ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top right of the display to call up the RHYTHM Page. 2 Press the rhythm button corresponding to the rhythm you want to enter to the sequence. If you press User button [1] or [2], you can select a rhythm of your own creation (User rhythm). The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm button is displayed. RHYTHM 9 Rhythm Program 1 VOLUME MAX SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 175 3 NOTE When entering an Intro section, check the number of bars at the top of the display. Select the desired rhythm from the displayed rhythm menu. 4 Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill in A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, or Break) by pressing one of the rhythm control buttons on the panel. The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display. 5 Press the [SET] button in the display. One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in the rhythm row on the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor (colored orange) will automatically move to one step right. A maximum of 140 bars can be entered to a single sequence. When you select an ending pattern and press the [SET] button, an entire ending pattern (more than one bar) is entered. You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern. 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to enter the rhythm and create your own rhythm composition. NOTE When you press the ENDING [1] button while the Main section is playing back, a fillin pattern will be called up before the Ending 1 pattern. In the Rhythm Sequence program, however, a fill in pattern is not called up when Ending 1 is entered to the Sequence. 9 Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases any sequences you have made. Before turning the power off, quit the Rhythm Sequence Program (page 181). Rhythm Program 176 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Auditioning a Sequence ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes. 1 Move the cursor to the desired position for playback. Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or the POSITION buttons on the display. DATA CONTROL 2 Press the rhythm [START] button on the panel. SYNCHRO START START BREAK The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START] button again stops playback. Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence 9 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Rhythm Program You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered, or delete the entered rhythm from the sequence. 2 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 177 1 POSITION These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored orange) along the rhythm row in the display. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left. Moves the cursor one step to the right. Moves the cursor five steps to the right. 2 DATA These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the rhythm row. NOTE When you insert an ending pattern into the editing sequence, any existing rhythm data that follows an Ending pattern is automatically deleted. SET For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row, or for replacing a pattern at the cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position. This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern. INSERT For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position. The new rhythm is entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern. Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function’s capacity of 140. If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be executed. DELETE For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position. When the ending pattern is selected, pressing the [DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern (more than one bar). 9 Rhythm Program CLEAR For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. 178 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Programming a Registration Sequence ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations automatically called up in sequence, when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you program the timing (bar/beat/clock) at which the Registration is changed. You can also program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence. A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence. With this feature, you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback. 1 NOTE If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing, the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded. Press the [REGIST] button at the top right in the display to call up the Registration Sequence display. The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display. The entered Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the display. 13 3 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 D. Rhythm Program 2 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to change the Registration (1 beat = 96 Clock). DATA CONTROL When using the Data Control dial, first press the number you wish to change in the display, then turn the dial. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 179 4 Press the DATA [SET] button in the display. The Registration number appears in the display (in the timing order), indicating that the Registration is entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered. If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar/Beat/Clock, the last entered one takes priority. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set the Registration Sequence. Entering Next Regist: When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence, the next registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the rhythm sequence. 1 Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to enter the Next Regist (1 beat = 96 clock). 2 Press the NEXT REGIST [INSERT] button in the display. The Next Regist mark appears at the timing point you set in step 1, indicating that the Next Regist is entered. Next Regist Loading Time • Loading Next Regist may take a few seconds (the time may differ depending on the size of the data to be loaded). • When using a floppy disk instead of USB flash memory, the loading time will be longer than when using USB flash memory. • Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways: using right footswitch and programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence. Loading time is the same regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data. 9 Rhythm Program 180 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Editing an Existing Registration Sequence ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence (Registration number or Next Regist data) from the sequence. To move an entry: 1 Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data (Registration number or Next Regist) you want to move. 2 Change the position by pressing the Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in the display. 3 To move the Registration number timing, press the DATA [SET] button. To move the Next Regist timing, press the NEXT REGIST [SET] button. The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and displayed in the proper order. To erase an entry: 1 Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data (Registration number or Next Regist) you want to delete. 2 Press the [DELETE] button to delete the data. 9 Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Rhythm Program You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of its display pages. When you quit, the sequence you have made will be automatically saved. To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program: Press the [SEQUENCE] button on the panel. The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed. When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the sequence is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being saved. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 181 Playing Rhythm Sequences ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created: 1 Press the appropriate Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the panel. The SEQ button’s lamp lights. RHYTHM VOLUME MAX SEQ. SEQ. 1 2 SEQ. SEQ. 3 4 MARCH WALTZ SWING& JAZZ POPS R&B 1 LATIN WORLD MUSIC BALLAD ROCK DANCE 2 MIN 2 Press the rhythm [START] button. The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback. When one of the four rhythm sequences is playing, each programmed rhythm that plays is indicated by the lit LED of the Rhythm buttons. The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback, if the sequence includes a Registration Sequence. Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end. If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence, press the [START] button again to resume playback. Playing All Sequences in Order ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order, one after another. 9 Rhythm Program 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their LEDs are lit. 2 Press the rhythm [START] button. The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be played back not in the order you pressed them, but in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140pattern memory limit of a single sequence. Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back automatically cancels the pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing. 182 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch: You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch. 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their LEDs are lit. 2 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel to call up the Footswitch display, LEFT Page. 3 4 Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP. (See page 185 for information about the Footswitch settings.) Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the sequence on. Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence playback cancels the Rhythm Sequence. When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences (SEQ. buttons), pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again starts the next sequence. Copying a Sequence ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can copy a rhythm sequence stored on a sequence button to another button. You can also add a rhythm sequence to the end of another rhythm sequence. Rhythm Program 9 1 Press the EDIT [COPY] or [ADD] button in the Sequence Menu page. The Copy From or Add From Display appears. 2 Select the number of the desired rhythm sequence program to which you want to copy or to which you want to add. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. 3 Press the [COPY] or [ADD] button to copy or add the rhythm sequence. Press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 4 If necessary, edit the sequence. Refer to the section “Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence” on page 177 and/or “Editing an Existing Registration Sequence” on page 181. NOTE If you add a rhythm sequence to another rhythm sequence that has an ending at the end, the section will automatically change to MAIN A and the new sequence will be added after the MAIN A part. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 183 4 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the Rhythm Pattern Program) and Rhythm Sequence (created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to external media, such as USB flash memory. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)” on page 111 for instructions. When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the Electone, be sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is running. 9 Rhythm Program 184 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch the effect on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. Contents 1 Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 3 Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 • Controlling the Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 • Controlling Glide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 • Controlling Rotary Speaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 • Controlling Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 • Controlling the Rhythm Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 2 Knee Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 • Controlling Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Controlling Melody On Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Controlling Lead Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Controlling the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 189 190 190 1 Footswitches The Electone has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of the following functions: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary speaker. See page 85 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch. The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here. Right Footswitch Left Footswitch Expression Pedal 10 1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button. 2 Press the [LEFT] button at the top right of the display to call up the LEFT Page. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals 10 185 DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE NOTE U.ORGAN FLUTES When the Next Page function of the score display is assigned to the left foot switch, and if rhythm, glide and/or rotary speaker are assigned to the left foot switch as well, pressing the foot switch performs both the assigned function and the Next Page function. For details on the Next Page function, refer to page 123. L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES In this display, you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary Speaker. If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not control any function. Controlling the Rhythm ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left Footswitch. 1 2 4 Reference Page 10 Rhythm Structure (page 52) 1 3 5 STOP Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Footswitch. Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals 2 BREAK When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns on. This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. 3 MAIN A – MAIN D These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel. For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A. 186 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3 These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when the INTRO [1] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1. 5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3 These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when the ENDING [1] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops. Controlling Glide ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. 1 2 Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. 1 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/ LOWER2) Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide function is to be applied. 10 2 TIME ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed slower. Range: 1 – 5 187 Controlling Rotary Speaker ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by using the Left Footswitch. Rotary Speaker (page 48) When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute Voice. For details, see page 48. 2 Knee Lever The Knee Lever, located on the underside of the keyboard panel, can be used to turn one of the following on and off: Sustain effect, Melody On Chord function, Lead Slide effect, or Solo function. Controlling Sustain ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can control on/off status of sustain for the Upper and Lower keyboards by using the Knee Lever. Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled. 10 Reference Page 1 Make sure that the Upper and/or Lower Sustain buttons have been turned on. 2 Fold the Knee Lever down. Sustain is off when the Knee Lever is folded down. Sustain (page 47) Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals Folding down 188 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual SUSTAIN UPPER (KNEE) LOWER (KNEE) PEDAL 3 To apply sustain, press the Knee Lever to the right. Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Knee Lever is pressed. Releasing the Knee Lever turns sustain off. 1 When the Knee Lever is folded up: Sustain is applied constantly, as long as the front panel Sustain buttons are on. 2 When the Knee Lever is vertical: Sustain is cancelled. 3 When the Knee Lever is continuously pressed to the right: Sustain is on. 1 On 2 Off 3 On Pressing to the right Controlling Melody On Chord ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button on the front panel. The Melody On Chord section appears in the right half of the display. 2 Set the KNEE control to “ON,” and select one of the modes. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. Reference Page MDR Melody On Chord (page 64) FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET 10 U.ORGAN FLUTES 3 Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee when you want to apply the M.O.C. effect. The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as the Knee Lever is pressed. When you release the Knee Lever, the M.O.C. effect is cancelled. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 189 Controlling Lead Slide ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page Voice Condition Display (page 39) 1 Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice section to which you want to apply the Lead Slide effect. 2 Press the [KNEE] button of the Slide section on the display. 3 Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee when you want to apply the Slide effect. The Slide effect is applied as long as the Knee Lever is pressed. Releasing the Knee Lever, cancels the Lead Slide effect. Controlling the Solo Function ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Knee Lever. See page 27 for more information. 3 Expression Pedals 10 Reference Page Getting Started (page 11) Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play. Moreover, the ELS-01C has another Expression Pedal, the 2nd Expression Pedal. The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the Rhythm. The explanation on the 2nd Expression Pedal is given here. Expression Pedal 2nd Expression Pedal (ELS-01C) 190 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 1 2 Press the [UTILITY] button on the front panel. The Utility display appears. Press the [EXP.] button in the upper right of the display to call up the EXP. (Expression) Page. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the 2nd Expression Pedal. If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to ON, both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal. Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal. Controlling Pitch Bend ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals 1 10 MODE Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each step changes the pitch range by a semitone. Range: 1 – 12 The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation (over +/- two semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over +/- one octave). 2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND) Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied, and turns the function ON. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 191 Controlling the Rhythm Tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 1 2 MODE Determines the range of tempo change. Range: 1 – 12 The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo change (70% – 140%); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%). 2 TEMPO When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.” When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and pressing it back with your heel slows it down. 10 Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals 192 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. (The settings here cannot be recorded to the Music Data Recorder.) 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. 2 Press the [PITCH] button at the top right of the display to call up the PITCH Page. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE U.ORGAN FLUTES L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES 1 2 In this display, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings by using the buttons on the display or the Data Control Dial. 1 TRANSPOSE Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half-steps (semitones). Range: -6 – +6 2 NOTE The Transpose/Pitch setting here is not applied to an XG Song. PITCH Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3). Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz Transpose and Pitch Controls 11 You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice Condition display. For more information, see page 42. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 193 12 Internet Direct Connection This convenient, powerful feature lets you directly connect your Electone to the Internet. In this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the Internet Glossary (page 207). Contents 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet. . . . . . . . . 194 2 Accessing the Website from the Electone. . . . . . . . . 195 • Scrolling the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 • Following Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 • Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page. . . 198 • Return to the Previous Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 • Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 • Editing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 • Changing the Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 NOTE Depending on the Internet connection, you may not be able to connect to two or more devices (for example, a computer and the instrument), depending on the contract with the provider. This means you cannot connect with the Electone. If in doubt, check your contract or contact your provider. Reference Page Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adapter (page 216) 3 About the Internet Settings Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 • Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 • LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 • Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 • Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 4 Exiting from the Internet Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 5 Initializing Internet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 6 Glossary of Internet Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself. To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider. Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router) Router Cable type Modem* No router capability LAN cable LAN cable USB-LAN adapter 12 * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Internet Direct Connection 194 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with router) NOTE Some types of modems require an optional hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as computer, musical instrument, etc.). LAN cable ADSL modem Router capability LAN cable USB-LAN adapter Connection example 3: Wireless connection Modem* Router Access Point USB wireless LAN adapter * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. 2 Accessing the Website from the Electone To access the website, press the [INTERNET] button while the instrument is connected to the Internet. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY A.B.C. M.O.C. MDR FOOT SWITCH UTILITY INTERNET RHYTHM PROGRAM VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE 12 L.ORGAN ROTARY SP SPEED FLUTES Control Menu Browser Internet Direct Connection U.ORGAN FLUTES ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 195 In the Control Menu located in the left part of the display, you can control the displayed website and set various settings. The browser display, to the right of the control menu, is the area in which the website is displayed. Reference Page Changing the Home Page (page 202) The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet is called the “home page.” If you want to return to the home page from another website, press the [HOME] button in the Control Menu. Scrolling the Display ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side or bottom of the display. Touch and move the scroll bar to view those parts of the page that are not shown. Following Links ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To select the link, press it (the button or text) directly on the display. The touch panel will not sound when you press a link, even if the touch panel sound is set to ON in the Utility Display (page 16). 12 Internet Direct Connection 196 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Monitoring the Internet Connection Status The four icons and a message indicate the current Internet connection status. 1234 5 1 Offline indicator ( ) This is shown when the instrument is not connected to the Internet. When this appears, you cannot view any web pages. 2 Communication Status indicator ( ) This flashes when the web page is being loaded, indicating that communication with the site is in progress. The indicator lights continuously when loading is finished (communication is established). 3 SSL indicator ( ) This is shown when the opened website uses SSL, and it indicates that data is encrypted before transmission. 4 Wireless LAN indicator When you connect the Electone to Internet using wireless LAN, an icon indicating the condition of the connection is displayed. If the signal to the Electone becomes weak or there is no signal from the access point, move the Electone nearer to the access point. : Strong : Normal : Weak (not connected to Internet) : No signal (not connected to Internet) 5 Communication status indicator The following three messages will be shown depending on the status of accessing web site. Indicates loading of the web page. Web page has been displayed. Indicates the web page has been loaded and the web page is completely displayed. Disconnected. Indicates the Electone is offline (not connected to Internet). 12 Internet Direct Connection Now opening web page ... ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 197 Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the page, or to try reloading), press the [REFRESH] button. To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press the [STOP] button. Return to the Previous Web Page ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To return to a previously selected web page, press the [BACK] button. To return to the page selected before pressing the [BACK] button, press the [FORWARD] button. 12 Internet Direct Connection 198 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page can be instantly called up in the future. 1 With the desired page currently selected, press the [BOOKMARK] button in the control menu. The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks. The title of the web page registered to the selected bookmark is shown below the list. 2 Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the [ADD] button. Page title Internet Direct Connection 12 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 199 3 Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the desired position directly, or using the [UP]/[DOWN] button or the Data Control Dial. DATA CONTROL 4 To save the bookmark, press the [EXECUTE] button, or press the [CANCEL] button to cancel. 5 To return to the browser, press the [EXIT] button. Opening a Bookmarked Page: 1 Press the [BOOKMARK] button in the control menu to call up the Bookmark display, then select the desired bookmark. 2 Press the [JUMP] button to open the page of the selected bookmark. 12 Internet Direct Connection 200 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Editing Bookmarks ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the order of your bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 UP/DOWN Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list. 2 JUMP Opens the web page of the selected bookmark. 3 ADD Used when saving a bookmark (page 199). 4 CHANGE Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing this button calls up the display for entering characters. For details on entering characters, see page 108. 5 DELETE Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list. 6 MOVE Changes the order of the bookmarks. Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [MOVE] button. The left part of the display changes, letting you select the new position for the bookmark. 2 Select the intended position by pressing the desired position in the display, or by using the [UP]/[DOWN] buttons or Data Control dial. 3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the [EXECUTE] button. 12 Internet Direct Connection 7 1 CLOSE This closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 201 Changing the Home Page ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can specify any desired page on the site to be the home page. In advance, open the page you wish to set as your new home page. 1 Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the Internet Setting display. 2 Press the [Browser] button to call up the Browser Page. 3 Press the [Register] button of the “Set this page as Home.” 4 12 Internet Direct Connection 202 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual To return to the browser, press the [EXECUTE] button in the control menu. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [YES] to return to the browser. 3 About the Internet Settings Display From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the Internet connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet Settings display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others. Browser ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Encode Selects the character code encoding for the browser. 2 Home page Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page. 3 Set this page as Home For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 202. 4 Restore default Home Restores the home page setting. 5 Show images Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off. 6 Character entry keys This setting lets you select the character order of the virtual keyboard for entering characters. When this is set to “Alphabetical,” the keys are in alphabetical order. When this is set to “ASCII,” the keys are arranged as a conventional “QWERTY” keyboard. 7 Time 12 zone Internet Direct Connection This determines the time setting for the browser. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 203 LAN ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● In this display page, you can make settings for the LAN connection. These settings are needed for not only wired LAN connection but also wireless LAN connection. 1 2 Make a written note of these settings, in case you have to enter the settings again. Use DHCP 3 DNS server 1 DNS server 2 IP address Subnet mask Gateway 1 Use DHCP Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP, select “ON (set DNS automatically)” here. 2 DNS server 1 / DNS server 2 These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manually)” or “OFF.” 3 IP address / Subnet mask / Gateway These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.” Wireless LAN ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● In this display page, you can make settings for the wireless LAN connection. These settings must be the same as the settings on the Access Point. 1 2 3 4 5 12 Make a written note of these settings, in case you have to enter the settings again. SSID Channel On Off WEP key type ASCII Hexadecimal WEP key length 64 bit 128 bit Internet Direct Connection WEP key 204 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Ch Encryption 1 Access Point Pressing the [Display Information] button calls up the access point list. It shows the access points near the Electone. Once you select the desired access point and press the [OK] button, a message appears prompting confirmation of whether to transfer the access point settings to the Electone or not. When you select [YES], the SSID, Channel and Encryption settings are transferred to the Electone. 2 SSID NOTE An access point that is encrypted in a non-WEP format cannot be used. NOTE If no signal from the access point is received, the access point cannot be listed. Determines the SSID setting. 3 NOTE Channel The WEP key type, length and WEP key are not entered automatically. You have to enter them by yourself if you want to use an access point that is encrypted. Determines the channel. 4 Encryption Determines whether or not the data is encrypted. 5 WEP key type / WEP key length / WEP key These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the type and length of the encryption key. Others ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 3 4 5 1 Proxy server / Proxy port / Non-proxy server NOTE Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for a main, nonproxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server. 2 When using two or more nonproxy servers, separate each server name with a comma. Delete cookies Deletes the contents of all saved cookies. 3 Delete all bookmarks Deletes all saved bookmarks. 4 12 Initialize setup 5 Internet Direct Connection Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializing Internet Settings” on page 206. Connection information Shows detailed information on the current connection. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 205 4 Exiting from the Internet Display Pressing any button other than [INTERNET] button quits the Internet Direct Connection and closes the website display. Pressing the [INTERNET] button again automatically opens the previously opened website. 5 Initializing Internet Settings The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize operation of the Electone (page 21); Internet settings must be initialized separately, as explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays, including those related to Internet connection. 1 Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the Internet Settings display. 2 Press the [Others] button at the top right of the display. 3 Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the Internet settings. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 4 Select [YES] to initialize the Internet settings, or select [NO] to abort the operation. 12 Internet Direct Connection 206 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 6 Glossary of Internet Terms An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, highvolume data communication. Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages. Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each time you visit the site. DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet. DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses. Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other local storage device — much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument. Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards. Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website. Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile phones and other devices. IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location on the network. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. Link A highlighted word, button or icon within a web page that, when clicked, opens another web page. Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa. NTP Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network. For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for cookies and SSL. Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider. Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router. Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services. Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection. Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names. SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet. Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks. URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.” Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 12 Internet Direct Connection Broadband 207 13 Connections On the underside of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/ output terminals and miscellaneous controls. Contents 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2 Connection Examples – External Devices . . . . . . . . . 211 •Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 •Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 •Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder 213 •Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the Built-in Speakers of the Electone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 •Connecting a Microphone or Guitar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 •Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone . . . . . . . 215 •Controlling the Electone from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . 216 •Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adapter . . . . . . 216 3 Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 4 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 •What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 •MIDI Messages of the Electone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 •MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 5 MIDI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For details on connecting to external devices, see page 211. 4 INPUT VOLUME MIN MAX 1 Reference Page Connecting a Microphone or Guitar (page 214) 1 MIC. / LINE IN MIC. 2 LINE PHONES 3 INPUT VOLUME knob For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC./LINE IN jack. 2 MIC./LINE IN jack For connecting a mono input, such as microphone or guitar. The Electone outputs the microphone or guitar sounds, with reverb processing, through the built-in speaker system. 3 MIC./LINE switch When connecting a microphone or other electric/electronic instrument to the MIC./ LINE IN jack, make sure to set this level gain switch appropriately, depending on the device you use. Reference Page 13 Using Headphones (page 211) 4 For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing you to play without disturbing others. Connections 208 PHONES jacks ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 AUX IN L / L+R R 6 AUX OUT L / L+R R 7 AUX OUT L R (LEVEL FIXED) Reference Page AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device. The signal from the connected external device sounds from the Electone’s built-in speakers. 6 AUX OUT (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks Reference Pages This pair of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker system. The output level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial. 7 Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the Built-in Speakers of the Electone (page 213) Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System (page 211) AUX OUT (RCA; L, R) jacks (LEVEL FIXED) This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled. Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder (page 213) 13 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 209 Connections 5 8 OPTICAL USB OUT TO DEVICE IN MIDI OUT USB unit 9 ) Reference Page Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder (page 213) Reference Pages Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 100) Internet Direct Connection (page 194) 8 OPTICAL OUT terminal For connection using an optical-fiber cable. This terminal outputs a digital signal of 44.1 kHz, 24 bits. 9 USB TO DEVICE terminals For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB flash memory or floppy disk drive) or a USB-LAN adapter for connecting to the Internet. A USB unit has been installed to one of the terminals for convenient and easy connection/disconnection of a USB device. Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adapter (page 216) Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (page 224) USB unit Reference Pages Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone (page 215) ) For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface. Controlling the Electone from an External Device (page 216) Connection with Computer (page 217) What is MIDI? (page 218) 13 Connections 210 MIDI IN/OUT terminals ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 2 Connection Examples – External Devices Before connecting the Electone to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power of the components on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. Using Headphones ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks). Two people can enjoy listening to the Electone together by connecting two pairs of headphones to the two jacks. PHONES Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can connect your Electone to external speakers. If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX OUT L/L+R jack (standard phone). Speaker (Left) R Speaker (Right) 13 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 211 Connections AUX OUT L/L+R Connection example: Using a mixer for live performance Generally, when you use the Electone on stage (in concert, etc.), you should connect it to a mixer. By using a mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality of each component. To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the Electone. The Electone features different types of AUX OUT jacks, allowing you to choose the appropriate one for your specific application. Jacks Output Type Location AUX OUT phone jacks L/L+R, R Balanced* Level is controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial. Left underside of the keyboard AUX OUT RCA pin jacks L, R Unbalanced* LEVEL FIXED Left underside of the keyboard *The balanced line is good for long cable runs, or for low-level signals since it picks up less noise than unbalanced lines. Main Speakers (ex. Powerd-amp Speakers) Monitar Speakers Sound Sound Sound Sound Keyboards MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER AUX OUT MIC. Sound Mixer STAGEA Power-on Procedure Before turning the power on to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0) then turn on the power in the following order: (1) Electone and external keyboard(s) (2) Mixer (3) Powered Speaker To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for each devices, then turn off the power in the reverse order (3 → 2 → 1). 13 Connections 212 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can record your Electone performance to an external recorder, such as an MD recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT jacks. Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with exceptionally high-quality digital sound (providing the external recorder has an Optical In terminal). Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks (RCA or standard phone, depending on the connectors of your particular recorder). Cassette tape recorder, etc. Cassette tape recorder, etc. LINE IN L R NOTE If you want to record the sound input from the AUX IN jack together with the Electone sound, use the AUX OUT standard phone jack on the underside of the keyboard. OPTICAL IN AUX OUT L OPTICAL OUT R Audio cable Optical digital cable Recording Recording Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the Built-in Speakers of the Electone ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Connect the AUX IN jacks of the Electone with the LINE OUT of an external device, such as a CD player. The sound from the CD player is output from Electone’s built-in speakers. First turn on the power of the external device, then that of the Electone. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Stereo audio system LINE OUT R L/L+R AUX IN L/L+R R Playing If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 213 Connections 13 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● By connecting a microphone to the Electone, you can enjoy singing along with your own performance. The Electone outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built-in speakers. 1 Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack (standard 1/4"phone jack). A dynamic microphone is recommended. MIC./LINE IN 2 Set the MIC./LINE switch to the MIC position when connecting a microphone, or the LINE position when connecting a guitar or other high-level output device. MIC. LINE NOTE When you’re not sure which position is the best, first set it to LINE. If the output level is too low, switch to the MIC position. MIC. LINE When connecting a guitar When connecting a microphone 3 Use the INPUT VOLUME knob to set the microphone volume. INPUT VOLUME MIN 13 Connections 214 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual MAX To adjust the volume/reverb: 1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility display. 2 Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL Page, adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone, and the volume. Reference Page Reverb (page 46) No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume here, unless you turn the INPUT VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly, no reverb can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here, unless you raise the total reverb level with the panel REVERB button. Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your Electone.) The Electone transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with note information, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device. Tone generator Reference Page What is MIDI? (page 218) NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transmitted. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI cable MIDI messages ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 215 Connections 13 Controlling the Electone from an External Device ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be received. You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your Electone.) MIDI keyboard or synthesizer MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI cable MIDI messages Reference Pages Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (page 224) Internet Direct Connection (page 194) Formatting External Media (page 102) Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adapter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices (such as the USB flash memory or UD-FD01 floppy disk drive) for saving your Electone data, and/or a USB-LAN adapter for direct connection to the Internet. When you use USB devices, refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 100. NOTE If necessary, use a USB hub. Only self-powered (battery or external power supply) types can be used. Up to two USB hubs can be used. 13 Connections 216 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 3 Connection with Computer By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the Electone to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the Electone and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the OUT terminal on the Electone to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the other connecting the IN terminal on the Electone to the MIDI OUT terminal on the interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable. NOTE Depending on your particular MIDI interface, you may have to connect the MIDI Interface and the computer with a serial cable. Computer IN OUT MIDI MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI Interface (for example, UX16) Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your Electone. NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transferred to/from the computer. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 217 Connections 13 4 MIDI This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your Electone. What is MIDI? ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Digital instrument note production Acoustic guitar note production L Internal amp Tone generator Internal amp (Electric circuit) R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Example of Keyboard Information Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data – including rhythm patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc. – also consist of MIDI messages. 13 Connections 218 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. MIDI Messages of the Electone ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several MIDI devices to communicate with each other. Channel Messages Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard. Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127. For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 226 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 236. • Program Change Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone. For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 226 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 236. • Control Change Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through specific Control Change numbers. For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the Electone, see MIDI Data Format on page 226 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 236. System Messages • System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration data. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 219 Connections 13 MIDI Channels ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report NEWS 1 2 NEWS 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard, channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 221 for more information. 13 Connections 220 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 MIDI Control When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the Electone is controlled. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel to call up the Utility Display. 2 Press the [MIDI] button at the top right of the display to call up the MIDI Page. 1 2 3 3-1 1 3-2 3 -3 OUTPUT For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard (the Upper keyboard, the Lower keyboard and the Pedalboard) as well as the Expression pedal and 2nd Expression pedal. The MIDI messages for each keyboard and Expression pedal will be sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device. (The ELS-01 does not show the 2nd Expression pedal.) Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop-up menu. After you select the desired channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes. The Expression pedal and 2nd Expression pedal can be set to “OFF” (MIDI information will not be transmitted). On the 2nd Expression pedal, CC#4 by which MIDI information is output as Second Expression can be also set. MIDI OUT FILTER NOTE Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone. After Touch and Rhythm start/stop are automatically filtered on the ELS-01. In addition, Horizontal Touch and Second Expression are automatically filtered on the ELS-01C. Set the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON. If you set Second Expression to on in the MIDI OUT FILTER parameters, the setting in the OUTPUT (1) parameters will be disabled. 13 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 221 Connections 2 3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (INTERNAL) or the connected device (EXTERNAL). 3 - 1 LEAD 1 Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices. INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the Electone. (If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower keyboard.) EXT. (External): The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4. 3 - 2 SYNC. To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device, you can use either the instrument's internal clock (INT.) or MIDI clock signals from the external device (EXT.). INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own internal clock. EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock signals from the external device (MIDI). 3 - 3 EXPRESSION Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to AUTO. AUTO: Internal and External is automatically switched. INT. (Internal): You can manually control the expression pedal even during M.D.R. playback. EXT. (External): While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a USB flash memory or received MIDI data.) 13 Connections 222 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 14 Appendix Bench Assembly Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. Bench for the ELS-01 Bench for the ELS-01C ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 1 Turn the bench board over and install two legs for the front side. Tighten the bolts using the included wrench (as shown). Make sure to put washers between the bolts and the bench board. R Turn the bench board over and install the legs with the included eight screws. Tighten the screws using the included hexagonal wrench (as shown). Make sure to put washers between the screws and the bench board. Washer Bolt R L L Logo is written on back Logo is written on back Install the foot rest to the legs with the included four screws, using a screwdriver. Bolt 2 3 Washer Install the foot rest to the legs with the included four screws, using a screwdriver. Install the two legs for the back side. If the bench screws become loose due to extensive longterm use, tighten them periodically using the included tool and a screwdriver. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Appendix 2 223 14 Installing Optional Hardware Installing the Floppy Disk Drive ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 2 Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. 3 Remove the USB unit from the Electone by disconnecting the USB cable and removing the four screws. 4 Put the USB unit on top of the UD-FD01 floppy disk drive as shown. Make sure that the screwdriver head snugly fits the slots of the screw head. In particular, avoid applying excessive force with an ill-fitting screw driver; doing so may strip the slots and damage the screws. NOTE None of the included screws are necessary for installing the UDFD01 to this Electone. 1 Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. Dual-sided adhesive tape Appendix Align the four holes of these two units. 14 224 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 5 Install these two units together with the screws removed in step 3. First temporarily install the right-front screw, then insert and partially fix the remaining three screws. Finally, firmly tighten all four screws. First install this screw. Connect the USB cables for both units to the USB TO DEVICE terminals. Appendix 6 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 225 14 MIDI Data Format 1. Channel Messages “˛” indicates “Not available.” “Ø” indicates “Available.” 1.1 EL Mode Code (Hexadecimal) Appendix 14 226 Receive Transmit 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off Function 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note Off Note On 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* ˛ ˛ ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch ˛ Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch 5-14ch (16ch)* Bn,10, 00-7F VA After Touch 1ch (1ch)* Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 5-14ch ˛ XG ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 16ch (4ch)* 16ch (4ch)** Remarks Control LEAD 1 (ELS-01 not transmitted) XG Control XG UK (ELS-01C only) Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 5-14ch ˛ XG Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch 16ch ˛ 16ch XG Control Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 5-14ch 1ch 2ch (4ch)* ˛ 5-14ch (1ch)* (2ch)* ˛ (1-16ch)* UK LK LEAD 1 2nd Expression (ELS-01C only) XG Receive Transmit Remarks 1-16ch ˛ * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 221). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 1.2 XG Mode Code (Hexadecimal) Function 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note On Note Off (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation ˛ 1-16ch Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression ˛ 16ch (4ch)** Control LEAD 1 (ELS-01C only) ˛ (16ch)* Control 1-16ch VA After Touch ˛ (1ch)* Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛ UK (ELS-01C only) Appendix Bn,10, 00-7F ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 227 14 Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 1-16ch ˛ Cn, 00-7F Program Change Remarks 16ch Control (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch Dn, 00-7F After Touch En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1-16ch UK LK 2nd Expression (ELS-01C only) 1-16ch (1ch)* (2ch)* (1-16ch)* ˛ Receive Transmit Remarks * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 221). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 2. Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Function F8 Clock Ø* Ø FA Start Ø Ø FC Stop Ø Ø FE Active Sensing Ø Ø FF Reset ˛ ˛ * Received only when in the Ext. mode 3. System Exclusive Messages 3.1 Format Universal Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Appendix 14 228 Receive Transmit F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Volume Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø ˛ ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Message Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø ˛ Universal Non-Realtime Messages Receive Transmit F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7 XN Code (Hexadecimal) GM ON Message Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7 XN GM2 ON Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7 XN GM OFF Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7 XN GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø ˛ XG Native Receive Transmit F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 Code (Hexadecimal) XG Parameter Change Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø ˛ F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø ˛ Receive Transmit Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Clavinova Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7 03 Message Request for Internal Synch. Mode Request for External Synch. Mode Message Exclusive Receive Transmit F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Code (Hexadecimal) Rhythm Start Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø ˛ Receive Transmit ˛ Ø Electone Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7 00 Switch ON Switch OFF Ø Ø Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛ Ø N: Device Number (“0” on ELS-01/01C) ID: Model ID (ELS-01C=4DH, ELS-01=4EH) Appendix ˛: don’t care ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 229 14 *1. Switches nn Switch Receive Transmit 45H Left Footswitch Ø Ø 47H Knee Lever Ø Ø *2. Panel Switch Events MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7 Selectors cc Switch Code 0F Registration Memory [1-16] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-0F] ˛ - Volume cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 19 Lead Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN Organ Flute Voice cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 30 Upper Organ Flute Voice [U. ORGAN FLUTES] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 31 Lower Organ Flute Voice [L. ORGAN FLUTES] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range To Lower cc Switch Code dd Remarks 36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▼] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] Solo Mode cc Switch Code 39 Lead Voice 2 Solo (Knee) [SOLO (KNEE)] Appendix 14 230 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual dd Remarks 00:OFF, 01:ON Brilliance cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW Sustain cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Solo Bar cc Switch Code 59 Solo Bar dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] ˛ - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF, 01:ON Keyboard Percussion cc Switch Code dd Remarks 5B Keyboard Percussion [1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 5C Keyboard Percussion [2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Disable cc Switch Code 5F Disable [D.] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Rotary Speaker cc Switch Code 60 Rotary Speaker Speed [ROTARY SP SPEED] dd Remarks 00:OFF, 01:ON Rhythm Sequence cc Switch Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Appendix Code dd ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 231 14 *3. MIDI Parameter Voice Section Parameters MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7 Panel Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 7 = UK1, UK2, LK1, LK2, LEAD 1, LEAD 2, PEDAL 1, PEDAL 2) Address Appendix 14 232 Size Data Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00-0D 5 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Voice Assign Number 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D 10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:BRILLIANT 40:CENTER 7F:MELLOW Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET 01:16' 02:8' 03:4' 04:2' Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04 10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT 40:CENTER 7F:RIGHT Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78 10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 17 1 00-7F Touch Tone After Touch 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 18 1 00-7F Pitch After Touch 00:NARROW 7F:WIDE Ø 00-7F Ø 32-4E 10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET 01:USER Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT 7F:LONG Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A 10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54 10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW 7F:FAST Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C 10 00-05 1D 1 00-7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00:NARROW 7F:WIDE Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato (On/Off) 00:OFF 7F:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲/SOLO (KNEE) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Knee Lever/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON 02:Knee Lever Ø 00-02 Ø 00-02 10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F 10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down 40:Center 7F:Up Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-01/ 04-07 23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 10 06-07 28 1 00-7F Poly (On/Off) 00:Mono 01:Poly Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 05 29 1 00-7F Priority (Last/Top) 00:TOP 01:LAST Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF 01:Mute ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Parameter Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 40 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 51 3 00 00-7F 00-7F 10 00-07 52 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 53 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 54 2 10 00-07 55 10 00-07 56 10 00-07 10 00-07 10 00-07 59 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 60 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 61 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 63 1 00-7F hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 10 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 57 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 58 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 16 Sustain Length 0000-7F7F 7F:Hold 7E:Long 00:Short 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F Appendix Effect 2 Type MSB/LSB ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 233 14 Organ Flute Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 1 = UK, LK) Address Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00 1 00-7F Footage 16' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-01 01 1 00-7F Footage 8' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 02 1 00-7F Footage 5-1/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 03 1 00-7F Footage 4' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 04 1 00-7F Footage 2-2/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 05 1 00-7F Footage 2' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 06 1 00-7F Footage 1-3/5' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 07 1 00-7F Footage 1-1/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 08 1 00-7F Footage 1' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 09 1 00-7F Response 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0A 1 00-7F Attack 4' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0B 1 00-7F Attack 2-2/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0C 1 00-7F Attack 2' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0D 1 00-7F Attack Length 00:Short 7F:Long Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 10 1 00-7F Organ Flutes (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 11 00-01 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 13 1 00-7F Type (Sine/Vintage) 00:Sine 01:Vintage Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 11 00-01 40 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F 11 00-01 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 11 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 12 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 13 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 14 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 15 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect Parameter 16 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 63 1 00-7F Ø 00-7F Ø 15-3D, 7F hh mm ll 11 00-01 11 Appendix 14 234 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Parameter Sustain Length Data 7F:Hold 7E:Long 00:Short Keyboard Parameters Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL) Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short 7F:Long Ø 00-7F ˛ - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2]) Address Size Data 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00:PRESET 01:USER 1 02:USER 2 03:USER 3 04:USER 4 05:USER 5 06:USER 6 07:USER 7 08:USER 8 Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00-0B hh mm ll 12 01-02 12 01-02 Parameter Data Rhythm Address Size Data 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Tempo Control (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1 01:INTRO 2 02:INTRO 3 08:MAIN A 09:MAIN B 0A:MAIN C 0B:MAIN D 18:BREAK 20:ENDING 1 21:ENDING 2 22:ENDING 3 7E:STOP 7F:OFF (INTRO 1 – STOP) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 hh mm ll 13 00 13 13 Parameter Rhythm Assign Number ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Appendix Rhythm Parameters 235 14 MIDI Implementation chart Rhythm Sequence Parameters Address hh mm ll 13 01 00-03 Size Data 1 00-7F Parameter Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] Data 00:OFF 01:ON Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø 00-7F ˛ - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Accompaniment Parameters Address Size Data 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F hh mm ll 13 02 13 02 Parameter Data A.B.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter 00 1 00-7F 03 01 1 03 02 1 hh mm ll 13 03 13 13 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF 01:Single Finger 02:Fingered 03:Custom A.B.C. Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 M.O.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Knee Lever Control (On/Off) Size Data hh mm ll 13 04 13 04 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF 01:1 02:2 03:3 Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Section Parameters Address 236 Data mm ll 13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Appendix 14 Parameter hh ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Keyboard Percussion Parameters Address Size Data 11 1 00-7F Volume 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) Size Data hh mm ll 13 10 13 10 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Overall System Parameters Address Parameter Data hh mm ll 14 00 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 01 1 00-7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00:Each 01:First Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C 0C:1200 C Ø 01-0C Ø 01-0C 14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF 01:Rhythm 02:Glide 03:Rotary Speaker Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown 40:Normal 7F:PitchUp Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C 14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 0A 3 00-04 00-04 (00-03)* 00-0B Registration Menu 00-04 00-04 (00-03) 00-0B Ø 00-04 00-04 (00-03) 00-0B Ø 00-04 00-04 (00-03) 00-0B 14 00 0B 1 00-01 Disable Mode 00:Normal 01:Tempo Ø 00-01 Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range *ELS-01 Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb Address Size Data Parameter Data hh mm ll 14 01 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45 14 01 02 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Reverb Type (Panel) 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Effect Parameters (Overall): Rhythm Reverb Size Data 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Rhythm) 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45 02 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Reverb Type (Rhythm) 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F mm ll 14 02 14 02 Parameter Data Appendix Address hh ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 237 14 Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 03 01 1 00-7F 03 02 2 0000007F hh mm ll 14 03 14 14 *4. Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - Rotary Speaker Speed Control Mode 00:STOP 01:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Rotary Speaker Speed Control Speed 0000:SLOW 007F:FAST Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F Receive Transmit 01H Play Start Command Ø ˛ 02H Play Stop Ø ˛ 03H Record Start Ø ˛ 04H Record Stop Ø ˛ 05H Fast Forward Start Ø ˛ 06H Fast Forward Stop Ø ˛ 09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø ˛ Appendix 238 Receive MDR nn 14 Parameter ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Data MIDI Implementation Chart Date: 10-Oct-2008 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: ELS-01/01C typeU Transmitted Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 (*1) 1-16 1-3, 5-16 (*2) 4 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode 3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 0-127 (*4) :True Voice 36-96 (*3) ************************ Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø (*6) Ø Ø (*5) Ø ˛ ˛ Ø (*7, *12) ˛ Ø (*7) Ø (*8, *12) ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*7) Ø (*6) Ø (*6, 7) Ø (*8, *12) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*10) ************************ Ø (*11) System Exclusive Ø Ø System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø Ø (*9) Ø :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) (*6) Ø (121) (*6) ˛ Ø (123-127) (*6) Ø ˛ Note Number Velocity Note on Note off After Touch Key's Ch's Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change Aux Messages 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 16 96, 97 64-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 98-99, 100-101 :True number Notes Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *1; *2; *3; *4; *5; *6; *8; *10; *11; *12; Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression VA After Touch Data Entry SW Sound Controller NRPN, RPN (FAH, FCH) 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL UK: 36-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60 UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127 UK: UK HorizontalTouch, LK: LK HorizontalTouch XG only *7; CONTROL only UK only *9; External Mode only CONTROL: 0-15 UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127 ELS-01C only Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Appendix Function Ø : Yes ˛ : No ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 239 14 YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: ELS-01/01C typeU Function Transmitted (*1) Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 36-96 ************************ 0-127 :True Voice Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø (*2) ˛ Ø Ø (*2) ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 0-15 ************************ Ø System Exclusive Ø Ø System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Aux Messages :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) Ø (121) ˛ Ø (123-127) Ø ˛ Note Number Velocity Note on Note off After Touch Key's Ch's Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 16 96, 97 64-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 98-99, 100-101 :True number Notes *1; *2; Date: 10-Oct-2008 Version: 1.00 Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression VA After Touch Data Entry SW Sound Controller NRPN, RPN Same as that in the EL mode ELS-01C only Appendix 14 Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 240 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Ø : Yes ˛ : No Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution GENERAL OPERATION The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after turning the power on. This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up. A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem. Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone. The sound of the Electone causes surrounding objects to resonate. Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume. In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit) or white points (always lit). Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs. Some buttons on the panel do not respond. The UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES and LEAD VOICE 2 buttons are invalid on the ELS-01. If you upgrade the ELS-01 to the ELS-01C, these buttons can be used. Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT section do not light. The LEDs of on/off buttons (UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES, VOICE EDIT, RHYTHM PROGRAM, and ROTARY SP SPEED) are lit when those functions are turned on. The LEDs of other function’s buttons momentarily light when the functions are selected. The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum. • The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it clockwise. • The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe. • The POWER switch of the speaker may have been turned off. Turn it on. • (For the ELS-01C) The REAR SPEAKER switch may have been set to OFF. Switch it to ON. The Electone panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed. This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/ or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set operation to reset the Electone (page 21). VOICES/RHYTHMS The pitch may sound excessively high on the Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards. This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano. Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges. When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes sound. Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is 14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the total is 14 for all keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard. When sustain length is set to HOLD, previously played notes are cut off. Since the HOLD setting causes notes to keep sounding, the cumulative notes (elements) may go over the maximum elements that the Electone can sound. When this occurs, previously played notes are cut off. Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played. For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want, the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 40). The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the volume is properly set. • The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off the mode in the display (page 62). • TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the function off (page 26). ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Appendix Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely sounds. added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks. 241 14 Problem Possible Cause and Solution When selecting a User button Voice or rhythm, the Voice or rhythm title at the top of the LCD does not match the selected Voice or rhythm. The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected. When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard. The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the function, be sure to turn it off (page 65). Even though a User button’s rhythm has been selected and started, the pattern does not sound. Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has not been saved to the selected User button. EFFECTS The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 39). The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice sections, even when the REVERB button setting on the panel is increased. Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display Pages 2 – 4. The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on. Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/ or 4 (for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page (for Organ Flute Voices). ACCOMPANIMENT The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change, even when pressing different keys of the keyboard. Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch. While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played. Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/Ending pattern. The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started. • The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 62). • All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on (page 61). The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function cannot be heard. The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices. The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be heard. The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition display (page 40). REGISTRATION MEMORY Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory. Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 81. VOICE EDITING The Voice Edit display cannot be called up even when The Voice Edit display cannot called up by pressing only the [VOICE EDIT] the [VOICE EDIT] button is pressed. button. While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the desired Voice button. During Voice editing, the specified Voice isn’t heard, even when the keyboard is played. • The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or increase the volume. • You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys within the Note Limit range. An error message appears while the Voice name is entered. Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or spaces. RHYTHM PROGRAM During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no sound is produced even when you play a certain percussion sound. Appendix 14 242 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary, erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again. Problem Possible Cause and Solution MUSIC DATA RECORDER The USB flash memory is not recognized. The USB cable of the USB unit is disconnected. Firmly connect the cable to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY. • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. • The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect. • The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record the song to it. Recording is stopped before the performance is finished. • The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit. Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs. • When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the previously recorded song, then record again (page 126). • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. An error message appears while entering a folder name or song name. • The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters. • The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 110. • The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters. Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path. The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording, or stops in the middle of the performance. The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time indicator appears in the display. The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted. format an unformatted disk. Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again. During playback, you may have removed the USB flash memory. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop) button before removing the media. Appendix The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound continuously. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 243 14 Specifications TONE GENERATION Electone STAGEA ELS-01 typeU (ELS-01U) Electone STAGEA ELS-01C typeU (ELS-01CU) AWM (4) AWM (4) + VA + Organ Flutes KEYBOARD Upper: 49 keys (C – C), Lower: 49 keys (C – C), Pedal: 20 keys (C – G) Keyboard Type Standard (FS) Initial Touch After Touch Horizontal Touch REGISTRATION Registration Menu Upper, Lower Upper, Lower, Pedal — Upper, Lower 240 300 Registration Memory M. (Memory), 1 – 16, D. (Disable) Registration Shift VOICE Voice Sections Voice Buttons STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN, PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2 Lead VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1), SOLO (Lead 2) Preset Voice User Voice Organ Flute Voice Rotary Speaker Control Sustain Reverb Effects RHYTHM Rhythm Buttons Preset Rhythm Pattern Parts Sections ACCOMPANIMENT Accompaniment Parts 244 VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, VA-ACOUSTIC, VA-VIRTUAL, VA-ELECTRONIC, VA-CUSTOM, USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1), SOLO (Lead 2) CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER 415 509 (including VA Voices) AWM: 16 AWM:16, VA: 6 — Type: Sine, Vintage Footage: 16', 5 1/3', 8', 4', 2 2/3', 2', 1 3/5', 1 1/3', 1' Attack: 4', 2 2/3', 2', Length, Response Effect: XG Rotary Sp, Rotary Sp 1 – 5, 2Way Rot Sp, Dual Rotsp 1 – 2, Dist+Rot Sp, Odrv+Rot Sp, Amp+Rot Sp, Dist+2Rot Sp, Odrv+2Rop Sp, Amp+2Rot Sp, OFF 2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop Upper 1, 2 (KNEE), Lower 1, 2 (KNEE), Pedal 1, 2 Type: Hall 1 – 3, M, L, Room 1 – 4, S, M, L, Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, White Room, Tunnel, Canyon, Basement, XG Hall 1 – 2, XG Room 1 – 3, XG Stage 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate Depth: Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2, Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion Type: Hall 1 – 3, M, L, Room 1 – 4, S, M, L, Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, White Room, Tunnel, Canyon, Basement, XG Hall 1 – 2, XG Room 1 – 3, XG Stage 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate Depth: Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2, Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion, Upper Organ Flute, Lower Organ Flute Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan, Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Pitch Change, Miscellaneous, Thru MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD, ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2 274 Main Drum, Add Drum Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2 Auto Bass Chord OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C. Memory: Lower, Pedal Melody On Chord OFF, 1, 2, 3, Knee Appendix 14 Shift, Jump, User (80) Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2 Upper/ Lower Pedal EFFECT/ CONDITION Custom (FSV) Upper, Lower, Pedal ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Electone STAGEA ELS-01 typeU (ELS-01U) PROGRAMS Voice Edit ✓ Rhythm Pattern Program ✓ Rhythm Sequence Program SEQ. 1 – 4 (Rhythm and Registration program) Keyboard Percussion CONTROLS Electone STAGEA ELS-01C typeU (ELS-01CU) Footswitch Left Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 8 Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A-D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3 Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Glide Time Rotary Speaker Speed Right Registration Shift ✓ Expression Pedal 2nd Expression Pedal Pitch Bend, Tempo (set only, not controlled) Knee Lever Sustain (Upper 1, 2/Lower 1, 2), M.O.C., Lead Slide, Solo (Lead 2) Transpose -6 – +6 Pitch A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz MIDI Control ✓ Main Controls POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME M.D.R. Up, In, Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record, Custom Play, Score, Setting (Tempo/Part), Registration Edit Tools: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete, Conversion (XG/EL/ELS format), Format, Information Utility Language (English/Japanese), Touch Panel Sound, LCD Brightness, Mic. (Reverb/Volume), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo), Initialize Display Select OTHERS Pitch Bend, Tempo VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, INTERNET, VOICE EDIT, RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM, RHYTHM SEQUENCE PROGRAM, ROTARY SP SPEED LCD Display Sound System VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, INTERNET, VOICE EDIT, RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM, RHYTHM SEQUENCE PROGRAM, U. ORGAN FLUTES, L. ORGAN FLUTES, ROTARY SP SPEED 800 x RGB x 480 dots Power Amplifiers 50W x 2 70W x 2 Speakers Cone: 13 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2 Monitor speaker: 6.6 cm x 2 Cone: 13 cm x 8 Dome: 2.5 cm x 4 Monitor speaker: 6.6 cm x 2 Storage USB storage device (such as USB flash memory, USB floppy disk drive, etc.) Connectors PHONES (2), AUX OUT: L/L+R (standard phone), L/R (Level Fixed, RCA), AUX IN: L/L+R (standard phone), MIDI IN/OUT, USB TO DEVICE (2; one terminal has been connected to the USB unit.), OPTICAL OUT, MIC./LINE IN (jack, switch, and volume control) Power Consumption Dimensions (W x D x H), Weight Bench Color Supplied Accessories 130W 1229 x 574 x 1017 (1276 with Music Rest) mm, 100 kg 1229 x 574 x 1017 (1276 with Music Rest) mm, 109 kg 781 x 305 x 618 mm, 8.8 kg 915 x 365 x 618 mm, 12.1 kg Silver Metallic Bench, Owner's Manual, Tutorial Guidebook, Product ID card Appendix Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 245 14 Index Numerics E 2nd Expression Pedal............................................................. 190 EACH (Organ Flutes).................................................................36 EFFECT......................................................................................42 Effect category (Voice)..............................................................42 Effect Parameters ......................................................................43 EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes)....................................................37 Effect type (Voice) .....................................................................43 Element....................................................................................131 ENDING.....................................................................................53 Envelope Parameters ..............................................................140 EQ (Equalizer) .................................................................135, 140 EQ/ENHANCER (Effect) ............................................................50 ER/KARAOKE ............................................................................50 Expression pedal.......................................................................12 EXTERNAL...............................................................................222 A A.B.C./M.O.C. ..................................................................... 62, 64 ACCENT.................................................................................. 152 Accompaniment........................................................................ 61 Add Drum ................................................................................. 61 AFTER touch (Pitch).................................................................. 40 AFTER touch (Touch Tone)....................................................... 39 ASSEMBLE ............................................................................. 148 ASSIGN (Keyboard Percussion)............................................... 70 ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 36 ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit)............................................. 137, 140 Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 62 Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 54 AUX IN .................................................................................... 209 AUX OUT ................................................................................ 209 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) ....................................................... 209 AWM (Voice Edit).................................................................... 134 AWM Voice ............................................................................... 34 B BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 56 Bookmark................................................................................ 199 BREAK ...................................................................................... 53 BRILLIANCE (Panel) ................................................................. 47 Browser........................................................................... 196, 203 C CHANGE SONG NAME .......................................................... 108 Channel Messages ................................................................. 219 CHORD 1 .................................................................................. 61 CHORD 2 .................................................................................. 61 CHORUS (Effect) ...................................................................... 50 CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 164 Control Change....................................................................... 219 Control Menu .......................................................................... 196 CONVERT EL TO ELS............................................................. 129 CONVERT ELS TO EL............................................................. 129 CONVERT TO XG ................................................................... 128 CUSTOM A.B.C. ....................................................................... 63 CUTOFF FREQ........................................................................ 137 D Appendix [D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 82 DATA CONTROL dial................................................................ 10 DECAY RATE .......................................................................... 140 DELAY (Effect) .......................................................................... 50 DELAY (Vibrato)........................................................................ 41 DEPTH (Reverb) ....................................................................... 44 DEPTH (Vibrato)........................................................................ 41 Display Select ........................................................................... 10 DISTORTION............................................................................. 50 DYNAMIC.................................................................................. 50 14 246 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual F Factory Set ................................................................................21 Fast Forward............................................................................119 FEET ..........................................................................................40 File .............................................................................................99 FILL IN .......................................................................................53 Filter.........................................................................................137 FINGERED CHORD...................................................................63 FIRST (Organ Flutes).................................................................36 FLANGER ..................................................................................50 Floppy disk ..............................................................................101 Folder ........................................................................................99 FOOT SWITCH ..................................................................86, 185 FOOTAGE..................................................................................35 Footswitch ...............................................................................185 FORMAT (MDR).......................................................................102 G Gate Time ................................................................................160 Glide ........................................................................................187 H Headphones............................................................................211 Home Page..............................................................................202 HORIZONTAL touch..................................................................40 I INITIAL touch.............................................................................39 Initialize (Factory Set) ................................................................21 Initialize (Internet Settings) ......................................................206 Initialize (Registration Memory) .................................................85 INPUT VOLUME ......................................................................208 INTERNAL ...............................................................................222 INTERNET................................................................................195 Internet Direct Connection ......................................................194 INTRO........................................................................................52 J P Jacks and Controls ................................................................. 208 JUMP ........................................................................................ 86 PAD ...........................................................................................61 PAN (Voice Edit)......................................................................136 PAN (Voice) ...............................................................................39 Part (Rhythm).............................................................................61 PART SETUP (MDR) ................................................................104 PATTERN.................................................................................144 Pause.......................................................................................119 Pedal polyphonic mode ............................................................40 Pedal Voice ...............................................................................23 PEDAL VOICE (Panel) .................................................................9 PHASER.....................................................................................50 PHONES ..................................................................................208 PHRASE 1..................................................................................61 PHRASE 2..................................................................................61 Pitch.........................................................................................193 PITCH (Voice Section)...............................................................40 Pitch Bend ...............................................................................191 PITCH CHANGE ........................................................................50 Playback..................................................................................117 POLY .........................................................................................40 POWER......................................................................................11 PRESET (Vibrato).......................................................................41 Preset Keyboard Percussion.....................................................65 PRESET TEMPO ........................................................................57 PRIORITY...................................................................................40 Program Change .....................................................................219 Protected Song........................................................................116 Punch-in Recording.................................................................108 Keyboard Percussion ............................................................... 65 Knee Lever.............................................................................. 188 L L. ORGAN FLUTES ................................................................... 35 LAN ......................................................................................... 204 LANGUAGE .............................................................................. 15 LAST (Lead Voice).................................................................... 40 LAYER (Voice Edit) ................................................................. 135 LCD BRIGHTNESS ................................................................... 16 LCD Display.............................................................................. 10 Lead Slide................................................................................. 42 Lead Voice................................................................................ 22 LEAD VOICE (Panel)................................................................... 9 LEVEL (Voice Edit).......................................................... 136, 139 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)............................................. 139 Lower Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 23 LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel)........................................... 8 M [M.] (Memory) ........................................................................... 80 M.O.C........................................................................................ 64 MAIN ......................................................................................... 52 Main Drum ................................................................................ 61 MAIN/FILL IN ............................................................................ 52 MASTER VOLUME .................................................................... 11 MDR .......................................................................................... 95 Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 64 MEMORY (A.B.C.)..................................................................... 64 METRONOME ......................................................................... 147 MIC./LINE IN jack ................................................................... 208 MIC./LINE switch .................................................................... 208 MIDI ........................................................................................ 218 MIDI Control............................................................................ 221 MIDI IN/OUT ........................................................................... 210 MIDI OUT FILTER ................................................................... 221 MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................... 50 MODE (Organ Flutes) ............................................................... 36 MODE (Rotary Speaker) ........................................................... 49 Music Data Recorder................................................................ 95 N Next Page ............................................................................... 123 Next Regist ............................................................................. 113 NEXT REGIST (Shift End).......................................................... 88 NOTE LIMIT ............................................................................ 136 NOTE SHIFT............................................................................ 136 O OPTICAL OUT......................................................................... 210 Organ Flutes ............................................................................. 35 OUTPUT (MIDI)....................................................................... 221 Q Quantize ..................................................................................156 R Real Time Write ...............................................................149, 157 Recording................................................................................105 Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only)......................................106 Recording (Part) ......................................................................106 REGIST EDIT (MDR)................................................................111 Registration Memory .................................................................80 REGISTRATION MENU .............................................................19 Registration Sequence ............................................................179 Registration Shift .......................................................................85 RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit) ...........................................137, 140 Repeat .....................................................................................120 Re-recording (Retry)................................................................106 RESONANCE...........................................................................137 RESP. (Response) .....................................................................36 Reverb .......................................................................................43 REVERB (MIC.)........................................................................215 REVERB (Panel) ........................................................................43 REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ........................................163 Rewind.....................................................................................119 Rhythm ......................................................................................51 Rhythm button ...........................................................................51 Rhythm Clock ..........................................................................151 Rhythm Condition ......................................................................54 Rhythm Menu ............................................................................52 Rhythm Pattern Program .........................................................144 Rhythm Program......................................................................143 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual Appendix K 247 14 Rhythm Sequence Program.................................................... 174 Rhythmic Chord ...................................................................... 158 ROTARY SP SPEED .................................................................. 48 Rotary Speaker ......................................................................... 48 User button (Voice) ...................................................................28 User Keyboard Percussion .......................................................70 User Rhythm............................................................................167 User Voice ...............................................................................141 UTILITY......................................................................................15 S SCORE.................................................................................... 122 Sections .................................................................................... 52 SEQUENCE............................................................................. 174 SHIFT (Registration Shift).......................................................... 86 SHIFT END................................................................................ 88 SINGLE FINGER ....................................................................... 63 SLIDE ........................................................................................ 42 SLOW (Rotary Speaker)............................................................ 49 SOLO ........................................................................................ 27 Song.................................................................................. 99, 103 Song Copy .............................................................................. 124 Song Delete ............................................................................ 126 Specifications ......................................................................... 244 SPEED (Rotary Speaker) .......................................................... 49 SPEED (Vibrato)........................................................................ 41 START ....................................................................................... 53 Step Write ............................................................................... 149 STOP (Rotary Speaker)............................................................. 49 STOP (Shift End) ....................................................................... 88 Style File Format ..................................................................... 170 Sustain ...................................................................................... 47 SUSTAIN (Panel)....................................................................... 47 SYNCHRO START..................................................................... 53 System Exclusive Messages .................................................. 219 System Messages................................................................... 219 V VA (Voice Edit) ........................................................................139 VA Custom Voice.....................................................................141 VA Voice ....................................................................................34 VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................165 Version.......................................................................................21 VIBRATO ...................................................................................41 Voice..........................................................................................22 Voice button ..............................................................................23 Voice Condition ...................................................................25, 39 VOICE DISPLAY ........................................................................17 Voice Edit ................................................................................131 VOICE EDIT (Panel).................................................................133 Voice Menu................................................................................24 Voice section .............................................................................22 Volume (Accompaniment).........................................................62 Volume (Keyboard Percussion).................................................66 VOLUME (MIC.).......................................................................215 VOLUME (Organ Flutes)............................................................36 VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) .......................................162 VOLUME (Rhythm) ....................................................................55 VOLUME (Voice) .......................................................................25 W WAH ..........................................................................................50 Wireless LAN ...........................................................................204 T Tempo (MDR) ......................................................................... 119 TEMPO (Rhythm) ...................................................................... 56 THRU (Effect)............................................................................ 50 TIME (Slide) .............................................................................. 42 TO LOWER................................................................................ 26 TOP (Lead Voice) ..................................................................... 40 TOP (Shift End) ......................................................................... 88 TOUCH PANEL SOUND ........................................................... 16 TOUCH TONE........................................................................... 39 TOUCH VIBRATO ..................................................................... 41 Transpose ............................................................................... 193 TRANSPOSE (Voice section) .................................................... 42 TREMOLO/AUTO PAN.............................................................. 50 TUNE (Voice section)................................................................ 42 TUNE FINE (Voice Edit) .......................................................... 136 U Appendix U. ORGAN FLUTES .................................................................. 35 UD-FD01 ................................................................................. 224 Upper Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 22 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel)............................................ 8 USB flash memory .................................................................. 100 USB TO DEVICE ..................................................... 100, 210, 216 USB unit .................................................................................. 210 USER (Registration Shift) .......................................................... 87 USER (Vibrato).......................................................................... 41 User button (Rhythm)................................................................ 58 14 248 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual X XG................................................................................................6 MEMO Appendix ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual 249 14 MEMO ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Appendix 14 250 ELS-01/01C Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB48 Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink. U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2004 – 2011 Yamaha Corporation WR03710 109MWCP**-**E0 Printed in Japan-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
-
208
-
209
-
210
-
211
-
212
-
213
-
214
-
215
-
216
-
217
-
218
-
219
-
220
-
221
-
222
-
223
-
224
-
225
-
226
-
227
-
228
-
229
-
230
-
231
-
232
-
233
-
234
-
235
-
236
-
237
-
238
-
239
-
240
-
241
-
242
-
243
-
244
-
245
-
246
-
247
-
248
-
249
-
250
-
251
-
252
Yamaha ELS-01 de handleiding
- Categorie
- Digitale piano's
- Type
- de handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha ELS-01 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha ELS-01 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha ELS-01 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha ELS-01 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha ELS-01 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha ELS-01 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha ELS-01 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha ELS-01 Brugervejledning
- čeština: Yamaha ELS-01 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha ELS-01 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha ELS-01 El kitabı
- polski: Yamaha ELS-01 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha ELS-01 Manualul proprietarului